US20110157326A1 - Multi-path and multi-source 3d content storage, retrieval, and delivery - Google Patents
Multi-path and multi-source 3d content storage, retrieval, and delivery Download PDFInfo
- Publication number
- US20110157326A1 US20110157326A1 US12/982,330 US98233010A US2011157326A1 US 20110157326 A1 US20110157326 A1 US 20110157326A1 US 98233010 A US98233010 A US 98233010A US 2011157326 A1 US2011157326 A1 US 2011157326A1
- Authority
- US
- United States
- Prior art keywords
- circuitry
- content
- dimensional
- viewing content
- view
- Prior art date
- Legal status (The legal status is an assumption and is not a legal conclusion. Google has not performed a legal analysis and makes no representation as to the accuracy of the status listed.)
- Abandoned
Links
Images
Classifications
-
- H—ELECTRICITY
- H04—ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
- H04N—PICTORIAL COMMUNICATION, e.g. TELEVISION
- H04N13/00—Stereoscopic video systems; Multi-view video systems; Details thereof
- H04N13/30—Image reproducers
- H04N13/361—Reproducing mixed stereoscopic images; Reproducing mixed monoscopic and stereoscopic images, e.g. a stereoscopic image overlay window on a monoscopic image background
-
- G—PHYSICS
- G03—PHOTOGRAPHY; CINEMATOGRAPHY; ANALOGOUS TECHNIQUES USING WAVES OTHER THAN OPTICAL WAVES; ELECTROGRAPHY; HOLOGRAPHY
- G03B—APPARATUS OR ARRANGEMENTS FOR TAKING PHOTOGRAPHS OR FOR PROJECTING OR VIEWING THEM; APPARATUS OR ARRANGEMENTS EMPLOYING ANALOGOUS TECHNIQUES USING WAVES OTHER THAN OPTICAL WAVES; ACCESSORIES THEREFOR
- G03B35/00—Stereoscopic photography
- G03B35/18—Stereoscopic photography by simultaneous viewing
- G03B35/24—Stereoscopic photography by simultaneous viewing using apertured or refractive resolving means on screens or between screen and eye
-
- G—PHYSICS
- G06—COMPUTING; CALCULATING OR COUNTING
- G06F—ELECTRIC DIGITAL DATA PROCESSING
- G06F3/00—Input arrangements for transferring data to be processed into a form capable of being handled by the computer; Output arrangements for transferring data from processing unit to output unit, e.g. interface arrangements
- G06F3/14—Digital output to display device ; Cooperation and interconnection of the display device with other functional units
-
- G—PHYSICS
- G09—EDUCATION; CRYPTOGRAPHY; DISPLAY; ADVERTISING; SEALS
- G09G—ARRANGEMENTS OR CIRCUITS FOR CONTROL OF INDICATING DEVICES USING STATIC MEANS TO PRESENT VARIABLE INFORMATION
- G09G3/00—Control arrangements or circuits, of interest only in connection with visual indicators other than cathode-ray tubes
- G09G3/001—Control arrangements or circuits, of interest only in connection with visual indicators other than cathode-ray tubes using specific devices not provided for in groups G09G3/02 - G09G3/36, e.g. using an intermediate record carrier such as a film slide; Projection systems; Display of non-alphanumerical information, solely or in combination with alphanumerical information, e.g. digital display on projected diapositive as background
- G09G3/003—Control arrangements or circuits, of interest only in connection with visual indicators other than cathode-ray tubes using specific devices not provided for in groups G09G3/02 - G09G3/36, e.g. using an intermediate record carrier such as a film slide; Projection systems; Display of non-alphanumerical information, solely or in combination with alphanumerical information, e.g. digital display on projected diapositive as background to produce spatial visual effects
-
- G—PHYSICS
- G09—EDUCATION; CRYPTOGRAPHY; DISPLAY; ADVERTISING; SEALS
- G09G—ARRANGEMENTS OR CIRCUITS FOR CONTROL OF INDICATING DEVICES USING STATIC MEANS TO PRESENT VARIABLE INFORMATION
- G09G3/00—Control arrangements or circuits, of interest only in connection with visual indicators other than cathode-ray tubes
- G09G3/20—Control arrangements or circuits, of interest only in connection with visual indicators other than cathode-ray tubes for presentation of an assembly of a number of characters, e.g. a page, by composing the assembly by combination of individual elements arranged in a matrix no fixed position being assigned to or needed to be assigned to the individual characters or partial characters
-
- H—ELECTRICITY
- H04—ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
- H04N—PICTORIAL COMMUNICATION, e.g. TELEVISION
- H04N13/00—Stereoscopic video systems; Multi-view video systems; Details thereof
-
- H—ELECTRICITY
- H04—ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
- H04N—PICTORIAL COMMUNICATION, e.g. TELEVISION
- H04N13/00—Stereoscopic video systems; Multi-view video systems; Details thereof
- H04N13/10—Processing, recording or transmission of stereoscopic or multi-view image signals
- H04N13/106—Processing image signals
- H04N13/139—Format conversion, e.g. of frame-rate or size
-
- H—ELECTRICITY
- H04—ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
- H04N—PICTORIAL COMMUNICATION, e.g. TELEVISION
- H04N13/00—Stereoscopic video systems; Multi-view video systems; Details thereof
- H04N13/10—Processing, recording or transmission of stereoscopic or multi-view image signals
- H04N13/106—Processing image signals
- H04N13/161—Encoding, multiplexing or demultiplexing different image signal components
-
- H—ELECTRICITY
- H04—ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
- H04N—PICTORIAL COMMUNICATION, e.g. TELEVISION
- H04N13/00—Stereoscopic video systems; Multi-view video systems; Details thereof
- H04N13/10—Processing, recording or transmission of stereoscopic or multi-view image signals
- H04N13/189—Recording image signals; Reproducing recorded image signals
-
- H—ELECTRICITY
- H04—ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
- H04N—PICTORIAL COMMUNICATION, e.g. TELEVISION
- H04N13/00—Stereoscopic video systems; Multi-view video systems; Details thereof
- H04N13/10—Processing, recording or transmission of stereoscopic or multi-view image signals
- H04N13/194—Transmission of image signals
-
- H—ELECTRICITY
- H04—ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
- H04N—PICTORIAL COMMUNICATION, e.g. TELEVISION
- H04N13/00—Stereoscopic video systems; Multi-view video systems; Details thereof
- H04N13/30—Image reproducers
- H04N13/302—Image reproducers for viewing without the aid of special glasses, i.e. using autostereoscopic displays
- H04N13/305—Image reproducers for viewing without the aid of special glasses, i.e. using autostereoscopic displays using lenticular lenses, e.g. arrangements of cylindrical lenses
-
- H—ELECTRICITY
- H04—ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
- H04N—PICTORIAL COMMUNICATION, e.g. TELEVISION
- H04N13/00—Stereoscopic video systems; Multi-view video systems; Details thereof
- H04N13/30—Image reproducers
- H04N13/302—Image reproducers for viewing without the aid of special glasses, i.e. using autostereoscopic displays
- H04N13/31—Image reproducers for viewing without the aid of special glasses, i.e. using autostereoscopic displays using parallax barriers
-
- H—ELECTRICITY
- H04—ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
- H04N—PICTORIAL COMMUNICATION, e.g. TELEVISION
- H04N13/00—Stereoscopic video systems; Multi-view video systems; Details thereof
- H04N13/30—Image reproducers
- H04N13/302—Image reproducers for viewing without the aid of special glasses, i.e. using autostereoscopic displays
- H04N13/31—Image reproducers for viewing without the aid of special glasses, i.e. using autostereoscopic displays using parallax barriers
- H04N13/312—Image reproducers for viewing without the aid of special glasses, i.e. using autostereoscopic displays using parallax barriers the parallax barriers being placed behind the display panel, e.g. between backlight and spatial light modulator [SLM]
-
- H—ELECTRICITY
- H04—ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
- H04N—PICTORIAL COMMUNICATION, e.g. TELEVISION
- H04N13/00—Stereoscopic video systems; Multi-view video systems; Details thereof
- H04N13/30—Image reproducers
- H04N13/302—Image reproducers for viewing without the aid of special glasses, i.e. using autostereoscopic displays
- H04N13/31—Image reproducers for viewing without the aid of special glasses, i.e. using autostereoscopic displays using parallax barriers
- H04N13/315—Image reproducers for viewing without the aid of special glasses, i.e. using autostereoscopic displays using parallax barriers the parallax barriers being time-variant
-
- H—ELECTRICITY
- H04—ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
- H04N—PICTORIAL COMMUNICATION, e.g. TELEVISION
- H04N13/00—Stereoscopic video systems; Multi-view video systems; Details thereof
- H04N13/30—Image reproducers
- H04N13/332—Displays for viewing with the aid of special glasses or head-mounted displays [HMD]
-
- H—ELECTRICITY
- H04—ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
- H04N—PICTORIAL COMMUNICATION, e.g. TELEVISION
- H04N13/00—Stereoscopic video systems; Multi-view video systems; Details thereof
- H04N13/30—Image reproducers
- H04N13/349—Multi-view displays for displaying three or more geometrical viewpoints without viewer tracking
- H04N13/351—Multi-view displays for displaying three or more geometrical viewpoints without viewer tracking for displaying simultaneously
-
- H—ELECTRICITY
- H04—ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
- H04N—PICTORIAL COMMUNICATION, e.g. TELEVISION
- H04N13/00—Stereoscopic video systems; Multi-view video systems; Details thereof
- H04N13/30—Image reproducers
- H04N13/356—Image reproducers having separate monoscopic and stereoscopic modes
- H04N13/359—Switching between monoscopic and stereoscopic modes
-
- H—ELECTRICITY
- H04—ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
- H04N—PICTORIAL COMMUNICATION, e.g. TELEVISION
- H04N13/00—Stereoscopic video systems; Multi-view video systems; Details thereof
- H04N13/30—Image reproducers
- H04N13/366—Image reproducers using viewer tracking
-
- H—ELECTRICITY
- H04—ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
- H04N—PICTORIAL COMMUNICATION, e.g. TELEVISION
- H04N13/00—Stereoscopic video systems; Multi-view video systems; Details thereof
- H04N13/30—Image reproducers
- H04N13/366—Image reproducers using viewer tracking
- H04N13/383—Image reproducers using viewer tracking for tracking with gaze detection, i.e. detecting the lines of sight of the viewer's eyes
-
- H—ELECTRICITY
- H04—ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
- H04N—PICTORIAL COMMUNICATION, e.g. TELEVISION
- H04N13/00—Stereoscopic video systems; Multi-view video systems; Details thereof
- H04N13/30—Image reproducers
- H04N13/398—Synchronisation thereof; Control thereof
-
- H—ELECTRICITY
- H04—ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
- H04N—PICTORIAL COMMUNICATION, e.g. TELEVISION
- H04N21/00—Selective content distribution, e.g. interactive television or video on demand [VOD]
- H04N21/20—Servers specifically adapted for the distribution of content, e.g. VOD servers; Operations thereof
- H04N21/23—Processing of content or additional data; Elementary server operations; Server middleware
- H04N21/235—Processing of additional data, e.g. scrambling of additional data or processing content descriptors
-
- H—ELECTRICITY
- H04—ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
- H04N—PICTORIAL COMMUNICATION, e.g. TELEVISION
- H04N21/00—Selective content distribution, e.g. interactive television or video on demand [VOD]
- H04N21/40—Client devices specifically adapted for the reception of or interaction with content, e.g. set-top-box [STB]; Operations thereof
- H04N21/41—Structure of client; Structure of client peripherals
- H04N21/4104—Peripherals receiving signals from specially adapted client devices
- H04N21/4122—Peripherals receiving signals from specially adapted client devices additional display device, e.g. video projector
-
- H—ELECTRICITY
- H04—ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
- H04N—PICTORIAL COMMUNICATION, e.g. TELEVISION
- H04N21/00—Selective content distribution, e.g. interactive television or video on demand [VOD]
- H04N21/40—Client devices specifically adapted for the reception of or interaction with content, e.g. set-top-box [STB]; Operations thereof
- H04N21/43—Processing of content or additional data, e.g. demultiplexing additional data from a digital video stream; Elementary client operations, e.g. monitoring of home network or synchronising decoder's clock; Client middleware
- H04N21/435—Processing of additional data, e.g. decrypting of additional data, reconstructing software from modules extracted from the transport stream
-
- H—ELECTRICITY
- H04—ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
- H04S—STEREOPHONIC SYSTEMS
- H04S7/00—Indicating arrangements; Control arrangements, e.g. balance control
- H04S7/30—Control circuits for electronic adaptation of the sound field
- H04S7/302—Electronic adaptation of stereophonic sound system to listener position or orientation
- H04S7/303—Tracking of listener position or orientation
-
- G—PHYSICS
- G02—OPTICS
- G02B—OPTICAL ELEMENTS, SYSTEMS OR APPARATUS
- G02B6/00—Light guides; Structural details of arrangements comprising light guides and other optical elements, e.g. couplings
-
- G—PHYSICS
- G06—COMPUTING; CALCULATING OR COUNTING
- G06F—ELECTRIC DIGITAL DATA PROCESSING
- G06F3/00—Input arrangements for transferring data to be processed into a form capable of being handled by the computer; Output arrangements for transferring data from processing unit to output unit, e.g. interface arrangements
- G06F3/01—Input arrangements or combined input and output arrangements for interaction between user and computer
- G06F3/03—Arrangements for converting the position or the displacement of a member into a coded form
- G06F3/033—Pointing devices displaced or positioned by the user, e.g. mice, trackballs, pens or joysticks; Accessories therefor
- G06F3/0346—Pointing devices displaced or positioned by the user, e.g. mice, trackballs, pens or joysticks; Accessories therefor with detection of the device orientation or free movement in a 3D space, e.g. 3D mice, 6-DOF [six degrees of freedom] pointers using gyroscopes, accelerometers or tilt-sensors
-
- G—PHYSICS
- G09—EDUCATION; CRYPTOGRAPHY; DISPLAY; ADVERTISING; SEALS
- G09G—ARRANGEMENTS OR CIRCUITS FOR CONTROL OF INDICATING DEVICES USING STATIC MEANS TO PRESENT VARIABLE INFORMATION
- G09G2300/00—Aspects of the constitution of display devices
- G09G2300/02—Composition of display devices
- G09G2300/023—Display panel composed of stacked panels
-
- G—PHYSICS
- G09—EDUCATION; CRYPTOGRAPHY; DISPLAY; ADVERTISING; SEALS
- G09G—ARRANGEMENTS OR CIRCUITS FOR CONTROL OF INDICATING DEVICES USING STATIC MEANS TO PRESENT VARIABLE INFORMATION
- G09G2320/00—Control of display operating conditions
- G09G2320/02—Improving the quality of display appearance
- G09G2320/028—Improving the quality of display appearance by changing the viewing angle properties, e.g. widening the viewing angle, adapting the viewing angle to the view direction
-
- G—PHYSICS
- G09—EDUCATION; CRYPTOGRAPHY; DISPLAY; ADVERTISING; SEALS
- G09G—ARRANGEMENTS OR CIRCUITS FOR CONTROL OF INDICATING DEVICES USING STATIC MEANS TO PRESENT VARIABLE INFORMATION
- G09G2370/00—Aspects of data communication
- G09G2370/04—Exchange of auxiliary data, i.e. other than image data, between monitor and graphics controller
-
- G—PHYSICS
- G09—EDUCATION; CRYPTOGRAPHY; DISPLAY; ADVERTISING; SEALS
- G09G—ARRANGEMENTS OR CIRCUITS FOR CONTROL OF INDICATING DEVICES USING STATIC MEANS TO PRESENT VARIABLE INFORMATION
- G09G5/00—Control arrangements or circuits for visual indicators common to cathode-ray tube indicators and other visual indicators
- G09G5/003—Details of a display terminal, the details relating to the control arrangement of the display terminal and to the interfaces thereto
-
- G—PHYSICS
- G09—EDUCATION; CRYPTOGRAPHY; DISPLAY; ADVERTISING; SEALS
- G09G—ARRANGEMENTS OR CIRCUITS FOR CONTROL OF INDICATING DEVICES USING STATIC MEANS TO PRESENT VARIABLE INFORMATION
- G09G5/00—Control arrangements or circuits for visual indicators common to cathode-ray tube indicators and other visual indicators
- G09G5/14—Display of multiple viewports
-
- H—ELECTRICITY
- H04—ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
- H04N—PICTORIAL COMMUNICATION, e.g. TELEVISION
- H04N13/00—Stereoscopic video systems; Multi-view video systems; Details thereof
- H04N13/30—Image reproducers
- H04N2013/40—Privacy aspects, i.e. devices showing different images to different viewers, the images not being viewpoints of the same scene
- H04N2013/403—Privacy aspects, i.e. devices showing different images to different viewers, the images not being viewpoints of the same scene the images being monoscopic
-
- H—ELECTRICITY
- H04—ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
- H04N—PICTORIAL COMMUNICATION, e.g. TELEVISION
- H04N13/00—Stereoscopic video systems; Multi-view video systems; Details thereof
- H04N13/30—Image reproducers
- H04N2013/40—Privacy aspects, i.e. devices showing different images to different viewers, the images not being viewpoints of the same scene
- H04N2013/405—Privacy aspects, i.e. devices showing different images to different viewers, the images not being viewpoints of the same scene the images being stereoscopic or three dimensional
Definitions
- the present invention relates to techniques for supporting presentation of multi-path and multi-source viewing content.
- Images may be generated for display in various forms.
- television is a widely used telecommunication medium for transmitting and displaying images in monochromatic (“black and white”) or color form.
- images are provided in analog form and are displayed by display devices in two dimensions.
- images are being provided in digital form for display in two dimensions on display devices having improved resolution (e.g., “high definition” or “HD”).
- HD high definition
- Conventional displays may use a variety of techniques to achieve three-dimensional (3D) image viewing functionality.
- various types of glasses have been developed that may be worn by users to view three-dimensional images displayed by a conventional display.
- glasses include glasses that utilize color filters or polarized filters.
- the lenses of the glasses pass two-dimensional (2D) images of differing perspective to the user's left and right eyes.
- the images are combined in the visual center of the brain of the user to be perceived as a three-dimensional image.
- synchronized left eye, right eye liquid crystal display (LCD) shutter glasses may be used with conventional two-dimensional image displays to create a three-dimensional viewing illusion.
- LCD display glasses are being used to display three-dimensional images to a user.
- the lenses of the LCD display glasses include corresponding displays that provide images of differing perspective to the user's eyes, to be perceived by the user as three-dimensional.
- a display device of this type may be switched to a three-dimensional mode for viewing of three-dimensional images, and may be switched to a two-dimensional mode for viewing of two-dimensional images (and/or to provide a respite from the viewing of three-dimensional images).
- a parallax barrier is another example of a device that enables images to be displayed in three-dimensions.
- a parallax barrier includes a layer of material with a series of precision slits. The parallax barrier is placed proximal to a display so that each of a user's eyes sees a different set of pixels to create a sense of depth through parallax.
- a disadvantage of parallax barriers is that the viewer must be positioned in a well-defined location in order to experience the three-dimensional effect. If the viewer moves his/her eyes away from this “sweet spot,” image flipping and/or exacerbation of the eyestrain, headaches and nausea that may be associated with prolonged three-dimensional image viewing may result.
- Conventional three-dimensional displays that utilize parallax barriers are also constrained in that the displays must be entirely in a two-dimensional image mode or a three-dimensional image mode at any time.
- Some conventional devices are capable of receiving portions of 2D content from different sources to be presented on a single screen.
- Other conventional devices are capable of receiving media guide text and program channels of media content wherein a remote control is used to produce guide text overlaying the media content on a single 2D screen.
- a conventional browser may receive 2D graphic and textual content from many sources (e.g., different servers) and construct a single display within a single window.
- Yet other conventional devices are capable of receiving full 3D2 content from a single source. For example, such full 3D2 content may be downloaded from a server or retrieved from a removable or fixed storage.
- the single piece of 3D2 content can have a first portion that is destined for the left eye of a viewer and a second portion that is destined for the right eye of the viewer. These portions represent perspectives (a.k.a. camera views) of a common video event.
- FIG. 1A is a block diagram of an exemplary system that supports presentation of portions of 3D content that are received from respective sources in accordance with an embodiment.
- FIG. 1B is a block diagram of an exemplary system that supports presentation of multiple instances of content from respective sources in accordance with an embodiment.
- FIG. 1C is a block diagram of an exemplary display system in accordance with an embodiment that utilizes an adaptable parallax barrier to support multiple viewing configurations.
- FIG. 2 illustrates an exemplary arrangement of an adaptable parallax barrier in accordance with an embodiment that supports a particular three-dimensional viewing configuration.
- FIG. 3 illustrates an exemplary arrangement of an adaptable parallax barrier in accordance with an alternate embodiment that supports a particular three-dimensional viewing configuration.
- FIG. 4 illustrates an exemplary arrangement of an adaptable parallax barrier in accordance with an embodiment that supports a viewing configuration that mixes two-dimensional and three-dimensional viewing regions.
- FIG. 5 illustrates an exemplary arrangement of an adaptable parallax barrier in accordance with an embodiment in which different orientations of transparent and opaque slits are used to simultaneously support different viewer orientations.
- FIG. 6 depicts a flowchart of an exemplary method for controlling a pixel array to support a same viewing configuration as an adaptable light manipulator in accordance with an embodiment.
- FIG. 7 depicts a flowchart of an alternate exemplary method for controlling a pixel array to support a same viewing configuration as an adaptable light manipulator in accordance with an embodiment.
- FIG. 8 illustrates a portion of a pixel array to which image pixels have been mapped to support a two-dimensional viewing configuration of an adaptable light manipulator in accordance with an embodiment.
- FIG. 9 illustrates how image pixels are mapped to the portion of the pixel array shown in FIG. 8 to support a first three-dimensional viewing configuration of an adaptable light manipulator in accordance with an embodiment.
- FIG. 10 illustrates how image pixels are mapped to the portion of the pixel array shown in FIGS. 8 and 9 to support a second three-dimensional viewing configuration of an adaptable light manipulator in accordance with an embodiment.
- FIG. 11 is a block diagram of an exemplary display system that utilizes an adaptable parallax barrier and a light generator to support multiple viewing configurations in accordance with an embodiment.
- FIG. 12 provides an exploded view of an exemplary display system that utilizes a controllable backlight array to provide regional luminosity control in accordance with an embodiment.
- FIG. 13 is a block diagram of an exemplary display system that includes a pixel array disposed between a light generator and an adaptable parallax barrier in accordance with an embodiment.
- FIG. 14 provides an exploded view of an exemplary display system that implements a regional brightness control scheme based on pixel intensity in accordance with an embodiment.
- FIG. 15 illustrates a front perspective view of an exemplary display panel of a display system in accordance with an embodiment.
- FIG. 16 illustrates two exemplary configurations of an adaptable light manipulator that includes a parallax barrier and a brightness regulation overlay in accordance with an embodiment.
- FIG. 17 shows a perspective view of an exemplary adaptable lenticular lens that may be used in a displays system in accordance with an embodiment.
- FIG. 18 shows a side view of the adaptable lenticular lens of FIG. 17 in accordance with an embodiment.
- FIG. 19 is a block diagram of an exemplary display system that includes multiple light manipulator layers in accordance with an embodiment.
- FIG. 20 is a block diagram of an exemplary display system that includes multiple light manipulator layers in accordance with an alternate embodiment.
- FIGS. 21 and 22 are block diagrams of exemplary systems that support presentation of three-dimensional viewing content based on portions thereof that are received from respective sources in accordance with embodiments.
- FIGS. 23-29 depict flowcharts of methods for supporting presentation of three-dimensional viewing content based on portions thereof that are received from respective sources in accordance with embodiments.
- FIG. 30 is a block diagram of an exemplary system that directs configurations of respective regions of a screen assembly to support display of respective instances of content in accordance with an embodiment.
- FIG. 31 depicts a flowchart of a method for directing configurations of respective regions of a screen assembly for supporting display of respective instances of content in accordance with embodiments.
- FIG. 32 is a block diagram of an exemplary practical implementation of an adaptable two-dimensional/three-dimensional display system in accordance with an embodiment.
- references in the specification to “one embodiment,” “an embodiment,” “an example embodiment,” etc., indicate that the embodiment described may include a particular feature, structure, or characteristic, but every embodiment may not necessarily include the particular feature, structure, or characteristic. Moreover, such phrases are not necessarily referring to the same embodiment. Further, when a particular feature, structure, or characteristic is described in connection with an embodiment, it is submitted that it is within the knowledge of one skilled in the art to effect such feature, structure, or characteristic in connection with other embodiments whether or not explicitly described.
- the viewing content may include multiple portions that originate from respective sources and that are received via respective paths.
- Each of the portions may include two-dimensional (2D) content or three-dimensional (3D) content.
- Two-dimensional (2D) content is content that is configured to be perceived as one or more two-dimensional images.
- the two-dimensional content may represent a single perspective of a video event.
- Three-dimensional (3D) content is content that is configured to be perceived as one or more three-dimensional images.
- the three-dimensional content may represent multiple perspectives of a video event.
- the viewing content may be displayed to a user among any number (e.g., 1, 2, 3, etc.) of regions of a screen, such as a fixed 2D screen, a fixed 3D screen, or an adaptable 3D screen.
- the viewing content may be displayed among the regions by driving an adaptable light manipulator and/or a pixel array in a coordinated fashion.
- the adaptable light manipulator may comprise, for example, an adaptable lenticular lens such as that described in commonly-owned, co-pending U.S. patent application Ser. No. 12/774,307, filed on May 5, 2010, and entitled “Display with Elastic Light Manipulator,” the entirety of which is incorporated by reference herein, or an adaptable parallax barrier such as that described in commonly-owned co-pending U.S. patent application Ser. No. 12/845,440, filed on Jul. 28, 2010, and entitled “Adaptable Parallax Barrier Supporting Mixed 2D and Stereoscopic 3D Display Regions,” the entirety of which is incorporated by reference herein.
- the adaptable light manipulator can be dynamically modified in order to accommodate, for example, a changing viewer sweet spot or switching between two-dimensional images and three-dimensional images.
- the manner in which images are rendered to pixels of a pixel array used in conjunction with such an adaptable light manipulator may be coordinated with the state of the adaptable light manipulator to support a variety of viewing configurations.
- an adaptable light manipulator, a pixel array and a non-uniform light generator may be driven in a coordinated fashion.
- the adaptable light manipulator is an adaptable parallax barrier
- simultaneous presentation of two-dimensional and three-dimensional content (and/or various instances of three-dimensional content representing differing numbers of perspectives) via different regions of the same display is also enabled.
- This feature may be supported by a non-uniform light generator (such as a backlighting array) as described in commonly-owned, co-pending U.S. patent application Ser. No. ______, filed on even date herewith and entitled “Backlighting Array Supporting Adaptable Parallax Barrier”, the entirety of which is incorporated by reference herein.
- FIG. 1A is a block diagram of an exemplary system 140 that supports presentation of portions of 3D content that are received from respective sources in accordance with an embodiment.
- system 140 includes a media node 160 , external sources 194 A- 194 N, and external device(s) 196 .
- Each of the external device(s) 196 includes a fixed 2D screen 167 , a fixed 3D screen 169 , or an adaptable light manipulating 2D/3Dx screen 171 .
- Each fixed 2D screen 167 has a fixed two-dimensional configuration. A two-dimensional configuration is used to display a 2D representation of video content.
- Each fixed 3D screen 169 has a fixed three-dimensional configuration.
- a three-dimensional configuration is used to display a 3D representation of video content.
- a three-dimensional configuration may support presentation of any two or more viewpoints (a.k.a. perspectives), two of which may be combined to provide a three-dimensional viewing experience.
- viewpoints a.k.a. perspectives
- a three-dimensional configuration that includes x viewpoints is said to be a 3Dx configuration, where x is a positive integer greater than or equal to two.
- Each fixed 2D screen 167 , fixed 3D screen 169 , and adaptable light manipulating 2D/3Dx screen 171 is capable of supporting presentation of 3D portions 161 A- 161 N of 3D content in respective regions of a screen surface. Regions of each screen 167 , 169 , and 171 are configured to support presentation of the respective 3D portions 161 A- 161 N in the respective regions of the screen surface.
- the configurations of the various regions of an adaptable light manipulating 2D/3Dx screen 171 may be different or the same.
- External sources 194 A- 194 N are configured to provide the respective 3D portions 161 A- 161 N of the 3D content to media node 160 .
- External sources 194 A- 194 N are also configured to provide respective offer contents 163 A- 163 N to media node 160 .
- Each of the offer contents 163 A- 163 N includes an offer that relates to at least one 3D portion of the 3D content.
- first external source 194 A may provide a first 3D portion 161 A to media node 160 .
- First external source 194 A may also provide first offer content 163 A to media node 160 that relates to an Nth 3D portion 161 N.
- Nth external source 194 N may provide the Nth 3D portion 161 N to media node 160 .
- Nth external source 194 N may also provide Nth offer content 163 N to media node 160 that relates to another 3D portion that may be provided by another of the external sources 194 A- 194 N, and so on.
- first external source 194 A may provide the first 3D portion 161 A to media node 160 .
- Nth external source 194 N may provide Nth offer content 163 N to media node 160 that relates to the Nth 3D portion 161 N. If the offer from Nth external source 194 N is accepted by the user, Nth external source 194 N may provide the Nth 3D portion 161 N to media node 160 .
- another of the external sources 194 A- 194 N may provide its offer content to media node 160 that relates to a respective 3D portion of the 3D content, and so on.
- External sources 194 A- 194 N include circuitry 165 A- 165 N for managing accounts, billing, licenses, and transactions pertaining to the 3D portions 161 A- 161 N.
- circuitry 165 A may indicate that the first 3D portion 161 A has been provided to media node 160 in an account of the user of media node 160 .
- Circuitry 165 A may perform operations to bill the user for provision of the first 3D portion 161 A, verify that the user is within a group that is authorized (e.g., licensed) to receive the first 3D portion, etc.
- Media node 160 includes processing circuitry 162 , storage 176 , a screen assembly 178 , media source interface(s) circuitry 180 , and screen interface(s) circuitry 192 .
- Media source interface(s) circuitry 180 receives the 3D portions 161 A- 161 N of the 3D content from the respective external sources 194 A- 194 N for processing by processing circuitry 162 .
- Storage 176 queues the 3D portions 161 A- 161 N as needed so that the portions 161 A- 161 N may be synchronized for presentation.
- Storage 176 may include one or more internal sources that provide respective portions of the 3D content. For instance, an internal source may include fixed or removable media storage from which one or more of the 3D portions 161 A- 161 N may be retrieved.
- Screen assembly 178 is configured to present the 3D content (e.g., simultaneously present the 3D portions 161 A- 161 N) once the 3D portions 161 A- 161 N are synchronized.
- Screen assembly 178 may be a fixed 2D screen assembly, a fixed 3D screen assembly, or an adaptable light manipulating 2D/3Dx screen assembly.
- Processing circuitry 162 includes circuitry 164 , 166 , 168 , 170 , 172 , and 174 and 3D portion(s) adjustments circuitry 182 .
- Circuitry 164 selects the first 3D portion 161 A of the 3D content from first external source 194 A.
- Circuitry 166 interacts with a second source (e.g., second external source 194 B) to locate a second portion and offer based on the first 3D portion 161 A.
- Circuitry 168 supports billing and account management regarding the various 3D portions 161 A- 161 N. For instance, circuitry 168 may communicate with any one or more of external sources 194 A- 194 N to facilitate proper billing and account updates regarding the respective 3D portions 161 A- 161 N.
- Circuitry 170 supports operations pertaining to acceptance or rejection of each offer that is received by media node 160 . For instance, circuitry 170 may inform external sources 194 A- 194 N whether offers that are received therefrom are accepted or rejected. Circuitry 172 initiates delivery of the second 3D portion from the second source in response to location of the second 3D portion by circuitry 166 . Circuitry 174 manages delivery of the 3D portions 161 A- 161 N. For instance, circuitry 174 may communicate with circuitry 172 to authorize initiation of delivery of the second portion by circuitry 172 . Circuitry 174 also supports queuing of the 3D portions 161 A- 161 N.
- circuitry 174 may determine an amount of storage 176 to be allocated for queuing of the 3D portions 161 A- 161 N. In accordance with this example, circuitry 174 may monitor an amount of storage 176 that is utilized to determine the amount of storage 176 to be allocated.
- 3D portion(s) adjustments circuitry 182 performs operations on the 3D portions 161 A- 161 N to facilitate presentation of the 3D content.
- 3D portion(s) adjustments circuitry 182 includes circuitry 184 , 186 , 188 , and 190 .
- Circuitry 184 is configured to decode and/or decrypt the 3D portions 161 A- 161 N that are received from respective external sources 194 A- 194 N, so that processing may be performed on the 3D portions 161 A- 161 N. For instance, such processing may be performed by circuitry 186 , 188 , and/or 190 , which are described below.
- Circuitry 184 is also configured to encrypt and/or encode the 3D content, including the 3D portions 161 A- 161 N, before the 3D content is delivered to external device(s) 196 .
- Circuitry 186 synchronizes frames of the 3D portions 161 A- 161 N.
- circuitry 186 may apply time offsets to one or more of the portions 161 A- 161 N and/or adjust the frame rates of one or more of the 3D portions 161 A- 161 N in order to facilitate synchronization of the 3D portions 161 A- 161 N.
- circuitry 186 may increase the frames rates of one or more of the 3D portions 161 A- 161 N, decrease the frame rates of one or more of the 3D portions 161 A- 161 N, increase the frame rates of some of the 3D portions 161 A- 161 N while decreasing the frame rates of others of the 3D portions 161 A- 161 N, etc.
- Circuitry 188 is configured to integrate the 3D portions 161 A- 161 N into a single stream or file.
- Circuitry 190 is configured to resize the regions that are associated with the respective 3D portions 161 A- 161 N based on any of a variety reasons, including but not limited to bandwidth limitations, user input, etc.
- Circuitry 190 may reduce the size of region(s) that are associated with one or more (e.g., all) of the 3D portions 161 A- 161 N, increase the size of region(s) that are associated with one or more (e.g., all) of the 3D portions 161 A- 161 N, or reduce the size of some regions which correspond to a first subset of the 3D portions 161 A- 161 N while increasing the size of other regions which correspond to a second subset of the 3D portions 161 A- 161 N.
- Circuitry 190 may reduce the resolution of one or more of the 3D portions 161 A- 161 N, increase the resolution of one or more of the 3D portions 161 A- 161 N, remove overlapping content from one or more of the 3D portions 161 A- 161 N, crop one or more of the 3D portions 161 A- 161 N (e.g., to fit a screen characteristic such as 3:4, 9:16, or windowing), etc. For instance, circuitry 190 may perform such operations based on resizing of the corresponding regions.
- Screen interface(s) circuitry 192 provides the 3D content, including the 3D portions 161 A- 161 N, to external device(s) 196 for presentation.
- Screen interface(s) circuitry 192 may provide the 3D portions 161 A- 161 N in any suitable number of streams. For instance, screen interface(s) circuitry 192 may provide the 3D portions 161 A- 161 N in respective streams or in a single combined stream to external device(s) 196 .
- a first portion comprising a desired video presentation is selected from an internal or external “first” source.
- This first portion may yield the presentation in 2D, for example, or 3D2.
- processing circuitry 160 assists or carries out location of a second portion of content related to the first portion.
- the internal or external location of the second portion is at a different source than that of the first portion.
- An automatically identified second portion could be (but doesn't have to be) offered for possible rejection by the viewer. If accepted or if settings do not require the viewer's confirmation, processing work may be performed.
- the second source portion may or may not have many differing characteristics from that of the first portion.
- Processing circuitry 160 may need to operate on at least one if not both of the portions to eliminate the differences.
- Processing circuitry 160 may synchronize, as well.
- the first portion may be one-third of the way into the presentation, and the second portion may need an offset and synchronization.
- the output of processing circuitry 160 may be two independent files or streams or one combined stream. Such output may need to feed one or more fixed 2D, fixed 3D, and adaptive light manipulating internal or external screen assemblies. Processing circuitry 160 needs to make all of these things happen when needed, or provide support therefor. Other functionality of processing circuitry 160 can be appreciated with reference to the labels in the FIG. 1A , including payment processing, licensing, etc.
- FIG. 1B is a block diagram of an exemplary system 150 that supports presentation of multiple instances of content from respective sources in accordance with an embodiment.
- system 150 includes a media node 101 , external sources 131 A- 131 N, and external device(s) 133 .
- Each of the external device(s) 133 includes at least one adaptable light manipulating 2D/3Dx assembly.
- Each of the adaptable light manipulating 2D/3Dx assemblies is configured to receive media streams/files outputs with integrated or separate screen configuration commands (a.k.a. control signals).
- the screen commands specify how the regions of each adaptable light manipulating 2D/3Dx assembly is to be configured to support the presentation of the multiple instances of content.
- External sources 131 A- 131 N are configured to provide respective contents 135 A- 135 N to media node 101 .
- the contents 135 A- 135 N may be fully independent and unrelated, or fully or partially related.
- External sources 131 A- 131 N are also configured to provide respective offer contents 137 A- 137 N to media node 101 .
- Each of the offer contents 137 A- 137 N includes an offer that relates to at least one of the contents 135 A- 135 N.
- first external source 131 A may provide first content 135 A to media node 101 .
- First external source 131 A may also provide first offer content 137 A to media node 101 that relates to Nth content 135 N.
- Nth external source 131 N may provide the Nth content 135 N to media node 101 .
- Nth external source 131 N may also provide Nth offer content 137 N to media node 101 that relates to other content that may be provided by another of the external sources 131 A- 131 N, and so on.
- first external source 131 A may provide the first content 135 A to media node 101 .
- Nth external source 131 N may provide Nth offer content 137 N to media node 101 that relates to the Nth content 135 N. If the offer from Nth external source 131 N is accepted by the user, Nth external source 131 N may provide the Nth content 135 N to media node 101 .
- another of the external sources 131 A- 131 N may provide its offer content to media node 101 that relates to other content, and so on.
- External sources 131 A- 131 N include circuitry 139 A- 139 N for managing accounts, billing, licenses, and transactions pertaining to the contents 135 A- 135 N.
- circuitry 139 A may indicate that the first content 135 A has been provided to media node 101 in an account of the user of media node 101 .
- Circuitry 139 A may perform operations to bill the user for provision of the first content 135 A, verify that the user is within a group that is authorized (e.g., licensed) to receive the first content, etc.
- Media node 101 includes processing circuitry 103 , storage 115 , at least one adaptable light manipulating 2D/3Dx screen assembly 117 , media source interface(s) circuitry 119 , and screen interface(s) circuitry 129 .
- Media source interface(s) circuitry 119 receives the contents 135 A- 135 N from the respective external sources 131 A- 131 N for processing by processing circuitry 103 .
- Storage 115 queues the contents 135 A- 135 N as needed so that the contents 135 A- 135 N may be synchronized for presentation.
- Storage 115 may include one or more internal sources, each of which is capable of providing respective content. For instance, an internal source may include fixed or removable media storage from which one or more of the contents 135 A- 135 N may be retrieved.
- the at least one screen assembly 117 is configured to simultaneously present the contents 135 A- 135 N once the contents 135 A- 135 N are synchronized.
- Processing circuitry 103 includes circuitry 105 , 107 , 109 , 111 , and 113 and content adjustments circuitry 121 .
- Circuitry 105 provides software application (e.g., browser) based support for selection of the various contents 135 A- 135 N. For instance, circuitry 105 may generate a graphical interface for enabling the viewer to select one or more of the contents 135 A- 135 N for presentation.
- Circuitry 107 supports billing and account management regarding the various contents 135 A- 135 N. For instance, circuitry 107 may communicate with any one or more of external sources 131 A- 131 N to facilitate proper billing and account updates regarding the respective contents 135 A- 135 N.
- Circuitry 109 provides viewer interface support for enabling the viewer to accept or reject each offer that is received by media node 101 . For instance, circuitry 109 may inform external sources 131 A- 131 N whether offers that are received therefrom are accepted or rejected. Circuitry 111 manages delivery of the contents 135 A- 135 N. For instance, circuitry 111 may delay delivery of the various contents 135 A- 135 N until the contents 135 A- 135 N are synchronized. Circuitry 111 also supports queuing of the contents 135 A- 135 N. For example, circuitry 111 may determine an amount of storage 115 to be allocated for queuing of the contents 135 A- 135 N. In accordance with this example, circuitry 111 may monitor an amount of storage 115 that is utilized to determine the amount of storage 115 to be allocated.
- Circuitry 113 supports full and regional (re)configuration of adaptable light manipulating 2D/3Dx screen assemblies. For instance, circuitry 113 may provide screen (re)configuration commands for configuring an entire adaptable light manipulating 2D/3Dx screen assembly or one or more regions thereof based on any of a factors, including but not limited to bandwidth limitations, user input, etc. In one example, such screen (re)configuration commands may be integrated into the one or more streams/files that are delivered toward the screen assembly. In another example, such screen (re)configuration commands may be sent externally from the aforementioned one or more streams/files via separate command signaling using the same communication pathway or a separate pathway that is independent from the pathway that is used for delivering the one or more streams/files.
- Content adjustments circuitry 121 performs operations on the contents 135 A- 135 N to facilitate presentation thereof.
- Content adjustments circuitry 121 includes circuitry 123 , 125 , and 127 .
- Circuitry 123 is configured to decode and/or decrypt the contents 135 A- 135 N that are received from respective external sources 131 A- 131 N, so that processing may be performed on the contents 135 A- 135 N. For instance, such processing may be performed by circuitry 125 and/or 127 , which are described below.
- Circuitry 123 is also configured to encrypt and/or encode the contents 135 A- 135 N before delivery thereof to external device(s) 196 .
- Circuitry 125 supports outputting multiple streams or files or an integrated stream or file. For example, circuitry 125 may synchronize frames of the contents 135 A- 135 N by applying time offsets to one or more of the contents 135 A- 135 N and/or by adjusting the frame rates of one or more of the contents 135 A- 135 N. In accordance with this example, circuitry 125 may increase the frames rates of one or more of the contents 135 A- 135 N, decrease the frame rates of one or more of the contents 135 A- 135 N, increase the frame rates of some of the contents 135 A- 135 N while decreasing the frame rates of others of the contents 135 A- 135 N, etc.
- Circuitry 127 is configured to resize the regions that are associated with the contents 135 A- 135 N based on any of a variety reasons, including but not limited to bandwidth limitations, user input, etc. Circuitry 127 may reduce the size of region(s) that are associated with one or more of the contents 135 A- 135 N, increase the size of region(s) that are associated with one or more of the contents 135 A- 135 N, or reduce the size of some regions which correspond to a first subset of the contents 135 A- 135 N while increasing the size of other regions which correspond to a second subset of the contents 135 A- 135 N.
- Circuitry 190 may reduce the resolution of one or more of the contents 135 A- 135 N, increase the resolution of one or more of the contents 135 A- 135 N, remove overlapping content from one or more of the contents 135 A- 135 N, change (e.g., increase or decrease) a frame rate that is associated with one or more of the contents 135 A- 135 N, crop one or more of the contents 135 A- 135 N, etc.
- circuitry 127 may perform such operations based on resizing of the corresponding regions.
- Screen interface(s) circuitry 129 provides the various contents 135 A- 135 N to external device(s) 133 for presentation.
- Screen interface(s) circuitry 129 may provide the contents 135 A- 135 N in any suitable number of streams. For instance, screen interface(s) circuitry 129 may provide the contents 135 A- 135 N in respective streams or in a single combined stream to external device(s) 133 .
- Screen interface(s) circuitry 129 provides the screen configuration commands that specify how the regions of each adaptable light manipulating 2D/3Dx assembly of the external device(s) 133 is to be configured to support the presentation of the multiple instances of content. The screen configuration commands may be integrated among the contents 135 A- 135 N or separate from the contents 135 A- 135 N.
- a media node can be any node in the entire end-to-end pathway, including even at one of the media sources (which might receive other content (e.g., the second content) from another media source), within the screen assembly device, within a network node, in any premises device supporting a screen device such as a set top box, a removable media (e.g., DVD, CD or Blu-Ray) player, gateway, access point, television, etc.
- a media node can be any node in the entire end-to-end pathway, including even at one of the media sources (which might receive other content (e.g., the second content) from another media source), within the screen assembly device, within a network node, in any premises device supporting a screen device such as a set top box, a removable media (e.g., DVD, CD or Blu-Ray) player, gateway, access point, television, etc.
- a removable media e.g., DVD, CD or Blu-Ray
- a two-dimensional configuration is used to display a 2D representation of video content.
- a three-dimensional configuration is used to display a 3D representation of video content.
- a three-dimensional configuration may include any two or more viewpoints (a.k.a. perspectives), two of which may be combined to provide a three-dimensional viewing experience. For instance, a three-dimensional configuration that includes n viewpoints is said to be a 3Dn configuration, where n is a positive integer greater than or equal to two.
- first content may be at least partially related to second content if the second content is 2D or 3D content and the first content includes movie text (e.g., closed caption text) that relates to the 2D or 3D content.
- movie text e.g., closed caption text
- FIG. 1C is a block diagram of an exemplary display system 100 that utilizes an adaptable parallax barrier to support multiple viewing configurations in accordance with an embodiment.
- display system 100 includes driver circuitry 102 and a screen 104 , wherein screen 104 include a pixel array 122 and an adaptable parallax barrier 124 .
- driver circuitry 104 includes pixel array driver circuitry 112 and adaptable parallax barrier driver circuitry 114 .
- Pixel array 122 comprises a two-dimensional array of pixels (e.g., arranged as a grid or other distribution). Pixel array 122 is a self-illuminating or light-generating pixel array such that the pixels of pixel array 122 each emit light included in light 132 . Each pixel may be a separately addressable light source (e.g., a pixel of a plasma display, an LCD display, an LED display such as an OLED display, or of other type of display). Each pixel of pixel array 122 may be individually controllable to vary color and intensity. In an embodiment, each pixel of pixel array 122 may include a plurality of sub-pixels that correspond to separate color channels, such as a trio of red, green, and blue sub-pixels included in each pixel.
- a trio of red, green, and blue sub-pixels included in each pixel such as a trio of red, green, and blue sub-pixels included in each pixel.
- Adaptable parallax barrier 124 is positioned proximate to a surface of pixel array 122 .
- Barrier element array 142 is a layer of adaptable parallax barrier 124 that includes a plurality of barrier elements or blocking regions arranged in an array. Each barrier element of the array is configured to be selectively opaque or transparent. Combinations of barrier elements may be configured to be selectively opaque or transparent to enable various effects.
- the states of the barrier elements of barrier element array 142 may be configured such that light 132 emanating from pixel array 122 is filtered to produce filtered light 134 , wherein filtered light 134 includes one or more two-dimensional and/or three-dimensional images that may be viewed by users 136 in a viewing space 106 .
- each barrier element may have a round, square, or rectangular shape, and barrier element array 142 may have any number of rows of barrier elements that extend a vertical length of barrier element array 142 .
- each barrier element may have a “band” shape that extends a vertical length of barrier element array 142 , such that barrier element array 142 includes a single horizontal row of barrier elements.
- Each barrier element may include one or more of such bands, and different regions of barrier element array 142 may include barrier elements that include different numbers of such bands.
- barrier elements may be capable of being completely transparent or opaque, and in other embodiments, barrier elements may not be capable of being fully transparent or opaque.
- barrier elements may be capable of being 95% transparent when considered to be “transparent” and may be capable of being 5% transparent when considered to be “opaque.”
- Transparent and opaque as used herein are intended to encompass barrier elements being substantially transparent (e.g., greater than 75% transparent, including completely transparent) and substantially opaque (e.g., less than 25% transparent, including completely opaque), respectively.
- Driver circuitry 102 receives control signals 108 from control circuitry (not shown in FIG. 1C ).
- control signals 108 may be received via a pathway from processing circuitry, such as processing circuitry 162 of FIG. 1A or processing circuitry 103 of FIG. 1B .
- the control signals 108 cause driver circuitry 102 to place screen 104 in a selected one of a plurality of different viewing configurations.
- adaptable parallax barrier driver circuitry 114 transmits drive signals 154 that cause barrier element array 142 to be placed in a state that supports the selected viewing configuration.
- the selected viewing configuration may be a particular two-dimensional viewing configuration, a particular three-dimensional viewing configuration, or a viewing configuration that supports the display of different types of two-dimensional and/or three-dimensional content in corresponding display regions.
- FIG. 2 shows an exemplary arrangement of an adaptable parallax barrier 200 that supports a particular three-dimensional viewing configuration.
- Adaptable parallax barrier 200 is an example of adaptable parallax barrier 124 of FIG. 1C .
- adaptable parallax barrier 200 includes a barrier element array 202 , which includes a plurality of barrier elements 204 arranged in a two-dimensional array.
- barrier element array 202 includes a plurality of parallel strips of barrier elements 204 that are selected to be non-blocking to form a plurality of parallel non-blocking strips (or “slits”) 206 a - 206 g .
- slits or “slitslitslits”
- non-blocking strips 206 a - 206 g are alternated with parallel blocking strips 208 a - 208 g of barrier elements 204 that are selected to be blocking.
- non-blocking strips 206 a - 206 g and blocking strips 208 a - 208 g each have a width (along the x-dimension) of two barrier elements 204 , and have lengths that extend along the entire y-dimension (twenty barrier elements 204 ) of barrier element array 202 , although in other embodiments, may have alternative dimensions.
- Non-blocking strips 206 a - 206 g and blocking strips 208 a - 208 g form a parallax barrier configuration for adaptable parallax barrier 200 .
- the spacing (and number) of parallel non-blocking strips 206 in barrier element array 202 may be selectable by choosing any number and combination of particular strips of barrier elements 204 in barrier element array 202 to be non-blocking, to be alternated with blocking strips 208 , as desired.
- the spacing (and number) of parallel non-blocking strips 206 in barrier element array 202 may be selected based on control signals that are received via a pathway from processing circuitry, such as processing circuitry 162 of FIG. 1A or processing circuitry 103 of FIG. 1B . It will be recognized that hundreds, thousands, or even larger numbers of non-blocking strips 206 and blocking strips 208 may be present in adaptable parallax barrier 200 .
- FIG. 3 shows an alternative example of an adaptable parallax barrier 300 that has also been configured to support a particular three-dimensional viewing configuration.
- adaptable parallax barrier 300 includes a barrier element array 302 , which includes a plurality of barrier elements 304 arranged in a two-dimensional array (28 ⁇ 1 array).
- Barrier elements 304 have widths (along the x-dimension) similar to the widths of barrier elements 204 in FIG. 2 , but have lengths that extend along the entire vertical length (y-dimension) of barrier element array 302 . As shown in FIG.
- barrier element array 302 includes parallel non-blocking strips 306 a - 306 g alternated with parallel blocking strips 308 a - 308 g .
- parallel non-blocking strips 306 a - 306 g and parallel blocking strips 308 a - 308 g each have a width (along the x-dimension) of two barrier elements 304 , and have lengths that extend along the entire y-dimension (one barrier element 304 ) of barrier element array 302 .
- Adaptable parallax barrier 300 may be configured in accordance with control signals that are received via a pathway from processing circuitry, such as processing circuitry 162 of FIG. 1A or processing circuitry 103 of FIG. 1B , for example.
- Each of adaptable parallax barriers 200 and 300 configured in the manner shown in FIGS. 2 and 3 respectively, filter light produced by a pixel array to form one or more three-dimensional views in a viewing space, thus supporting a three-dimensional viewing configuration.
- all of the barrier elements of either adaptable parallax barrier 200 or 300 can simply be placed in a non-blocking state. Additional details concerning how the adaptable parallax barriers operate to support such three-dimensional viewing may be found, for example, in the aforementioned, incorporated U.S. patent application Ser. No. 12/845,440, filed on Jul. 28, 2010, and entitled “Adaptable Parallax Barrier Supporting Mixed 2D and Stereoscopic 3D Display Regions.”
- the entirety of the barrier element array is filled with parallel non-blocking strips to support three-dimensional viewing.
- one or more regions of an adaptable parallax barrier may be filled with parallel non-blocking strips to deliver three-dimensional images, and one or more other regions of the adaptable parallax barrier may be rendered transparent to deliver two-dimensional images.
- a viewing configuration that mixes two-dimensional and three-dimensional viewing regions may be supported.
- FIG. 4 shows an exemplary arrangement of an adaptable parallax barrier 400 that supports a viewing configuration that mixes two-dimensional and three-dimensional viewing regions according to example embodiments.
- the arrangement of adaptable parallax barrier 400 may be based on control signals that are received via a pathway from processing circuitry, such as processing circuitry 162 of FIG. 1A or processing circuitry 103 of FIG. 1B , for example.
- Adaptable parallax barrier 400 is similar to adaptable parallax barrier 200 of FIG. 2 , having barrier element array 202 including a plurality of barrier elements 204 arranged in a two-dimensional array.
- FIG. 1 shows an exemplary arrangement of an adaptable parallax barrier 400 that supports a viewing configuration that mixes two-dimensional and three-dimensional viewing regions according to example embodiments.
- the arrangement of adaptable parallax barrier 400 may be based on control signals that are received via a pathway from processing circuitry, such as processing circuitry 162 of FIG. 1A or processing circuitry 103 of FIG. 1B
- a first region 402 of barrier element array 202 includes a plurality of parallel non-blocking strips alternated with parallel blocking strips that together fill first region 402 .
- a second region 404 of barrier element array 202 is surrounded by first region 402 .
- Second region 404 is a rectangular shaped region of barrier element array 202 that includes a two-dimensional array of barrier elements 204 that are non-blocking.
- barrier element array 202 is configured to enable a three-dimensional image to be generated by pixels of a pixel array that are adjacent to barrier elements of first region 402 , and to enable a two-dimensional image to be generated by pixels of the pixel array that are adjacent to barrier elements inside of second region 404 .
- first region 402 may include all non-blocking barrier elements 202 to pass a two-dimensional image
- second region 404 may include parallel non-blocking strips alternated with parallel blocking strips to pass a three-dimensional image.
- adaptable parallax barrier 400 may have additional numbers, sizes, and arrangements of regions configured to pass different combinations of two-dimensional images and three-dimensional images.
- different regions of an adaptable parallax barrier that have parallel non-blocking strips may have the parallel non-blocking strips oriented at different angles to deliver three-dimensional images to viewers that are oriented differently.
- a viewing configuration that mixes three-dimensional viewing regions having different viewing orientations may be supported.
- FIG. 5 shows an exemplary arrangement of an adaptable parallax barrier 500 in which transparent slits have different orientations, according to an example embodiment.
- the arrangement of adaptable parallax barrier 500 may be based on control signals that are received via a pathway from processing circuitry, such as processing circuitry 162 of FIG. 1A or processing circuitry 103 of FIG. 1B , for example.
- Adaptable parallax barrier 500 is similar to adaptable parallax barrier 200 of FIG. 2 , having barrier element array 202 including a plurality of barrier elements 204 arranged in a two-dimensional array.
- a first region 510 (e.g., a bottom half) of barrier element array 202 includes a first plurality of parallel strips of barrier elements 204 that are selected to be non-blocking to form a first plurality of parallel non-blocking strips 502 a - 502 e (each having a width of two barrier elements 204 ). As shown in FIG. 5 , parallel non-blocking strips 502 a - 502 e are alternated with parallel blocking strips 504 a - 504 f of barrier elements 204 (each having a width of three barrier elements 204 ). Parallel non-blocking strips 502 a - 502 e are oriented in a first direction (e.g., along a vertical axis).
- a second region 512 (e.g., a top half) of barrier element array 202 includes a second plurality of parallel strips of barrier elements 204 that are selected to be non-blocking to form a second plurality of parallel non-blocking strips 506 a - 506 d (each having a width of one barrier element 204 ).
- parallel non-blocking strips 506 a - 506 d are alternated with parallel blocking strips 508 a - 508 c of barrier elements 204 (each having a width of two barrier elements 204 ).
- Parallel non-blocking strips 506 a - 506 d are oriented in a second direction (e.g., along a horizontal axis).
- first and second pluralities of parallel non-blocking strips 502 a - 502 e and 506 a - 506 d are present in barrier element array 202 that are oriented perpendicularly to each other.
- the region of barrier element array 202 that includes first plurality of parallel non-blocking strips 502 a - 502 e may be configured to deliver a three-dimensional image in a viewing space to be viewable by a user whose body is oriented vertically (e.g., sitting upright or standing up).
- the region of barrier element array 202 that includes second plurality of parallel non-blocking strips 506 a - 506 d may be configured to deliver a three-dimensional image in a viewing space to be viewable by a user whose body is oriented horizontally (e.g., laying down). In this manner, users who are oriented differently relative to each other can still each be provided with a corresponding three-dimensional image that accommodates their position.
- pixel array 122 since a configuration of adaptable parallax barrier 124 can be dynamically modified to support a particular viewing configuration, pixel array 122 must also be controlled to support the same viewing configuration. In particular, the rendering of pixels of an image (also referred to herein as “image pixels”) among the pixels of pixel array 122 (also referred to herein as “display pixels”) must be handled in a manner that is consistent with a current configuration of adaptable parallax barrier 124 .
- This may entail, for example, changing a number of display pixels that represents each image pixel (i.e., changing the resolution of a displayed image) and/or changing which display pixels or groups thereof correspond to the respective image pixels (i.e., changing the locations at which the image pixels are displayed), in response to modification of a configuration of adaptable parallax barrier 124 .
- Such changes may be implemented by a controller (not shown in FIG. 1C ) via delivery of appropriate control signals 108 to pixel array driver circuitry 112 .
- pixel array driver circuitry 204 when a configuration of adaptable parallax barrier 124 supports a first viewing configuration responsive to control signals 108 , pixel array driver circuitry 204 sends drive signals 152 in conformance with control signals 108 such that the rendering of images to pixel array 122 occurs in a manner that also supports the first viewing configuration. Furthermore, when the configuration of adaptable parallax barrier 124 is modified to support a second viewing configuration responsive to control signals 108 , pixel array driver circuitry 204 sends drive signals 152 in conformance with the control signals 108 such that the rendering of images to pixel array 122 occurs in a manner that also supports the second viewing configuration.
- FIG. 6 depicts a flowchart 600 of an exemplary method for controlling a pixel array to support the same viewing configuration as an adaptable light manipulator (such as adaptable parallax barrier 124 ) in accordance with an embodiment.
- the method of flowchart 600 begins at step 602 .
- a configuration of an adaptable light manipulator such as adaptable parallax barrier 124
- a number of display pixels in a pixel array such as pixel array 122 , that represents each image pixel of a plurality of image pixels is changed in response to modifying the configuration of the adaptable light manipulator.
- FIGS. 8 and 9 provide a simple illustration of an exemplary application of the method of flowchart 600 .
- a portion of a pixel array 800 includes a 16 ⁇ 16 array of display pixels.
- An example display pixel is shown as display pixel 802 .
- each display pixel comprises a trio of red, green, and blue sub-pixels as discussed above.
- a first image comprising a 4 ⁇ 4 array of image pixels (each shown depicting the letter “A” to indicate that each is included in the same image) is mapped to the display pixels such that 4 display pixels are used to present each image pixel.
- An example of an image pixel is shown as image pixel 804 .
- the first image is intended to represent an image that is viewed when an adaptable light manipulator disposed proximate to the pixel array is configured to support a two-dimensional viewing configuration.
- FIG. 9 is intended to represent the same portion of pixel array 800 after the configuration of the adaptable light manipulator has been changed to support a three-dimensional viewing configuration.
- the three-dimensional viewing configuration requires the combined display of a first image and a second image across the same portion of pixel array 800 .
- the pixel array is controlled such that 2 rather than 4 display pixels are used to present each image pixel of the first image (each still shown depicting the letter “A”). This corresponds to a decreased viewing resolution of the first image.
- the other half of the display pixels are now used to present each image pixel of a second image (each shown depicting the letter “B”).
- the image pixels associated with the different images are aligned with the adaptable light manipulator to achieve a desired three-dimensional viewing effect.
- FIG. 7 depicts a flowchart 700 of another exemplary method for controlling a pixel array to support the same viewing configuration as an adaptable light manipulator (such as adaptable parallax barrier 124 ) in accordance with an embodiment.
- the method of flowchart 700 begins at step 702 .
- a plurality of image pixels is mapped to a plurality of respective first subsets of display pixels in a pixel array, such as pixel array 122 .
- a configuration of an adaptable light manipulator that is positioned proximate to the pixel array is changed.
- a slit pattern, orientation, or the like, of adaptable parallax barrier 124 may be changed.
- a mapping of the plurality of image pixels is changed from the plurality of respective first subsets of the display pixels to a plurality of respective second subsets of the display pixels in the pixel array to compensate for changing the configuration of the adaptable light manipulator.
- FIGS. 9 and 10 provide a simple illustration of an exemplary application of the method of flowchart 700 .
- a portion of a pixel array 800 is used to simultaneously display a first image comprising image pixels shown depicting the letter “A” and a second image comprising image pixels shown depicting the letter “B.”
- this display format is utilized to support a three-dimensional viewing configuration corresponding to a particular arrangement of an adaptable light manipulator disposed proximate to the pixel array.
- FIG. 10 is intended to represent the same portion of pixel array 800 after the configuration of the adaptable light manipulator has been changed to support a modified three-dimensional viewing configuration (e.g., in response to a changed location of a viewer or some other factor).
- the modified three-dimensional viewing configuration requires the display location of the first image and the second image to be shifted, as shown in FIG. 10 .
- the same image pixel 904 is now rendered to the bottom-most two display pixels in the second column from the left of array portion 800 .
- FIG. 11 shows a block diagram of an exemplary display system 1100 , which is another example of a display system that utilizes an adaptable parallax barrier to support multiple viewing configurations.
- display system 1100 includes driver circuitry 1102 and a screen 1104 , wherein screen 1104 include a light generator 1122 , an adaptable parallax barrier 1124 and a pixel array 1126 .
- driver circuitry 1102 includes light generator driver circuitry 1112 , adaptable parallax barrier driver circuitry 1114 and pixel array driver circuitry 1116 .
- Light generator 1122 emits light 1132 .
- Adaptable parallax barrier 1124 is positioned proximate to light generator 1122 .
- Barrier element array 1144 is a layer of adaptable parallax barrier 1124 that includes a plurality of barrier elements or blocking regions arranged in an array. Each barrier element of the array is configured to be selectively opaque or transparent.
- Barrier element array 1144 filters light 1132 received from light generator 1122 to generate filtered light 1134 .
- Filtered light 1134 is configured to enable a two-dimensional image or a three-dimensional image (e.g., formed by a pair of two-dimensional images in filtered light 1134 ) to be formed based on images subsequently imposed on filtered light 1134 by pixel array 1126 .
- Pixel array 1126 includes a two-dimensional array of pixels (e.g., arranged in a grid or other distribution) like pixel array 122 of FIG. 1C .
- pixel array 1126 is not self-illuminating, and instead is a light filter that imposes images (e.g., in the form of color, grayscale, etc.) on filtered light 1134 from adaptable parallax barrier 1124 to generate filtered light 1136 to include one or more images.
- Each pixel of pixel array 1126 may be a separately addressable filter (e.g., a pixel of a plasma display, an LCD display, an LED display, or of other type of display).
- Each pixel of pixel array 1126 may be individually controllable to vary the color imposed on the corresponding light passing through, and/or to vary the intensity of the passed light in filtered light 1136 .
- each pixel of pixel array 1126 may include a plurality of sub-pixels that correspond to separate color channels, such as a trio of red, green, and blue sub-pixels included in each pixel.
- Driver circuitry 1102 receives control signals 1108 from control circuitry (not shown in FIG. 11 ).
- control signals 1108 may be received via a pathway from processing circuitry, such as processing circuitry 162 of FIG. 1A or processing circuitry 103 of FIG. 1B .
- the control signals 1108 cause driver circuitry 1102 to place screen 1104 in a selected one of a plurality of different viewing configurations.
- adaptable parallax barrier driver circuitry 1114 transmits drive signals 1154 that cause barrier element array 1144 to be placed in a state that supports the selected viewing configuration.
- pixel array driver circuitry 1116 transmits drive signals 1156 to cause pixels of one or more images (also referred to herein as “image pixels”) to be rendered among the pixels of pixel array 1126 (also referred to herein as “display pixels”) in a manner that is consistent with a current configuration of adaptable parallax barrier 1124 .
- the selected viewing configuration may be a particular two-dimensional viewing configuration, a particular three-dimensional viewing configuration, or a viewing configuration that supports the display of different types of two-dimensional and/or three-dimensional content in different display regions.
- conventional LCD displays typically include a backlight and a display panel that includes an array of LCD pixels.
- the backlight is designed to produce a sheet of light of uniform luminosity for illuminating the LCD pixels.
- light generator 1122 includes a backlight array 1142 which is a two-dimensional array of light sources. Such light sources may be arranged, for example, in a rectangular grid. Each light source in backlight array 1142 is individually addressable and controllable to select an amount of light emitted thereby.
- a single light source may comprise one or more light-emitting elements depending upon the implementation.
- each light source in backlight array 1142 comprises a single light-emitting diode (LED) although this example is not intended to be limiting.
- the amount of light emitted by the individual light sources that make up backlight array 1142 can selectively controlled by drive signals 1152 generated by light generator driver circuitry 1112 so that the brightness associated with each of a plurality of display regions of screen 1104 can also be controlled.
- This enables display system 1100 to provide a desired brightness level for each display region automatically and/or in response to user input.
- backlight array 1142 can be controlled such that a uniform level of brightness is achieved across different simultaneously-displayed display regions, even though the number of perceptible pixels per unit area varies from display region to display region.
- backlight array 1142 can be controlled such that the level of brightness associated with a particular display region is increased or reduced without impacting (or without substantially impacting) the brightness of other simultaneously-displayed display regions.
- FIG. 12 provides an exploded view of an exemplary display system 1200 that implements a controllable backlight array as described immediately above.
- Display system 1200 comprises one implementation of display system 1100 .
- display system 1200 includes a light generator 1202 that includes a backlight array 1212 , an adaptable parallax barrier 1204 that includes a barrier element array 1222 and a display panel 1206 that includes a pixel array 1232 . These elements may be aligned with and positioned proximate to each other to create an integrated display screen.
- a first portion 1234 of pixel array 1232 and a first portion 1224 of barrier element array 1222 have been manipulated to create a first display region that displays multi-view three-dimensional content
- a second portion 1236 of pixel array 1232 and a second portion 1226 of barrier element array 1222 have been manipulated to create a second display region that displays a three-dimensional image
- a third portion of 1238 of pixel array 1232 and a third portion 1228 of barrier element array 1222 have been manipulated to create a third display region that displays a two-dimensional image.
- the amount of light emitted by light sources included within a first portion 1214 , a second portion 1216 and a third portion 1218 of backlight array 1212 can respectively be controlled.
- the light sources within first portion 1214 may be controlled to provide greater luminosity than the light sources within second portion 1216 and third portion 1218 as the number of perceivable pixels per unit area will be smallest in the first display region with which first portion 1214 is aligned.
- the light sources within second portion 1216 may be controlled to provide greater luminosity than the light sources within third portion 1218 since the number of perceivable pixels per unit area will be smaller in the second display region with which second portion 1216 is aligned than the third display region with which third portion 1218 is aligned.
- the number of perceivable pixels per unit area will be smaller in the second display region with which second portion 1216 is aligned than the third display region with which third portion 1218 is aligned.
- other control schemes may be used.
- a display system in accordance with an embodiment can dynamically manipulate pixel array 1232 and barrier element array 1222 in a coordinated fashion to dynamically and simultaneously create any number of display regions of different sizes and in different locations, wherein each of the created display regions can display one of two-dimensional, three-dimensional or multi-view three-dimensional content.
- backlight array 1212 can also be dynamically manipulated in a coordinated fashion with pixel array 1232 and barrier element array 1222 to ensure that each display region is perceived at a desired level of brightness.
- each light source in backlight array 1212 there is a one-to-one correspondence between each light source in backlight array 1212 and every display pixel in pixel array 1232 .
- the number of light sources provided in backlight array 1212 is less than the number of pixels provided in pixel array 1232 .
- a single light source may be provided in backlight array 1212 for every N pixels provided in pixel array 1232 , wherein N is an integer greater than 1.
- each light source in backlight array 1212 may be arranged so that it provides backlighting for a particular group of pixels in pixel array 1232 , although this is only an example. In alternate embodiments, the number of light sources provided in backlight array 1212 is greater than the number of pixels provided in pixel array 1232 .
- light sources in backlight array 1212 are described as being individually controllable. However, in alternate embodiments, light sources in backlight array 1212 may only be controllable in groups. This may facilitate a reduction in the complexity of the control infrastructure associated with backlight array 1212 . In still further embodiments, light sources in backlight array 1212 may be controllable both individually and in groups. It will be recognized that light generator 1202 , adaptable parallax barrier 1204 , and display panel 1206 may be controlled based on control signals that are received via a pathway from processing circuitry, such as processing circuitry 162 of FIG. 1A or processing circuitry 103 of FIG. 1B .
- FIGS. 11 and 12 show display system configurations in which a barrier element array of an adaptable parallax barrier is disposed between a backlight array of individually addressable and controllable light sources and a pixel array
- the pixel array may be disposed between the backlight array and the barrier element array.
- FIG. 13 is a block diagram of an exemplary display system 1300 that includes a pixel array 1324 disposed between a light generator 1322 that includes a backlight array 1342 and an adaptable parallax barrier 1326 that includes a barrier element array 1344 to support the generation of two-dimensional and/or three-dimensional images perceivable in a viewing space 1306 .
- selective control of the luminosity of groups or individual ones of the light sources in backlight array 1342 may also be used to vary the backlighting luminosity associated with different display regions created by the interaction of backlight array 1342 , pixel array 1324 and barrier element array 1344 .
- light generator 1322 . pixel array 1324 , and/or adaptable parallax barrier 1326 may be controlled based on control signals that are received via a pathway from processing circuitry, such as processing circuitry 162 of FIG. 1A or processing circuitry 103 of FIG. 1B .
- FIG. 14 provides an exploded view of an exemplary display system 1400 that implements a regional brightness control scheme based on pixel intensity as described immediately above.
- the regional brightness control scheme may be implemented based on control signals that are received via a pathway from processing circuitry, such as processing circuitry 162 of FIG. 1A or processing circuitry 103 of FIG. 1B , for example. As shown in FIG.
- display system 1400 includes a display panel 1402 and an adaptable parallax barrier 1404 .
- Display system 1400 also includes a backlight panel, although this element is not shown in FIG. 14 . These elements may be aligned with and positioned proximate to each other to create an integrated display screen.
- display panel 1402 includes a pixel array 1412 .
- Each of the pixels in a first portion 1414 of pixel array 1412 is individually controlled by pixel array driver circuitry to pass a selected amount of light produced by a backlight panel (not shown in FIG. 14 ), thereby producing display-generated light representative of a single two-dimensional image.
- Each of the pixels in a second portion 1416 of pixel array 1412 is individually controlled by the pixel array driver circuitry to pass a selected amount of light produced by the backlight panel, thereby producing display-generated light representative of two two-dimensional images that, when combined by the brain of a viewer positioned in an appropriate location relative to display system 1400 , will be perceived as a single three-dimensional image.
- Adaptable parallax barrier 1404 includes barrier element array 1422 that includes a first portion 1424 and a second portion 1426 .
- Barrier element array 1422 is aligned with pixel array 1414 such that first portion 1424 of blocking region array 1422 overlays first portion 1414 of pixel array 1412 and second portion 1426 of blocking region array 1422 overlays second portion 1416 of pixel array 1412 .
- Adaptable parallax barrier driver circuitry causes all the barrier elements within first portion 1424 of barrier element array 1422 to be transparent. Thus, the two-dimensional image generated by the pixels of first portion 1414 of pixel array 1412 will simply be passed through to a viewer in a viewing space in front of display system 1400 .
- the adaptable parallax barrier driver circuitry manipulates the barrier elements within second portion 1426 of blocking region array 1422 to form a plurality of parallel transparent strips alternated with parallel opaque strips, thereby creating a parallax effect that enables the two two-dimensional images generated by the pixels of second portion 1416 of pixel array 1412 to be perceived as a three-dimensional image by a viewer in the viewing space in front of display system 1400 .
- the pixels per unit area perceived by this viewer with respect to the two-dimensional image will be greater than the pixels per unit area perceived by this viewer with respect to the three-dimensional image.
- the two-dimensional image will appear brighter to the viewer than the three dimensional image when backlighting of constant luminosity is provided behind pixel array 1412 .
- drive signals may be transmitted to display panel 1402 that selectively cause the pixels included in first portion 1414 of pixel array 1412 to pass less light from the backlight panel (i.e., become less intense), thereby reducing the brightness of the two-dimensional image produced from the pixels in first portion 1414 of pixel array 1412 .
- drive signals may be transmitted to display panel 1402 that selectively cause the pixels included in second portion 1416 of pixel array 1412 to pass more light from the backlight panel (i.e., become more intense), thereby increasing the brightness of the three-dimensional image produced from the pixels in second portion 1416 of pixel array 1412 .
- the intensity of the pixels in portions 1414 and 1416 of pixel array 1412 By controlling the intensity of the pixels in portions 1414 and 1416 of pixel array 1412 in this manner, the brightness of the two-dimensional image produced from the pixels in first portion 1414 of pixel array 1412 and the brightness of the three-dimensional image produced from the pixels in second portion 1416 of pixel array 1412 can be kept consistent. Additionally, by providing independent control over the intensity of the pixels in portions 1414 and 1416 of pixel array 1412 , independent control over the brightness of the two-dimensional and three-dimensional images generated therefrom can also be achieved.
- a display system in accordance with an embodiment can dynamically manipulate pixel array 1412 and blocking element array 1422 in a coordinated fashion to dynamically and simultaneously create any number of display regions of different sizes and in different locations, wherein each of the created display regions can display one of two-dimensional, three-dimensional or multi-view three-dimensional content.
- the intensity of the pixels in pixel array 1412 can also be dynamically manipulated in a coordinated fashion to ensure that each display region is perceived at a desired level of brightness.
- FIG. 15 illustrates a front perspective view of an exemplary display panel 1500 .
- Display panel 1500 includes a pixel array 1502 that includes a first portion 1504 and a second portion 1506 , wherein each of first portion 1504 and second portion 1506 includes a different subset of the pixels in pixel array 1502 . It is to be assumed that first portion 1504 of pixel array 1502 is illuminated by backlighting provided by an aligned first portion of a backlight array (not shown in FIG.
- Second portion 1506 of pixel array 1502 is illuminated by backlighting provided by an aligned second portion of the backlight array.
- the amount of light emitted by each light source in the second portion of the backlight array to illuminate second portion 1506 of pixel array 1502 is controlled such that it is greater than the amount of light emitted by each light source in the first portion of the backlight array to illuminate first portion 1504 of pixel array 1502 .
- This control scheme may be applied, for example, to cause a three-dimensional image formed by interaction between the pixels in second portion 1506 of pixel array 1502 and an adaptable parallax barrier to appear to have a uniform brightness level with respect to a two-dimensional image formed by interaction between the pixels in first portion 1504 of pixel array 1504 and the adaptable parallax barrier.
- the difference in the amount of light emitted by each light source in the first and second portions of the backlight array to illuminate corresponding first and second portions 1504 and 1506 of pixel array 1502 may also give rise to undesired visual artifacts.
- the difference may cause pixels in boundary areas immediately outside of second portion 1506 of pixel array 1502 to appear brighter than desired in relation to other pixels in first portion 1504 of pixel array 1502 .
- the pixels in boundary area 1512 immediately outside of second portion 1506 of pixel array 1502 may appear brighter than desired in relation to other pixels in first portion 1504 of pixel array 1502 .
- the difference may cause pixels in boundary areas immediately inside of second portion 1506 of pixel array 1502 to appear dimmer than desired in relation to other pixels in second portion 1506 of pixel array 1502 .
- the pixels in boundary area 1514 immediately inside of second portion 1506 of pixel array 1502 may appear dimmer than desired in relation to other pixels in second portion 1506 of pixel array 1502 .
- the reduced luminosity of the light sources in the first portion of the backlight array has “spilled over” to impact the pixels in boundary area 1514 , causing those pixels to be dimmer than desired.
- an embodiment may selectively control the amount of light passed by the pixels located in boundary region 1512 or boundary region 1514 to compensate for the undesired visual effects.
- driver circuitry associated with pixel array 1502 may selectively cause the pixels included in boundary area 1512 of pixel array 1502 to pass less light from the backlight panel (i.e., become less intense), thereby reducing the brightness of the pixels in boundary area 1512 , thus compensating for an undesired increase in brightness due to “spill over” from light sources in the second portion of the backlight array.
- driver circuitry associated with pixel array 1502 may selectively cause the pixels included in boundary area 1514 of pixel array 1502 to pass more light from the backlight panel (i.e., become more intense), thereby increasing the brightness of the pixels in boundary area 1514 , thus compensating for an undesired reduction in brightness due to “spill over” from light sources in the first portion of the backlight array.
- the intensity of the pixels in boundary areas 1512 and 1514 in this manner, the undesired visual effects described above that can arise from the use of a backlight array to provide regional brightness control can be mitigated or avoided entirely.
- FIG. 15 provides only one example of undesired visual effects that can arise from the use of a backlight array to provide regional brightness control.
- Persons skilled in the relevant art(s) will appreciate that many different display regions having many different brightness characteristics can be simultaneously generated by a display system in accordance with embodiments, thereby giving rise to different undesired visual effects relating to the brightness of boundary areas inside and outside of the different display regions. In each case, the intensity of pixels located in such boundaries areas can be selectively increased or reduced to mitigate or avoid such undesired visual effects.
- a regional brightness control scheme is implemented in a display system that does not include a backlight panel at all, but instead utilizes a display panel comprising an array of organic light emitting diodes (OLEDs) or polymer light emitting diodes (PLEDs) which function as display pixels and also provide their own illumination.
- Display system 100 described above in reference to FIG. 1C may be representative of such a system, provided that pixel array 122 comprises an array of OLEDs or PLEDs.
- the amount of light emitted by the individual OLED/PLED pixels that make up the OLED/PLED pixel array can be selectively controlled so that the brightness associated with each of a plurality of display regions of display system 100 can also be controlled.
- the OLED/PLED pixel array can be controlled such that a uniform level of brightness is achieved across different simultaneously-displayed display regions, even though the number of perceptible pixels per unit area varies from display region to display region.
- the OLED/PLED pixel array can be controlled such that the level of brightness associated with a particular display region is increased or reduced without impacting (or without substantially impacting) the brightness of other simultaneously-displayed display regions.
- OLED/PLED pixel regions such as those described above are adjacent to each other, it is possible that the brightness characteristics of one pixel region can impact the perceived brightness of an adjacent pixel region having different brightness characteristics, creating an undesired visual effect.
- a first OLED/PLED pixel region having a relatively high level of brightness to support the viewing of multi-view three-dimensional content may be adjacent to a second OLED/PLED pixel region having a relatively low level of brightness to support the viewing of two-dimensional content.
- light from pixels in a perimeter area of the first OLED/PLED pixel region that are close to the boundary between the two pixel regions may “spill over” into a perimeter area of the second OLED/PLED pixel region.
- pixels in the perimeter area of the second OLED/PLED pixel region may appear brighter than desired in relation to other pixels in the second OLED/PLED pixel region.
- pixels in the perimeter area of the first OLED/PLED pixel array may appear dimmer than desired in relation to other pixels in the first OLED/PLED pixel region because of the adjacency to the second OLED/PLED pixel region.
- a regional brightness control scheme is implemented in a display system that includes an adaptable parallax barrier that also supports brightness regulation via an “overlay” approach.
- an adaptable parallax barrier that also supports brightness regulation via an “overlay” approach.
- Such an approach involves the use of a brightness regulation overlay that is either independent of or integrated with an adaptable parallax barrier.
- the brightness regulation overlay is used to help achieve the aforementioned goals of maintaining standard brightness across various regional screen configurations and compensating for or minimizing backlighting dispersion.
- the brightness regulation overlay comprises an element that allows regional dimming through various tones of “grey” pixels.
- an adaptable parallax barrier and the brightness regulation overlay are implemented as a non-color (i.e., black, white and grayscale) LCD sandwich, although other implementations may be used.
- the combined adaptable parallax barrier and brightness regulation overlay provide full transparent or opaque states for each pixel, as well as a grayscale alternative that can be used to “balance out” brightness variations caused by the parallax barrier itself.
- Control over the individual barrier elements of the parallax barrier and the individual grayscale pixels of the brightness regulation overlay may be provided by using coordinated driver circuitry signaling.
- coordinate signaling may cause the pixels of the adaptable parallax barrier and the brightness regulation overlay (collectively referred to below as the manipulator pixels) to create opaque and transparent barrier elements associated with a particular parallax barrier configuration and a grayscale support there between to allow creation of overlays.
- the regional brightness control scheme described above with reference to FIG. 15 which may include such coordinated signaling, may be implemented based on control signals that are received via a pathway from processing circuitry, such as processing circuitry 162 of FIG. 1A or processing circuitry 103 of FIG. 1B , for example.
- FIG. 16 illustrates two exemplary configurations of an adaptable light manipulator 1600 that includes an adaptable parallax barrier and a brightness regulation overlay implemented as a light manipulating LCD sandwich with manipulator grayscale pixels.
- the exemplary configurations of adaptable light manipulator 1600 may be based on control signals that are received via a pathway from processing circuitry, such as processing circuitry 162 of FIG. 1A or processing circuitry 103 of FIG. 1B , for example.
- the grayscale pixels map to the display pixels on a one-to-one basis, but that need not be the case.
- a first exemplary configuration of adaptable light manipulator 1600 is shown above the section line denoted with reference numeral 1602 .
- a three-dimensional region 1604 is created with fully transparent or fully opaque manipulator pixels that provide parallax barrier functionality and a two-dimensional region 1606 is created having continuous medium gray manipulator pixels.
- the medium gray manipulator pixels operate to reduce the perceived brightness of two-dimensional region 1606 to better match that of three-dimensional region 1604 .
- two-dimensional region 1606 could instead comprise a three-dimensional region having a number of views that is different than three-dimensional region 1604 , thus also requiring brightness regulation.
- a boundary region 1610 within two-dimensional region 1606 may be “lightened” to a light gray to compensate for any diminution of light that might occur near the boundary with three-dimensional region 1604 .
- the grayscale level of an inner portion 1608 of two-dimensional region 1606 is maintained at the same medium gray level as in the portion of two-dimensional region 1606 above section line 1602 .
- a first boundary region 1612 and a second boundary region 1614 within three-dimensional region 1604 comprise darker and lighter gray transitional areas, respectively, to account for light dispersion from two-dimensional region 1606 .
- an inner portion 1616 of three-dimensional region 1604 includes only fully transparent or fully opaque manipulator pixels consistent with a parallax barrier configuration and no brightness regulation.
- the configuration of adaptable light manipulator 1600 is achieved by first creating a white through various grayscale areas that correspond to the regions and boundary areas to be formed. Once established, the manipulator pixels in these areas that comprise the opaque portions of the parallax barrier are overwritten to turn them black.
- this two-stage approach is conceptual only and no “overwriting” need be performed.
- adaptable light manipulator 1600 comprises the only component used in a display system for performing brightness regulation and/or boundary region compensation.
- the display system further utilizes any one or more of the following aforementioned techniques for performing brightness regulation and/or boundary region compensation: a backlight array with independently-controllable light sources, and/or a pixel array and associated control logic for selectively increasing or decreasing the intensity of display pixels (e.g., either LCD pixels or OLED/PLED pixels).
- a backlight array with independently-controllable light sources and/or a pixel array and associated control logic for selectively increasing or decreasing the intensity of display pixels (e.g., either LCD pixels or OLED/PLED pixels).
- adaptable light manipulator 1600 is implemented as an integrated adaptable parallax barrier and brightness regulation overlay.
- adaptable light manipulator 1600 is implemented using an adaptable parallax barrier panel and an independent brightness regulation overlay panel.
- an adaptable lenticular lens may be used.
- adaptable parallax barrier 124 may be replaced with an adaptable lenticular lens.
- adaptable parallax barrier 1326 may be replaced with an adaptable lenticular lens.
- the configuration of such an adaptable lenticular lens may be based on control signals that are received via a pathway from processing circuitry, such as processing circuitry 162 of FIG. 1A or processing circuitry 103 of FIG. 1B , for example.
- FIG. 17 shows a perspective view of an exemplary adaptable lenticular lens 1700 in accordance with an embodiment.
- adaptable lenticular lens 1700 includes a sub-lens array 1702 .
- Sub-lens array 1702 includes a plurality of sub-lenses 1704 arranged in a two-dimensional array (e.g., arranged side-by-side in a row).
- Each sub-lens 1704 is shown in FIG. 17 as generally cylindrical in shape and having a substantially semi-circular cross-section, but in other embodiments may have other shapes.
- sub-lens array 1702 is shown to include eight sub-lenses for illustrative purposes and is not intended to be limiting.
- sub-lens array 1702 may include any number (e.g., hundreds, thousands, etc.) of sub-lenses 1704 .
- FIG. 18 shows a side view of adaptable lenticular lens 1700 .
- light may be passed through adaptable lenticular lens 1700 in the direction of dotted arrow 1802 to be diverted.
- Adaptable lenticular lens 1700 is adaptable in that it can be modified to manipulate light in different ways in order to accommodate different viewing configurations.
- adaptable lenticular lens is made from an elastic material and can be stretched or shrunk in one or more directions in response to generated drive signals.
- Display systems in accordance with further embodiments may include multiple layers of light manipulators. Such display systems may enable multiple three-dimensional images to be displayed in a viewing space.
- the multiple light manipulating layers may enable spatial separation of the images.
- a display device that includes multiple light manipulator layers may be configured to display a first three-dimensional image in a first region of a viewing space (e.g., a left-side area), a second three-dimensional image in a second region of the viewing space (e.g., a central area), a third three-dimensional image in a third region of the viewing space (e.g., a right-side area), etc.
- a display device that includes multiple light manipulator layers may be configured to display any number of spatially separated three-dimensional images as desired for a particular application (e.g., according to a number and spacing of viewers in the viewing space, etc.).
- FIG. 19 is a block diagram of an exemplary display system 1900 that includes multiple light manipulator layers in accordance with an embodiment.
- display system 1900 includes driver circuitry 1902 and a screen 1904 , wherein screen 1904 includes a pixel array 1922 , a first light manipulator 1924 and a second light manipulator 1926 .
- first light manipulator 1924 includes first light manipulator elements 1942 and second light manipulator 1926 includes second light manipulator elements 1944 .
- driver circuitry 1902 includes pixel array driver circuitry 1912 and light manipulator driver circuitry 1914 .
- Pixel array driver circuitry 1912 may generate drive signals 1952 based on a control signal 1908 received from control circuitry (not shown in FIG. 19 ) and drive signals 1952 may be received by pixel array 1922 to generate light 1932 .
- control signal 1908 may be received via a pathway from processing circuitry, such as processing circuitry 162 of FIG. 1A or processing circuitry 103 of FIG. 1B .
- Each pixel of pixel array 1922 may generate light that is received at first light manipulator 1924 .
- pixel array driver circuitry 1912 may generate drive signals 1952 to cause pixel array 1922 to emit light 1932 containing a plurality of images corresponding to the sets of pixels.
- First light manipulator 1924 may be configured to manipulate light 1932 received from pixel array 1922 .
- first light manipulator 1924 includes light manipulator elements 1942 configured to perform manipulating (e.g., filtering, diverting, etc.) of light 1932 to generate manipulated light 1934 .
- Light manipulator elements 1942 may optionally be configurable to adjust the manipulating performed by first light manipulator 1924 .
- First light manipulator 1924 may perform filtering in a similar manner as an adaptable parallax barrier described above or in other manner.
- first light manipulator 1924 may include a lenticular lens that diverts light 1932 to perform light manipulating, generating manipulated light 1934 .
- light manipulator driver circuitry 1914 may generate drive signals 1954 based on control signal 1908 received by driver circuitry 1902 to cause light manipulator elements 1942 to manipulate light 1932 as desired.
- Manipulated light 1934 is received by second light manipulator 1926 to generate manipulated light 1936 that includes a plurality of three-dimensional images 1962 A- 1962 N formed in a viewing space 1906 . It will be recognized that manipulated light 1936 may include any number N of three-dimensional images. As shown in FIG. 19 , second light manipulator 1926 includes light manipulator elements 1944 configured to perform manipulating of manipulated light 1934 to generate manipulated light 1936 . Light manipulator elements 1944 may optionally be configurable to adjust the manipulating performed by second light manipulator 1926 . In an embodiment, light manipulator driver circuitry 1914 may generate drive signals 1956 based on control signal 1908 to cause light manipulator elements 1944 to manipulate manipulated light 1934 to generate manipulated light 1936 including three-dimensional images 1962 A- 1962 N as desired. In embodiments, second light manipulator 1926 may include an adaptable parallax barrier or lenticular lens configured to manipulate manipulated light 1934 to generate manipulated light 1936 .
- screen 1904 of display system 1900 supports multiple viewers with media content in the form of three-dimensional images or views.
- Screen 1904 may provide a first three-dimensional view based on first three-dimensional media content to a first viewer, a second three-dimensional view based on second three-dimensional media content to a second viewer, and optionally further three-dimensional views based on further three-dimensional media content to further viewers.
- First and second light manipulators 1924 and 1926 each cause three-dimensional media content to be presented to a corresponding viewer via a corresponding area of screen 1904 , with each viewer being enabled to view corresponding media content without viewing media content directed to other viewers.
- the areas of screen 1904 that provide the various three-dimensional views of media content overlap each other at least in part. In the embodiment of FIG.
- the areas may be the same area. As such, multiple three-dimensional views that are each viewable by a corresponding viewer may be delivered by a single screen.
- Embodiments of display system 1900 may also be configured to generate two-dimensional views, as well as any combination of one or more two-dimensional views simultaneously with one or more three-dimensional views.
- FIG. 20 shows a block diagram of an exemplary display system 2000 , which is a further example of a display system that includes multiple light manipulator layers. Like display system 1900 of FIG. 19 , display system 2000 is configured to display multiple three-dimensional images 2062 A- 2062 N in a viewing space 2006 in a spatially separated manner. As shown in FIG. 20 , display system 2000 includes driver circuitry 2002 and a screen 2004 , wherein screen 2004 includes a light generator 2022 , a first light manipulator 2024 , a second light manipulator 2026 and a pixel array 2028 . As shown in FIG.
- light generator 2022 optionally includes a backlight array 2042
- first light manipulator 2024 includes first light manipulator elements 2044
- second light manipulator 2026 includes second light manipulator elements 2046 .
- driver circuitry 2002 receives control signals 2008 and includes light generator driver circuitry 2012 , light manipulator driver circuitry 2014 , and pixel array driver circuitry 2016 .
- Control signals 2008 may be received via a pathway from processing circuitry, such as processing circuitry 162 of FIG. 1A or processing circuitry 103 of FIG. 1B , for example.
- Light generator driver circuitry 2012 , light manipulator driver circuitry 2014 , and pixel array driver circuitry 2016 may generate drive signals to perform their respective functions based on control signals 2008 .
- first and second light manipulators 2024 and 2026 are positioned between light generator 2022 and pixel array 2028 .
- pixel array 2028 may instead be located between first and second light manipulators 2024 and 2026 .
- FIG. 21 is a block diagram of an exemplary system 2100 that supports presentation of three-dimensional viewing content based on portions thereof that are received from respective sources in accordance with an embodiment.
- system 2100 includes a first source 2102 A, a second source 2102 B, a media circuitry 2104 , and a screen 2106 .
- First source 2102 A provides first a view portion 2122 A of three-dimensional (3D) viewing content 2134 via a first pathway 2120 A.
- First view portion 2122 A represents a first subset of perspective views that are represented by the 3D viewing content 2134 .
- Second source 2102 B provides a second view portion 2122 B of the 3D viewing content 2134 via a second pathway 2120 B.
- the second view portion 2122 B represents a second subset of the perspective views that are represented by the 3D viewing content 2134 .
- Each of the first and second subsets may include any suitable number (1, 2, 3, 4, etc.) of the perspective views that are represented by the 3D viewing content 2134 .
- a number of the perspective views that are included in the first subset and a number of the perspective views that are included in the second subset may be the same or different.
- second source 2102 B provides a difference file in lieu of the second view portion 2122 B.
- the difference file defines a difference between the first view portion 2122 A and the second view portion 2122 B.
- Each of first and second sources 2102 A and 2102 B may be a remote source or a local source.
- a remote source include but are not limited to a broadcast media server or an on-demand media server.
- a local source include but are not limited to a disc player (e.g., a DVD player, a CD player, or Blu-Ray disc player), a personal computer (e.g., a desktop computer, a laptop computer, or a tablet computer), a personal media player, or a smart phone.
- Each of the first and second pathways 2120 A and 2120 B may include one or more local device pathways, point-to-point links, and/or pathways in a hybrid fiber coaxial (HFC) network, a wide-area network (e.g., the Internet), a local area network (LAN), another type of network, or a combination thereof.
- HFC hybrid fiber coaxial
- a wide-area network e.g., the Internet
- LAN local area network
- Each of the first and second pathways 2120 A and 2120 B may support wired, wireless, or both transmission media, including satellite, terrestrial (e.g., fiber optic, copper, twisted pair, coaxial, or the like), radio, microwave, free-space optics, and/or any other form or method of transmission.
- Media circuitry 2104 is configured to process the first and second view portions 2122 A and 2122 B to support presentation of 3D viewing content 2134 .
- Media circuitry 2104 includes first circuitry 2112 , second circuitry 2114 , third circuitry 2116 , and fourth circuitry 2118 .
- First circuitry 2112 receives the first and second view portions 2122 A and 2122 B. For example, if the first and second view portions 2122 A and 2122 B are encoded, first circuitry 2112 may decode the first and second view portions 2122 A and 2122 B for further processing by second circuitry 2114 .
- first circuitry 2112 may decode the first view portion 2122 A and the difference file in accordance with one or more techniques described in commonly-owned co-pending U.S. patent application Ser. No. ______, filed on even date herewith and entitled “Video Compression Supporting Selective Delivery of 2D, Stereoscopic 3D and Multi-View 3D Content,” the entirety of which is incorporated by reference herein.
- Second circuitry 2114 generates drive signal(s) 2124 based on the first and second view portions 2122 A and 2122 B.
- the drive signal(s) 2124 are intended to control screen 2106 to support a visual presentation of the three-dimensional viewing content 2134 .
- second circuitry 2114 may include pixel array driver circuitry (e.g., pixel array driver circuitry 112 , 1116 , 1912 , or 2016 ) for controlling a pixel array (e.g., pixel array 122 , 1126 , 1922 , or 2028 ) in screen 2106 .
- second circuitry 2114 may include light manipulator driver circuitry (e.g., adaptable parallax barrier driver circuitry 114 or 1114 , or light manipulator driver circuitry 1914 or 2014 ) for controlling one or more light manipulators (e.g., adaptable parallax barrier(s) 124 and/or 1124 , and/or light manipulator(s) 1924 , 1926 , 2024 and/or 2026 ) in screen 2106 .
- second circuitry 2114 may include light generator driver circuitry (e.g., light generator driver circuitry 1112 or 2012 ) for controlling a light generator (e.g., light generator 1122 or 2022 ) in screen 2106 .
- Second circuitry 2114 may synchronize the first view portion 2122 A and the second view portion 2122 B. Second circuitry may buffer the first view portion 2122 A and/or the second view portion 2122 B to perform the synchronization. Such buffering may enable second circuitry 2114 to shift the first view portion 2122 A and/or the second view portion 2122 B with respect to time to align frames that are included in the second view portion 2122 B with corresponding frames that are included in the first view portion 2122 A, or vice versa. In accordance with this example, second circuitry 2114 generates the drive signal(s) in response to synchronizing the first and second view portions 2122 A and 2122 B.
- Third circuitry 2116 responds to offers that are provided by offer system 2108 .
- Third circuitry 2116 receives the offers via first circuitry 2112 .
- first circuitry 2112 receives an offer 2126 that relates to second view portion 2122 B from offer system 2108 .
- First circuitry 2112 forwards the offer 2126 to third circuitry 2116 .
- third circuitry 2116 may determine whether to accept the offer 2126 based on one or more predetermined criteria. Such criteria may require, for example, that a cost that is specified by the offer 2126 be less than a cost threshold, that the offer 2126 specify one or more perspective views represented by the second view portion 2122 B that are included among one or more designated perspective views, etc.
- third circuitry 2116 may determine whether to accept the offer 2126 based on input from a viewer. In accordance with this example, third circuitry 2116 may send a request regarding the offer 2126 to the viewer and determine whether to accept the offer 2126 based on the viewer's response to the request.
- Third circuitry 2116 is shown in FIG. 21 to provide an acceptance 2128 of the offer 2126 to offer system 2108 for purposes of illustration. Provision of the acceptance 2128 by third circuitry 2116 may trigger any of a variety of events.
- second source 2102 B may provide the second view portion 2122 B to first circuitry 2112 in response to third circuitry 2116 providing the acceptance 2128 .
- offer system 2108 may provide an enabling signal 2132 to first circuitry 2112 that enables media circuitry 2104 to access the second view portion 2122 B in response to third circuitry 2116 providing the acceptance 2128 .
- the enabling signal 2132 may include information, such as a passcode or a decryption key, that first circuitry 2112 may use to obtain access to the second view portion 2122 B.
- third circuitry 2116 may trigger a billing event regarding the second view portion 2122 B based at least in part on provision of the acceptance 2128 .
- the billing event may involve billing the viewer a cost that is specified in the offer 2126 .
- second source 2102 B may provide the second view portion 2122 B to first circuitry 2112 regardless whether the offer 2126 and the acceptance 2128 are present.
- first circuitry 2112 may be capable of accessing the second view portion 2122 B regardless whether first circuitry 2112 receives the enabling signal 2132 .
- Fourth circuitry 2108 determines that the first view portion 2122 A is received by first circuitry 2112 . For instance, fourth circuitry 2108 may receive an indicator from first circuitry 2112 that indicates receipt of the first view portion 2122 A. Upon determining that the first view portion 2122 A is received, fourth circuitry 2108 delivers an indication 2130 relating to the first view portion 2122 A to offer system 2108 . The indication 2130 indicates that the first view portion 2122 A is received by media circuitry 2104 . In an embodiment, first circuitry 2112 receives the offer 2126 from offer system 2108 in response to fourth circuitry 2118 providing the indication 2130 to offer system 2108 .
- Offer system 2108 provides the offer 2126 relating to the second view portion 2122 B to first circuitry 2112 .
- Offer system 2108 may receive the acceptance 2128 from third circuitry 2116 is response to providing the offer 2126 .
- offer system 2108 upon receiving the acceptance 2128 , offers system 2108 provides then instruction 2134 to second source 2102 B.
- the instruction 2134 instructs second source 2102 B to deliver the second view portion 2122 B to media circuitry 2104 . Accordingly, second source may not deliver the second view portion 2122 B to media circuitry 2104 until receipt of the instruction 2134 .
- offer system 2108 upon receiving the acceptance 2128 , provides the enabling signal 2132 to first circuitry 2112 for enabling media circuitry 2104 to access the second view portion 2122 B.
- the output of media circuitry 2104 comprises the drive signal(s) 2124 .
- Screen 2106 presents the 3D viewing content 2134 in viewing space 2110 based on the drive signal(s) 2124 .
- screen 2106 may include a pixel array, one or more light manipulators, and/or a light generator for supporting presentation of the 3D viewing content 2134 .
- Screen 2106 may be any suitable type of screen, including but not limited to an LCD screen, a plasma screen, a light emitting device (LED) screen (e.g., an OLED (organic LED) screen), etc.
- LED light emitting device
- first circuitry 2112 , second circuitry 2114 , third circuitry 2116 , and fourth circuitry 2118 are labeled as such, the functionality of first circuitry 2112 , second circuitry 2114 , third circuitry 2116 , and fourth circuitry 2118 may be implemented in hardware, software, firmware, or any combination thereof.
- system 2100 may not include one or more of first source 2102 A, second source 2102 B, screen 2106 , offer system 2108 , first circuitry 2112 , second circuitry 2114 , third circuitry 2116 , and/or fourth circuitry 2118 .
- system 2100 may include elements in addition to or in lieu of first source 2102 A, second source 2102 B, screen 2106 , offer system 2108 , first circuitry 2112 , second circuitry 2114 , third circuitry 2116 , and/or fourth circuitry 2118 .
- FIG. 22 is a block diagram of another exemplary system 2100 that supports presentation of three-dimensional viewing content based on portions thereof that are received from respective sources in accordance with an embodiment.
- display system 2200 includes a first source 2202 A, a second source 2202 B, media circuitry 2204 , and a screen 2206 .
- First and second sources 2202 A and 2202 B and screen 2206 operate in like manner to first and second sources 2102 A and 2102 B and screen 2106 , as described above with reference to FIG. 21 .
- first and second sources 2202 A and 2202 B provide respective first and second view portions 2222 A and 2222 B via respective first and second pathways 2220 A and 2220 B to media circuitry 2104 .
- Screen 2206 presents 3D viewing content 2234 in viewing space 2210 based on drive signal(s) 2224 that are received from media circuitry 2204 .
- Media circuitry 2204 includes first circuitry 2212 , second circuitry 2214 , and third circuitry 2216 .
- First and second circuitry 2212 and 2214 operate in like manner to first and second circuitry 2112 and 2114 , as described above with reference to FIG. 21 .
- first circuitry 2212 receives the first and second view portions 2222 A and 2222 B from first and second sources 2202 A and 2202 B.
- Second circuitry 2214 generates the drive signal(s) 2224 based on the first and second view portions 2222 A and 2222 B.
- First circuitry 2212 is shown in FIG. 22 to receive a control signal 2236 , a search instruction 2238 , and an orientation indication 2240 for illustrative purposes. It will be recognized that first circuitry 2212 need not necessarily receive each of the control signal 2236 , the search instruction 2238 , and the orientation indication 2240 . For instance, first circuitry may receive any one or more of the control signal 2236 , the search instruction 2238 , and/or the orientation indication 2240 .
- the control signal 2236 is generated in response to viewer input.
- the control signal 2236 may specify one or more portions or perspective views that are identified by the viewer input.
- First circuitry 2212 may receive the control signal 2236 from a user input interface that is accessible to the viewer.
- the user input interface may be a remote control device, a traditional computer input device such as a keyboard or mouse, a touch screen, a gamepad or other type of gaming console input device, or one or more sensors including but not limited to video cameras, microphones and motion sensors.
- third circuitry 2216 selects the second view portion 2222 B based on the control signal 2236 .
- third circuitry 2216 may review available portions of content to identify the portion(s) that are specified by the control signal 2236 or that represent perspective views that are specified by the control signal 2236 .
- third circuitry 2216 may select the second view portion 2222 B in response to the second view portion 2222 B including the identified portion(s).
- the search instruction 2238 is intended to initiate a search for portion(s) of content that may be combined with the first view portion 2222 A for presentation of the 3D viewing content 2234 .
- the search instruction 2238 may be generated by a user input interface in response to viewer input, for example.
- third circuitry 2216 initiates the search based on the search instruction 2238 .
- first circuitry 2212 may receive the second view portion 2222 B in response to initiation of the search.
- the orientation indication 2240 indicates an orientation of the viewer with respect to screen 2206 .
- the orientation indication 2240 may be received from a device that is worn by the viewer, held by the viewer, sitting in the viewer's lap, in the viewer's pocket, sitting next the viewer, etc.
- the orientation indication 2240 may be received in response to a distancing signal that is transmitted toward the viewer by third circuitry 2216 .
- third circuitry 2216 may determine an orientation (e.g., location) of the viewer based on a difference between a time at which third circuitry 2216 transmits the distancing signal and a time at which third circuitry receives the orientation indication 2240 . For instance, a reflection of the distancing signal from the viewer may be received by third circuitry 2216 as the orientation indication 2240 .
- third circuitry 2216 selects the second view portion 2222 B based on the orientation of the viewer, as indicated by the orientation indication 2240 . As shown in FIG. 22 , third circuitry 2216 provides a selection instruction 2242 to second source 2202 B. The selection instruction 2242 instructs second source 2202 B to provide the second view portion 2222 B to media circuitry 2204 .
- third circuitry 2216 may select the second view portion 2222 B based on the second view portion 2222 B representing perspective views that facilitate a left-oriented viewing experience, such as perspective views 1 , 2 , and 4 of 3D8 viewing content.
- the first view portion 2222 A represents a single perspective view, such as perspective view 3
- the 3D viewing content 2234 may be presented as 3D4 viewing content that represents perspective views 1 , 2 , 3 , and 4 .
- third circuitry 2216 may select the second view portion 2222 B based on the second view portion 2222 B representing perspective views that facilitate a center-oriented viewing experience, such as perspective views 4 , 6 , 8 , 10 , 12 , and 14 of 3D16 viewing content.
- the first view portion 2222 A represents two perspective views, such as perspective views 5 and 9
- the 3D viewing content 2234 may be presented as 3D8 viewing content that represents perspective views 4 , 5 , 6 , 8 , 9 , 10 , 12 , and 14 .
- third circuitry 2216 may select the second view portion 2222 based on the second view portion 2222 representing perspective views that facilitate a right-oriented viewing experience, such as perspective views 9 , 11 , 13 , and 15 of 3D16 viewing content.
- the first view portion 2222 A represents four perspective views (e.g., perspective views 8 , 10 , 12 , and 14 )
- the 3D viewing content 2234 may be presented as 3D8 viewing content that represents perspective views 8 , 9 , 10 , 11 , 12 , 13 , 14 , and 15 .
- the examples provided herein are merely teaching examples and are not intended to be limiting.
- FIGS. 23-29 depicts flowcharts 2300 , 2400 , 2500 , 2600 , 2700 , 2800 , and 2900 of exemplary methods for supporting presentation of three-dimensional viewing content based on portions thereof that are received from respective sources in accordance with embodiments.
- Flowcharts 2300 , 2400 , 2500 , 2600 , 2700 , 2800 , and 2900 may be performed by system 2100 shown in FIG. 21 or system 2200 shown in FIG. 22 , for example.
- flowcharts 2300 , 2400 , 2500 , 2600 , 2700 , 2800 , and 2900 are not limited to those embodiments. Further structural and operational embodiments will be apparent to persons skilled in the relevant art(s) based on the discussion regarding flowcharts 2300 , 2400 , 2500 , 2600 , 2700 , 2800 , and 2900 .
- step 2302 a first data portion of three-dimensional viewing content is received via a first pathway.
- the first data portion originates from a first source.
- the first data portion is associated with a first perspective view.
- the first data portion may comprise a two-dimensional portion of the three-dimensional viewing content, though the scope of the embodiments is not limited in this respect.
- first circuitry 2112 or 2212 receives first view portion 2122 A or 2222 A of 3D viewing content 2134 or 2234 via first pathway 2120 A or 2220 A.
- First view portion 2122 A or 2222 A originates from first source 2102 A or 2202 A.
- a second data portion of the three-dimensional viewing content is received via a second pathway.
- the second data portion originates from a second source.
- the second data portion is associated with a second perspective view.
- first circuitry 2112 or 2212 receives second view portion 2122 B or 2222 B of 3D viewing content 2134 or 2234 via second pathway 2120 B or 2220 B.
- Second view portion 2122 B or 2222 B originates from second source 2102 B or 2202 B.
- a visual presentation of the three-dimensional viewing content is caused based on both the first data portion and the second data portion.
- second circuitry 2114 or 2214 causes a visual presentation of 3D viewing content 2134 or 2234 based on both the first view portion 2122 A or 2222 A and the second view portion 2122 B or 2222 B.
- flowchart 2400 begins at step 2402 .
- a search for a second data portion of the three-dimensional viewing content is initiated in response to a search instruction.
- third circuitry 2216 initiates a search for second view portion 2222 B in response to search instruction 2238 .
- the second data portion is received via a second pathway in response to initiating the search.
- the second data portion originates from a second source.
- the second data portion is associated with a second perspective view.
- flowchart 2500 begins at step 2502 .
- step 2502 an offer relating to a second data portion of the three-dimensional viewing content is received.
- first circuitry 2112 receives offer 2126 relating to second view portion 2122 B.
- acceptance of the offer is carried out. For instance, carrying out the acceptance of the offer may trigger a billing event regarding the second data portion.
- third circuitry 2116 carries out acceptance of offer 2126 .
- Third circuitry 2116 may provide acceptance 2128 to accept offer 2126 .
- the second data portion is received via a second pathway.
- the second data portion originates from a second source.
- the second data portion is associated with a second perspective view.
- first circuitry 2112 receives second view portion 2122 B via second pathway 2120 B.
- flowchart 2600 begins at step 2602 .
- an indication relating to the first data portion is delivered.
- fourth circuitry 2118 delivers indication 2130 relating to first view portion 2122 A.
- an offer relating to a second data portion of the three-dimensional viewing content is received.
- the offer is based at least in part on the indication.
- first circuitry 2112 receives offer 2126 relating to second view portion 2122 B.
- Flowchart 2300 of FIG. 3 may further include the step shown in flowchart 2700 of FIG. 27 or the step shown in flowchart 2800 of FIG. 28 .
- flowchart 2700 includes step 2702 .
- the second data portion is selected based on an orientation of a viewer with respect to a screen assembly that supports the visual presentation of the three-dimensional viewing content.
- third circuitry 2216 selects second view portion 2222 B based on an orientation of a viewer with respect to screen 2206 , which supports visual presentation of 3D viewing content 2234 .
- flowchart 2800 includes step 2802 .
- the second data portion is selected based on viewer input.
- third circuitry 2216 selects second view portion 2222 B based on control signal 2236 , which is generated in response to viewer input.
- FIG. 29 depicts an exemplary implementation of the method of flowchart 2300 in accordance with an embodiment.
- flowchart 2900 begins at step 2902 .
- a first data portion of three-dimensional viewing content that comprises a two-dimensional portion is received via a first pathway.
- the first data portion is associated with a single first perspective view.
- the first data portion originates from a storage that is local to a device that causes a visual presentation of the three-dimensional viewing content.
- first circuitry 2112 or 2212 receives first view portion 2122 A or 2222 A via a first pathway 2120 A or 2220 A.
- first view portion 2122 A or 2222 A comprises a two-dimensional portion and is associated with a single first perspective view. Further in accordance with this implementation, first view portion 2122 A or 2222 A originates from first source 2102 A or 2202 A, which may be local to a device that includes media circuitry 2104 or 2204 , for example.
- a second data portion of the three-dimensional viewing content is received via a second pathway.
- the second data portion is associated with at least one second perspective view.
- the second data portion originates from a second source.
- first circuitry 2112 or 2212 receives second view portion 2122 B or 2222 B via a second pathway 2120 B or 2220 B.
- second view portion 2122 B or 2222 B is associated with at least one second perspective view.
- second view portion 2122 B or 2222 B originates from second source 2102 B or 2202 B.
- second source 2102 B or 2202 B may be local or remote to the device that includes media circuitry 2104 or 2204 .
- the visual presentation of the three-dimensional viewing content is caused based on both the first data portion and the second data portion.
- the three-dimensional viewing content represents at least two perspective views.
- second circuitry 2114 or 2214 causes a visual presentation of 3D viewing content 2134 or 2234 based on both the first view portion 2122 A or 2222 A and the second view portion 2122 B or 2222 B.
- 3D viewing content 2134 or 2234 represents at least two perspective views.
- FIG. 30 is a block diagram of an exemplary system 3000 that directs configurations of respective regions of a screen assembly to support display of respective instances of content in accordance with an embodiment.
- system 3000 includes first source 3002 A, second source 3002 B, media system 3004 , and screen 3006 .
- First source 3002 A provides a first content instance 3022 A via a first pathway 3020 A.
- Second source 3002 B provides a second content instance 3022 B via a second pathway 3020 B.
- Each of the first and second content instances 3022 A and 3022 B may represent any suitable number of perspective views.
- a number of perspective views represented by the first content instance 3022 A and a number of perspective views represented by the second content instance 3022 B may be the same or different.
- First source 3002 A and/or second source 3002 B may include multiple sources.
- portions of the first content instance 3022 A may be provided by respective sources that are included in first source 3002 A.
- Each portion of the first content instance 3022 A may represent a respective subset of the perspective views that are represented by the first content instance 3022 A.
- portions of the second content instance 3022 B may be provided by respective sources that are included in second source 3002 B.
- Each portion of the second content instance 3022 B may represent a respective subset of the perspective views that are represented by the second content instance 3022 B.
- Media circuitry 3004 includes first circuitry 3012 and second circuitry 3014 .
- First circuitry 3012 receives the first and second content instances 3022 A and 3022 B. For example, if the first and second content instances 3022 A and 3022 B are encoded, first circuitry 3012 may decode the first and second content instances 3022 A and 3022 B for further processing by second circuitry 3014 .
- Second circuitry 3014 generates first drive signal(s) 3024 A to direct a first configuration of a first region 3044 A of screen 3006 .
- the first configuration supports display of the first content instance 3022 A.
- Second circuitry 3014 further generates second drive signal(s) 3024 B to direct a second configuration of a second region 3044 B of screen 3006 .
- the second configuration supports display of the second content instance 3022 B.
- the second configuration is different from the first configuration.
- second circuitry 3014 may include pixel array driver circuitry (e.g., pixel array driver circuitry 112 , 1116 , 1912 , or 2016 ) for generating pixel array drive signals (e.g., drive signals 152 , 1156 , or 1952 ).
- second circuitry 3014 may include light manipulator driver circuitry (e.g., adaptable parallax barrier driver circuitry 114 or 1114 , or light manipulator driver circuitry 1914 or 2014 ) for generating light manipulator drive signals (e.g., drive signals 154 , 1154 , 1954 , and/or 1956 ).
- second circuitry 3014 may include light generator driver circuitry (e.g., light generator driver circuitry 1112 or 2012 ) for generating light generator drive signals (e.g., drive signals 1152 ). Any of the aforementioned drive signals may be included among the first and second drive signal(s) 3024 A and 3024 B.
- light generator driver circuitry e.g., light generator driver circuitry 1112 or 2012
- drive signals 1152 Any of the aforementioned drive signals may be included among the first and second drive signal(s) 3024 A and 3024 B.
- Screen 3006 includes first region 3044 A and second region 3044 B.
- the first and second regions 3044 A and 3044 B may include respective portions of a pixel array (e.g., pixel array 122 , 1126 , 1922 , or 2028 ), respective portions of one or more light manipulators (e.g., adaptable parallax barrier(s) 124 and/or 1124 , and/or light manipulator(s) 1924 , 1926 , 2024 and/or 2026 ), and/or respective portions of a light generator (e.g., light generator 1122 or 2022 ).
- a pixel array e.g., pixel array 122 , 1126 , 1922 , or 2028
- light manipulators e.g., adaptable parallax barrier(s) 124 and/or 1124 , and/or light manipulator(s) 1924 , 1926 , 2024 and/or 2026
- a light generator e.g., light generator 1122 or 20
- the first drive signal(s) 3024 A may be configured to control configurations of the portions of the pixel array, light manipulator(s), and/or light generator that are included in first region 3044 A.
- the second drive signal(s) 3024 B may be configured to control configurations of the portions of the pixel array, light manipulator(s), and/or light generator that are included in second region 3044 B.
- FIG. 31 depicts a flowchart 3100 of a method for directing configurations of respective regions of a screen assembly for supporting display of respective instances of content in accordance with embodiments.
- flowchart 3100 begins at step 3102 .
- first viewing content that originates from a first source is received via a first pathway.
- first circuitry 3012 receives first content instance 3022 A via first pathway 3020 A.
- the first content instance 3022 A originates from first source 3002 A.
- second viewing content that originates from a second source is received via a second pathway.
- first circuitry 3012 receives second content instance 3022 B via second pathway 3020 B.
- the second content instance 3022 B originates from second source 3002 B.
- the first pathway comprises a local pathway
- the second pathway comprises a remote pathway.
- a local pathway is a pathway from a local source.
- a remote pathway is a pathway from a remote source. Examples of a remote source include but are not limited to a broadcast media server or an on-demand media server. Examples of a local source include but are not limited to a disc player (e.g., a DVD player, a CD player, or Blu-Ray disc player), a personal computer (e.g., a desktop computer, a laptop computer, or a tablet computer), a personal media player, or a smart phone.
- a disc player e.g., a DVD player, a CD player, or Blu-Ray disc player
- a personal computer e.g., a desktop computer, a laptop computer, or a tablet computer
- a personal media player e.g., a smart phone.
- the first viewing content is two-dimensional content
- the second viewing content is three-dimensional content.
- the first viewing content represents a single perspective view.
- the second viewing content represents multiple views, any two of which may be combined for perception as three-dimensional image(s).
- the first viewing content is first three-dimensional content
- the second viewing content is second three-dimensional content.
- the first three-dimensional content may represent a first number of perspectives
- the second three-dimensional content may represent a second number of perspectives.
- the first number may be different from or the same as the first number.
- the second viewing content may be related to the first viewing content or unrelated to the first viewing content. If the first viewing content and the second viewing content correspond to a common video event, the first viewing content and the second viewing content are said to be related. Otherwise, the first viewing content and the second viewing content are said to be unrelated.
- a first configuration of a first region of a screen assembly is directed.
- the first configuration supports display of the first viewing content.
- second circuitry 3014 directs a first configuration of first region 3044 A of screen 3006 .
- the first configuration of first region 3044 A supports display of first content instance 3022 A.
- a second configuration of a second region of the screen assembly is directed.
- the second configuration supports display of the second viewing content.
- the second configuration is different from the first configuration.
- second circuitry 3014 directs a second configuration of second region 3044 B of screen 3006 that is different from the first configuration of first region 3044 A.
- the second configuration of second region 3044 B supports display of second content instance 3022 B.
- FIG. 32 is a block diagram of an example practical implementation of a display system 3200 in accordance with an embodiment.
- display system 3200 generally comprises control circuitry 3202 , driver circuitry 3204 and a screen 3206 .
- control circuitry 3202 includes a processing unit 3214 , which may comprise one or more general-purpose or special-purpose processors or one or more processing cores.
- Processing unit 3214 is connected to a communication infrastructure 3212 , such as a communication bus.
- Control circuitry 3202 may also include a primary or main memory (not shown in FIG. 32 ), such as random access memory (RAM), that is connected to communication infrastructure 3212 .
- the main memory may have control logic stored thereon for execution by processing unit 3214 as well as data stored thereon that may be input to or output by processing unit 3214 during execution of such control logic.
- Control circuitry 3202 may also include one or more secondary storage devices (not shown in FIG. 32 ) that are connected to communication infrastructure 3212 , including but not limited to a hard disk drive, a removable storage drive (such as an optical disk drive, a floppy disk drive, a magnetic tape drive, or the like), or an interface for communicating with a removable storage unit such as an interface for communicating with a memory card, memory stick or the like.
- secondary storage devices provide an additional means for storing control logic for execution by processing unit 3214 as well as data that may be input to or output by processing unit 3214 during execution of such control logic.
- Control circuitry 3202 further includes a user input interface 3218 , a viewer tracking unit 3216 , and a media interface 3220 .
- User input interface 3218 is intended to generally represent any type of interface that may be used to receive user input, including but not limited to a remote control device, a traditional computer input device such as a keyboard or mouse, a touch screen, a gamepad or other type of gaming console input device, or one or more sensors including but not limited to video cameras, microphones and motion sensors.
- Viewer tracking unit 3216 is intended to generally represent any type of functionality for determining or estimating a location of one or more viewers of display system 3200 and/or a head orientation of one or more viewers of display system 3200 .
- Viewer tracking unit may perform such functions using different types of sensors (e.g., cameras, motion sensors, microphones or the like) or by using tracking systems such as those that wirelessly track an object (e.g., headset, remote control, or the like) currently being held or worn by a viewer.
- sensors e.g., cameras, motion sensors, microphones or the like
- tracking systems such as those that wirelessly track an object (e.g., headset, remote control, or the like) currently being held or worn by a viewer.
- Media interface 3220 is intended to represent any type of interface that is capable of receiving media content such as video content or image content.
- media interface 3220 may comprise an interface for receiving media content from a remote source such as a broadcast media server, an on-demand media server, or the like.
- media interface 3220 may comprise, for example and without limitation, a wired or wireless internet or intranet connection, a satellite interface, a fiber interface, a coaxial cable interface, or a fiber-coaxial cable interface.
- Media interface 3220 may also comprise an interface for receiving media content from a local source such as a DVD or Blu-Ray disc player, a personal computer, a personal media player, smart phone, or the like.
- Media interface 3220 may be capable of retrieving video content from multiple sources.
- Control circuitry 3202 further includes a communication interface 3222 .
- Communication interface 3222 enables control circuitry 3202 to send control signals via a communication medium 3252 to another communication interface 3230 within driver circuitry 3204 , thereby enabling control circuitry 3202 to control the operation of driver circuitry 3204 .
- Communication medium 3252 may comprise any kind of wired or wireless communication medium suitable for transmitting such control signals.
- driver circuitry 3204 includes the aforementioned communication interface 3230 as well as pixel array driver circuitry 3232 and adaptable light manipulator driver circuitry 3234 .
- Driver circuitry also optionally includes light generator driver circuitry 3236 .
- Each of these driver circuitry elements is configured to receive control signals from control circuitry 3202 (via the link between communication interface 3222 and communication interface 3230 ) and, responsive thereto, to send selected drive signals to a corresponding hardware element within screen 3206 , the drive signals causing the corresponding hardware element to operate in a particular manner.
- pixel array driver circuitry 3232 is configured to send selected drive signals to a pixel array 3242 within screen 3206
- adaptable light manipulator driver circuitry 3234 is configured to send selected drive signals to an adaptable light manipulator 3244 within screen elements 3206
- optional light generator driver circuitry 3236 is configured to send selected drive signals to an optional light generator 3246 within screen 3206 .
- processing unit 3214 operates pursuant to control logic to receive video content via media interface 3220 and to generate control signals necessary to cause driver circuitry 3204 to render such video content to screen 3206 in accordance with a selected viewing configuration.
- the control logic that is executed by processing unit 3214 may be retrieved, for example, from a primary memory or a secondary storage device connected to processing unit 3214 via communication infrastructure 3212 as discussed above.
- the control logic may also be retrieved from some other local or remote source. Where the control logic is stored on a computer readable medium, that computer readable medium may be referred to herein as a computer program product.
- driver circuitry 3204 may be controlled in a manner previously described to send coordinated drive signals necessary for simultaneously displaying two-dimensional images, three-dimensional images and multi-view three-dimensional content via different display regions of the screen.
- pixel array 3242 , adaptable light manipulator 3244 (e.g., an adaptable parallax barrier), and light generator 3246 may be manipulated in a coordinated fashion to perform this function was described previously herein. Note that in accordance with certain implementations (e.g., implementations in which pixel array comprises an OLED/PLED pixel array), screen 3206 need not include light generator 3246 .
- At least part of the function of generating control signals necessary to cause pixel array 3242 , adaptable light manipulator 3244 and light generator 3246 to render video content to screen 3206 in accordance with a selected viewing configuration is performed by drive signal processing circuitry 3238 which is integrated within driver circuitry 3204 .
- Such circuitry may operate, for example, in conjunction with and/or under the control of processing unit 3214 to generate the necessary control signals.
- control circuitry 3202 , driver circuitry 3204 and screen elements 3206 are all included within a single housing. For example and without limitation, all these elements may exist within a television, a laptop computer, a tablet computer, or a telephone.
- the link 3252 formed between communication interfaces 3222 and 3230 may be replaced by a direct connection between driver circuitry 3204 and communication infrastructure 3212 .
- control circuitry 3202 is disposed within a first housing, such as set top box or personal computer, and driver circuitry 3204 and screen 3206 are disposed within a second housing, such as a television or computer monitor.
- the set top box may be any type of set top box including but not limited to fiber, Internet, cable, satellite, or terrestrial digital.
Abstract
Description
- This application claims the benefit of U.S. Provisional Application No. 61/291,818, filed on Dec. 31, 2009, which is incorporated by reference herein in its entirety.
- This application also claims the benefit of U.S. Provisional Application No. 61/303,119, filed on Feb. 10, 2010, which is incorporated by reference herein in its entirety.
- This application is also related to the following U.S. patent applications, each of which also claims the benefit of U.S. Provisional Patent Application Nos. 61/291,818 and 61/303,119 and each of which is incorporated by reference herein:
-
- U.S. patent application Ser. No. 12/774,225, filed on May 5, 2010, and entitled “Controlling a Pixel Array to Support an Adaptable Light Manipulator”;
- U.S. patent application Ser. No. 12/774,307, filed on May 5, 2010, and entitled “Display with Elastic Light Manipulator”;
- U.S. patent application Ser. No. 12/845,409, filed on Jul. 28, 2010, and entitled “Display With Adaptable Parallax Barrier”;
- U.S. patent application Ser. No. 12/845,440, filed on Jul. 28, 2010, and entitled “Adaptable Parallax Barrier Supporting Mixed 2D and Stereoscopic 3D Display Regions”;
- U.S. patent application Ser. No. 12/845,461, filed on Jul. 28, 2010, and entitled “Display Supporting Multiple Simultaneous 3D Views”;
- U.S. patent application Ser. No. ______ (Attorney Docket No. A05.01210000), filed on even date herewith and entitled “Backlighting Array Supporting Adaptable Parallax Barrier”;
- U.S. patent application Ser. No. ______ (Attorney Docket No. A05.01240000), filed on even date herewith and entitled “Coordinated Driving of Adaptable Light Manipulator, Backlighting and Pixel Array in Support of Adaptable 2D and 3D Displays”; and
- U.S. patent application Ser. No. ______ (Attorney Docket No. A05.01330000), filed on even date herewith and entitled “Video Compression Supporting Selective Delivery of 2D, Stereoscopic 3D and Multi-View 3D Content”.
- 1. Field of the Invention
- The present invention relates to techniques for supporting presentation of multi-path and multi-source viewing content.
- 2. Background Art
- Images may be generated for display in various forms. For instance, television (TV) is a widely used telecommunication medium for transmitting and displaying images in monochromatic (“black and white”) or color form. Conventionally, images are provided in analog form and are displayed by display devices in two dimensions. More recently, images are being provided in digital form for display in two dimensions on display devices having improved resolution (e.g., “high definition” or “HD”). Even more recently, images capable of being displayed in three dimensions are being generated.
- Conventional displays may use a variety of techniques to achieve three-dimensional (3D) image viewing functionality. For example, various types of glasses have been developed that may be worn by users to view three-dimensional images displayed by a conventional display. Examples of such glasses include glasses that utilize color filters or polarized filters. In each case, the lenses of the glasses pass two-dimensional (2D) images of differing perspective to the user's left and right eyes. The images are combined in the visual center of the brain of the user to be perceived as a three-dimensional image. In another example, synchronized left eye, right eye liquid crystal display (LCD) shutter glasses may be used with conventional two-dimensional image displays to create a three-dimensional viewing illusion. In still another example, LCD display glasses are being used to display three-dimensional images to a user. The lenses of the LCD display glasses include corresponding displays that provide images of differing perspective to the user's eyes, to be perceived by the user as three-dimensional.
- Problems exist with such techniques for viewing three-dimensional images. For instance, persons that use such displays and systems to view three-dimensional images may suffer from headaches, eyestrain, and/or nausea after long exposure. Furthermore, some content, such as two-dimensional text, may be more difficult to read and interpret when displayed three-dimensionally. To address these problems, some manufacturers have created display devices that may be toggled between three-dimensional viewing and two-dimensional viewing. A display device of this type may be switched to a three-dimensional mode for viewing of three-dimensional images, and may be switched to a two-dimensional mode for viewing of two-dimensional images (and/or to provide a respite from the viewing of three-dimensional images).
- A parallax barrier is another example of a device that enables images to be displayed in three-dimensions. A parallax barrier includes a layer of material with a series of precision slits. The parallax barrier is placed proximal to a display so that each of a user's eyes sees a different set of pixels to create a sense of depth through parallax. A disadvantage of parallax barriers is that the viewer must be positioned in a well-defined location in order to experience the three-dimensional effect. If the viewer moves his/her eyes away from this “sweet spot,” image flipping and/or exacerbation of the eyestrain, headaches and nausea that may be associated with prolonged three-dimensional image viewing may result. Conventional three-dimensional displays that utilize parallax barriers are also constrained in that the displays must be entirely in a two-dimensional image mode or a three-dimensional image mode at any time.
- Some conventional devices are capable of receiving portions of 2D content from different sources to be presented on a single screen. Other conventional devices are capable of receiving media guide text and program channels of media content wherein a remote control is used to produce guide text overlaying the media content on a single 2D screen. Similarly, a conventional browser may receive 2D graphic and textual content from many sources (e.g., different servers) and construct a single display within a single window. Yet other conventional devices are capable of receiving full 3D2 content from a single source. For example, such full 3D2 content may be downloaded from a server or retrieved from a removable or fixed storage. The single piece of 3D2 content can have a first portion that is destined for the left eye of a viewer and a second portion that is destined for the right eye of the viewer. These portions represent perspectives (a.k.a. camera views) of a common video event.
- Methods, systems, and apparatuses are described for supporting presentation of multi-path and multi-source viewing content as shown in and/or described herein in connection with at least one of the figures, as set forth more completely in the claims.
- The accompanying drawings, which are incorporated herein and form a part of the specification, illustrate the present invention and, together with the description, further serve to explain the principles of the invention and to enable a person skilled in the pertinent art to make and use the invention.
-
FIG. 1A is a block diagram of an exemplary system that supports presentation of portions of 3D content that are received from respective sources in accordance with an embodiment. -
FIG. 1B is a block diagram of an exemplary system that supports presentation of multiple instances of content from respective sources in accordance with an embodiment. -
FIG. 1C is a block diagram of an exemplary display system in accordance with an embodiment that utilizes an adaptable parallax barrier to support multiple viewing configurations. -
FIG. 2 illustrates an exemplary arrangement of an adaptable parallax barrier in accordance with an embodiment that supports a particular three-dimensional viewing configuration. -
FIG. 3 illustrates an exemplary arrangement of an adaptable parallax barrier in accordance with an alternate embodiment that supports a particular three-dimensional viewing configuration. -
FIG. 4 illustrates an exemplary arrangement of an adaptable parallax barrier in accordance with an embodiment that supports a viewing configuration that mixes two-dimensional and three-dimensional viewing regions. -
FIG. 5 illustrates an exemplary arrangement of an adaptable parallax barrier in accordance with an embodiment in which different orientations of transparent and opaque slits are used to simultaneously support different viewer orientations. -
FIG. 6 depicts a flowchart of an exemplary method for controlling a pixel array to support a same viewing configuration as an adaptable light manipulator in accordance with an embodiment. -
FIG. 7 depicts a flowchart of an alternate exemplary method for controlling a pixel array to support a same viewing configuration as an adaptable light manipulator in accordance with an embodiment. -
FIG. 8 illustrates a portion of a pixel array to which image pixels have been mapped to support a two-dimensional viewing configuration of an adaptable light manipulator in accordance with an embodiment. -
FIG. 9 illustrates how image pixels are mapped to the portion of the pixel array shown inFIG. 8 to support a first three-dimensional viewing configuration of an adaptable light manipulator in accordance with an embodiment. -
FIG. 10 illustrates how image pixels are mapped to the portion of the pixel array shown inFIGS. 8 and 9 to support a second three-dimensional viewing configuration of an adaptable light manipulator in accordance with an embodiment. -
FIG. 11 is a block diagram of an exemplary display system that utilizes an adaptable parallax barrier and a light generator to support multiple viewing configurations in accordance with an embodiment. -
FIG. 12 provides an exploded view of an exemplary display system that utilizes a controllable backlight array to provide regional luminosity control in accordance with an embodiment. -
FIG. 13 is a block diagram of an exemplary display system that includes a pixel array disposed between a light generator and an adaptable parallax barrier in accordance with an embodiment. -
FIG. 14 provides an exploded view of an exemplary display system that implements a regional brightness control scheme based on pixel intensity in accordance with an embodiment. -
FIG. 15 illustrates a front perspective view of an exemplary display panel of a display system in accordance with an embodiment. -
FIG. 16 illustrates two exemplary configurations of an adaptable light manipulator that includes a parallax barrier and a brightness regulation overlay in accordance with an embodiment. -
FIG. 17 shows a perspective view of an exemplary adaptable lenticular lens that may be used in a displays system in accordance with an embodiment. -
FIG. 18 shows a side view of the adaptable lenticular lens ofFIG. 17 in accordance with an embodiment. -
FIG. 19 is a block diagram of an exemplary display system that includes multiple light manipulator layers in accordance with an embodiment. -
FIG. 20 is a block diagram of an exemplary display system that includes multiple light manipulator layers in accordance with an alternate embodiment. -
FIGS. 21 and 22 are block diagrams of exemplary systems that support presentation of three-dimensional viewing content based on portions thereof that are received from respective sources in accordance with embodiments. -
FIGS. 23-29 depict flowcharts of methods for supporting presentation of three-dimensional viewing content based on portions thereof that are received from respective sources in accordance with embodiments. -
FIG. 30 is a block diagram of an exemplary system that directs configurations of respective regions of a screen assembly to support display of respective instances of content in accordance with an embodiment. -
FIG. 31 depicts a flowchart of a method for directing configurations of respective regions of a screen assembly for supporting display of respective instances of content in accordance with embodiments. -
FIG. 32 is a block diagram of an exemplary practical implementation of an adaptable two-dimensional/three-dimensional display system in accordance with an embodiment. - The present invention will now be described with reference to the accompanying drawings. In the drawings, like reference numbers indicate identical or functionally similar elements. Additionally, the left-most digit(s) of a reference number identifies the drawing in which the reference number first appears.
- The present specification discloses one or more embodiments that incorporate the features of the invention. The disclosed embodiment(s) merely exemplify the invention. The scope of the invention is not limited to the disclosed embodiment(s). The invention is defined by the claims appended hereto.
- References in the specification to “one embodiment,” “an embodiment,” “an example embodiment,” etc., indicate that the embodiment described may include a particular feature, structure, or characteristic, but every embodiment may not necessarily include the particular feature, structure, or characteristic. Moreover, such phrases are not necessarily referring to the same embodiment. Further, when a particular feature, structure, or characteristic is described in connection with an embodiment, it is submitted that it is within the knowledge of one skilled in the art to effect such feature, structure, or characteristic in connection with other embodiments whether or not explicitly described.
- Furthermore, it should be understood that spatial descriptions (e.g., “above,” “below,” “up,” “left,” “right,” “down,” “top,” “bottom,” “vertical,” “horizontal,” etc.) used herein are for purposes of illustration only, and that practical implementations of the structures described herein can be spatially arranged in any orientation or manner.
- Embodiments described herein provide systems and methods for supporting presentation of multi-path and multi-source viewing content. For instance, the viewing content may include multiple portions that originate from respective sources and that are received via respective paths. Each of the portions may include two-dimensional (2D) content or three-dimensional (3D) content. Two-dimensional (2D) content is content that is configured to be perceived as one or more two-dimensional images. For instance, the two-dimensional content may represent a single perspective of a video event. Three-dimensional (3D) content is content that is configured to be perceived as one or more three-dimensional images. For example, the three-dimensional content may represent multiple perspectives of a video event.
- The viewing content may be displayed to a user among any number (e.g., 1, 2, 3, etc.) of regions of a screen, such as a fixed 2D screen, a fixed 3D screen, or an adaptable 3D screen. With respect to an adaptable 3D screen, the viewing content may be displayed among the regions by driving an adaptable light manipulator and/or a pixel array in a coordinated fashion. Some exemplary techniques for driving an adaptable light manipulator and/or a pixel array in a coordinated fashion are described in commonly-owned co-pending U.S. patent application Ser. No. ______, filed on even date herewith and entitled “Coordinated Driving of Adaptable Light Manipulator, Backlighting and Pixel Array in Support of Adaptable 2D and 3D Displays,” the entirety of which is incorporated by reference herein.
- The adaptable light manipulator may comprise, for example, an adaptable lenticular lens such as that described in commonly-owned, co-pending U.S. patent application Ser. No. 12/774,307, filed on May 5, 2010, and entitled “Display with Elastic Light Manipulator,” the entirety of which is incorporated by reference herein, or an adaptable parallax barrier such as that described in commonly-owned co-pending U.S. patent application Ser. No. 12/845,440, filed on Jul. 28, 2010, and entitled “Adaptable Parallax Barrier Supporting Mixed 2D and
Stereoscopic 3D Display Regions,” the entirety of which is incorporated by reference herein. As described in those applications, the adaptable light manipulator can be dynamically modified in order to accommodate, for example, a changing viewer sweet spot or switching between two-dimensional images and three-dimensional images. As further described in commonly-owned, co-pending U.S. patent application Ser. No. 12/774,225, filed on May 5, 2010 and entitled “Controlling a Pixel Array to Support an Adaptable Light Manipulator,” the entirety of which is incorporated by reference herein, the manner in which images are rendered to pixels of a pixel array used in conjunction with such an adaptable light manipulator may be coordinated with the state of the adaptable light manipulator to support a variety of viewing configurations. - Moreover, an adaptable light manipulator, a pixel array and a non-uniform light generator may be driven in a coordinated fashion. As described in the aforementioned, incorporated U.S. patent application Ser. No. 12/845,440, in a case of where the adaptable light manipulator is an adaptable parallax barrier, simultaneous presentation of two-dimensional and three-dimensional content (and/or various instances of three-dimensional content representing differing numbers of perspectives) via different regions of the same display is also enabled. This feature may be supported by a non-uniform light generator (such as a backlighting array) as described in commonly-owned, co-pending U.S. patent application Ser. No. ______, filed on even date herewith and entitled “Backlighting Array Supporting Adaptable Parallax Barrier”, the entirety of which is incorporated by reference herein.
-
FIG. 1A is a block diagram of anexemplary system 140 that supports presentation of portions of 3D content that are received from respective sources in accordance with an embodiment. As shown inFIG. 1A ,system 140 includes amedia node 160,external sources 194A-194N, and external device(s) 196. Each of the external device(s) 196 includes a fixed2D screen 167, a fixed3D screen 169, or an adaptable light manipulating 2D/3Dx screen 171. Each fixed2D screen 167 has a fixed two-dimensional configuration. A two-dimensional configuration is used to display a 2D representation of video content. Each fixed3D screen 169 has a fixed three-dimensional configuration. A three-dimensional configuration is used to display a 3D representation of video content. A three-dimensional configuration may support presentation of any two or more viewpoints (a.k.a. perspectives), two of which may be combined to provide a three-dimensional viewing experience. For instance, a three-dimensional configuration that includes x viewpoints is said to be a 3Dx configuration, where x is a positive integer greater than or equal to two. - Each fixed
2D screen 167, fixed3D screen 169, and adaptable light manipulating 2D/3Dx screen 171 is capable of supporting presentation of3D portions 161A-161N of 3D content in respective regions of a screen surface. Regions of eachscreen respective 3D portions 161A-161N in the respective regions of the screen surface. The configurations of the various regions of an adaptable light manipulating 2D/3Dx screen 171 may be different or the same. Some examples of an adaptable light manipulating 2D/3Dx screen are described in detail below with reference to FIGS. 1C and 2-20. -
External sources 194A-194N are configured to provide therespective 3D portions 161A-161N of the 3D content tomedia node 160.External sources 194A-194N are also configured to providerespective offer contents 163A-163N tomedia node 160. Each of theoffer contents 163A-163N includes an offer that relates to at least one 3D portion of the 3D content. For example, firstexternal source 194A may provide afirst 3D portion 161A tomedia node 160. Firstexternal source 194A may also providefirst offer content 163A tomedia node 160 that relates to anNth 3D portionexternal source 194A is accepted by a user, Nthexternal source 194N may provide theNth 3D portionmedia node 160. Nthexternal source 194N may also provideNth offer content 163N tomedia node 160 that relates to another 3D portion that may be provided by another of theexternal sources 194A-194N, and so on. - In another example, first
external source 194A may provide thefirst 3D portion 161A tomedia node 160. Upon determining that thefirst 3D portion 161A is provided tomedia node 160, Nthexternal source 194N may provideNth offer content 163N tomedia node 160 that relates to theNth 3D portionexternal source 194N is accepted by the user, Nthexternal source 194N may provide theNth 3D portionmedia node 160. Upon determining that theNth 3D portionmedia node 160, another of theexternal sources 194A-194N may provide its offer content tomedia node 160 that relates to a respective 3D portion of the 3D content, and so on. -
External sources 194A-194N includecircuitry 165A-165N for managing accounts, billing, licenses, and transactions pertaining to the3D portions 161A-161N. For example, if firstexternal source 194A providesfirst 3D portion 161A tomedia node 160,circuitry 165A may indicate that thefirst 3D portion 161A has been provided tomedia node 160 in an account of the user ofmedia node 160.Circuitry 165A may perform operations to bill the user for provision of thefirst 3D portion 161A, verify that the user is within a group that is authorized (e.g., licensed) to receive the first 3D portion, etc. -
Media node 160 includesprocessing circuitry 162,storage 176, ascreen assembly 178, media source interface(s)circuitry 180, and screen interface(s)circuitry 192. Media source interface(s)circuitry 180 receives the3D portions 161A-161N of the 3D content from the respectiveexternal sources 194A-194N for processing by processingcircuitry 162.Storage 176 queues the3D portions 161A-161N as needed so that theportions 161A-161N may be synchronized for presentation.Storage 176 may include one or more internal sources that provide respective portions of the 3D content. For instance, an internal source may include fixed or removable media storage from which one or more of the3D portions 161A-161N may be retrieved.Screen assembly 178 is configured to present the 3D content (e.g., simultaneously present the3D portions 161A-161N) once the3D portions 161A-161N are synchronized.Screen assembly 178 may be a fixed 2D screen assembly, a fixed 3D screen assembly, or an adaptable light manipulating 2D/3Dx screen assembly. -
Processing circuitry 162 includescircuitry adjustments circuitry 182.Circuitry 164 selects thefirst 3D portion 161A of the 3D content from firstexternal source 194A.Circuitry 166 interacts with a second source (e.g., second external source 194B) to locate a second portion and offer based on thefirst 3D portion 161A.Circuitry 168 supports billing and account management regarding thevarious 3D portions 161A-161N. For instance,circuitry 168 may communicate with any one or more ofexternal sources 194A-194N to facilitate proper billing and account updates regarding therespective 3D portions 161A-161N. -
Circuitry 170 supports operations pertaining to acceptance or rejection of each offer that is received bymedia node 160. For instance,circuitry 170 may informexternal sources 194A-194N whether offers that are received therefrom are accepted or rejected.Circuitry 172 initiates delivery of the second 3D portion from the second source in response to location of the second 3D portion bycircuitry 166.Circuitry 174 manages delivery of the3D portions 161A-161N. For instance,circuitry 174 may communicate withcircuitry 172 to authorize initiation of delivery of the second portion bycircuitry 172.Circuitry 174 also supports queuing of the3D portions 161A-161N. For example,circuitry 174 may determine an amount ofstorage 176 to be allocated for queuing of the3D portions 161A-161N. In accordance with this example,circuitry 174 may monitor an amount ofstorage 176 that is utilized to determine the amount ofstorage 176 to be allocated. - 3D portion(s)
adjustments circuitry 182 performs operations on the3D portions 161A-161N to facilitate presentation of the 3D content. 3D portion(s)adjustments circuitry 182 includescircuitry Circuitry 184 is configured to decode and/or decrypt the3D portions 161A-161N that are received from respectiveexternal sources 194A-194N, so that processing may be performed on the3D portions 161A-161N. For instance, such processing may be performed bycircuitry Circuitry 184 is also configured to encrypt and/or encode the 3D content, including the3D portions 161A-161N, before the 3D content is delivered to external device(s) 196. -
Circuitry 186 synchronizes frames of the3D portions 161A-161N. For example,circuitry 186 may apply time offsets to one or more of theportions 161A-161N and/or adjust the frame rates of one or more of the3D portions 161A-161N in order to facilitate synchronization of the3D portions 161A-161N. In accordance with this example,circuitry 186 may increase the frames rates of one or more of the3D portions 161A-161N, decrease the frame rates of one or more of the3D portions 161A-161N, increase the frame rates of some of the3D portions 161A-161N while decreasing the frame rates of others of the3D portions 161A-161N, etc. -
Circuitry 188 is configured to integrate the3D portions 161A-161N into a single stream or file.Circuitry 190 is configured to resize the regions that are associated with therespective 3D portions 161A-161N based on any of a variety reasons, including but not limited to bandwidth limitations, user input, etc.Circuitry 190 may reduce the size of region(s) that are associated with one or more (e.g., all) of the3D portions 161A-161N, increase the size of region(s) that are associated with one or more (e.g., all) of the3D portions 161A-161N, or reduce the size of some regions which correspond to a first subset of the3D portions 161A-161N while increasing the size of other regions which correspond to a second subset of the3D portions 161A-161N.Circuitry 190 may reduce the resolution of one or more of the3D portions 161A-161N, increase the resolution of one or more of the3D portions 161A-161N, remove overlapping content from one or more of the3D portions 161A-161N, crop one or more of the3D portions 161A-161N (e.g., to fit a screen characteristic such as 3:4, 9:16, or windowing), etc. For instance,circuitry 190 may perform such operations based on resizing of the corresponding regions. - Screen interface(s)
circuitry 192 provides the 3D content, including the3D portions 161A-161N, to external device(s) 196 for presentation. Screen interface(s)circuitry 192 may provide the3D portions 161A-161N in any suitable number of streams. For instance, screen interface(s)circuitry 192 may provide the3D portions 161A-161N in respective streams or in a single combined stream to external device(s) 196. - For purposes of illustration, assume that a first portion comprising a desired video presentation is selected from an internal or external “first” source. This first portion may yield the presentation in 2D, for example, or 3D2. Either in response to a user's further search or “add” request (perhaps via a keypad or external remote control not shown, and at any time before or during the presentation of the first portion) or automatically based on the initial selection of the first portion,
processing circuitry 160 assists or carries out location of a second portion of content related to the first portion. The internal or external location of the second portion is at a different source than that of the first portion. - An automatically identified second portion could be (but doesn't have to be) offered for possible rejection by the viewer. If accepted or if settings do not require the viewer's confirmation, processing work may be performed. For example, the second source portion may or may not have many differing characteristics from that of the first portion.
Processing circuitry 160 may need to operate on at least one if not both of the portions to eliminate the differences.Processing circuitry 160 may synchronize, as well. For example, the first portion may be one-third of the way into the presentation, and the second portion may need an offset and synchronization. The output ofprocessing circuitry 160 may be two independent files or streams or one combined stream. Such output may need to feed one or more fixed 2D, fixed 3D, and adaptive light manipulating internal or external screen assemblies.Processing circuitry 160 needs to make all of these things happen when needed, or provide support therefor. Other functionality ofprocessing circuitry 160 can be appreciated with reference to the labels in theFIG. 1A , including payment processing, licensing, etc. -
FIG. 1B is a block diagram of anexemplary system 150 that supports presentation of multiple instances of content from respective sources in accordance with an embodiment. As shown inFIG. 1B ,system 150 includes amedia node 101,external sources 131A-131N, and external device(s) 133. Each of the external device(s) 133 includes at least one adaptable light manipulating 2D/3Dx assembly. Each of the adaptable light manipulating 2D/3Dx assemblies is configured to receive media streams/files outputs with integrated or separate screen configuration commands (a.k.a. control signals). The screen commands specify how the regions of each adaptable light manipulating 2D/3Dx assembly is to be configured to support the presentation of the multiple instances of content. Some embodiments that include such adaptable light manipulating 2D/3Dx assemblies are discussed below with reference to FIGS. 1C and 2-20. -
External sources 131A-131N are configured to providerespective contents 135A-135N tomedia node 101. Thecontents 135A-135N may be fully independent and unrelated, or fully or partially related.External sources 131A-131N are also configured to providerespective offer contents 137A-137N tomedia node 101. Each of theoffer contents 137A-137N includes an offer that relates to at least one of thecontents 135A-135N. For example, firstexternal source 131A may providefirst content 135A tomedia node 101. Firstexternal source 131A may also providefirst offer content 137A tomedia node 101 that relates to Nth content 135N. If the offer from firstexternal source 131A is accepted by a user, Nthexternal source 131N may provide the Nth content 135N tomedia node 101. Nthexternal source 131N may also provideNth offer content 137N tomedia node 101 that relates to other content that may be provided by another of theexternal sources 131A-131N, and so on. - In another example, first
external source 131A may provide thefirst content 135A tomedia node 101. Upon determining that thefirst content 135A is provided tomedia node 101, Nthexternal source 131N may provideNth offer content 137N tomedia node 101 that relates to the Nth content 135N. If the offer from Nthexternal source 131N is accepted by the user, Nthexternal source 131N may provide the Nth content 135N tomedia node 101. Upon determining that the Nth content 135N is provided tomedia node 101, another of theexternal sources 131A-131N may provide its offer content tomedia node 101 that relates to other content, and so on. -
External sources 131A-131N includecircuitry 139A-139N for managing accounts, billing, licenses, and transactions pertaining to thecontents 135A-135N. For example, if firstexternal source 131A providesfirst content 135A tomedia node 101,circuitry 139A may indicate that thefirst content 135A has been provided tomedia node 101 in an account of the user ofmedia node 101.Circuitry 139A may perform operations to bill the user for provision of thefirst content 135A, verify that the user is within a group that is authorized (e.g., licensed) to receive the first content, etc. -
Media node 101 includesprocessing circuitry 103,storage 115, at least one adaptable light manipulating 2D/3Dx screen assembly 117, media source interface(s)circuitry 119, and screen interface(s)circuitry 129. Media source interface(s)circuitry 119 receives thecontents 135A-135N from the respectiveexternal sources 131A-131N for processing by processingcircuitry 103.Storage 115 queues thecontents 135A-135N as needed so that thecontents 135A-135N may be synchronized for presentation.Storage 115 may include one or more internal sources, each of which is capable of providing respective content. For instance, an internal source may include fixed or removable media storage from which one or more of thecontents 135A-135N may be retrieved. The at least onescreen assembly 117 is configured to simultaneously present thecontents 135A-135N once thecontents 135A-135N are synchronized. -
Processing circuitry 103 includescircuitry content adjustments circuitry 121.Circuitry 105 provides software application (e.g., browser) based support for selection of thevarious contents 135A-135N. For instance,circuitry 105 may generate a graphical interface for enabling the viewer to select one or more of thecontents 135A-135N for presentation.Circuitry 107 supports billing and account management regarding thevarious contents 135A-135N. For instance,circuitry 107 may communicate with any one or more ofexternal sources 131A-131N to facilitate proper billing and account updates regarding therespective contents 135A-135N. -
Circuitry 109 provides viewer interface support for enabling the viewer to accept or reject each offer that is received bymedia node 101. For instance,circuitry 109 may informexternal sources 131A-131N whether offers that are received therefrom are accepted or rejected.Circuitry 111 manages delivery of thecontents 135A-135N. For instance,circuitry 111 may delay delivery of thevarious contents 135A-135N until thecontents 135A-135N are synchronized.Circuitry 111 also supports queuing of thecontents 135A-135N. For example,circuitry 111 may determine an amount ofstorage 115 to be allocated for queuing of thecontents 135A-135N. In accordance with this example,circuitry 111 may monitor an amount ofstorage 115 that is utilized to determine the amount ofstorage 115 to be allocated. -
Circuitry 113 supports full and regional (re)configuration of adaptable light manipulating 2D/3Dx screen assemblies. For instance,circuitry 113 may provide screen (re)configuration commands for configuring an entire adaptable light manipulating 2D/3Dx screen assembly or one or more regions thereof based on any of a factors, including but not limited to bandwidth limitations, user input, etc. In one example, such screen (re)configuration commands may be integrated into the one or more streams/files that are delivered toward the screen assembly. In another example, such screen (re)configuration commands may be sent externally from the aforementioned one or more streams/files via separate command signaling using the same communication pathway or a separate pathway that is independent from the pathway that is used for delivering the one or more streams/files. -
Content adjustments circuitry 121 performs operations on thecontents 135A-135N to facilitate presentation thereof.Content adjustments circuitry 121 includescircuitry Circuitry 123 is configured to decode and/or decrypt thecontents 135A-135N that are received from respectiveexternal sources 131A-131N, so that processing may be performed on thecontents 135A-135N. For instance, such processing may be performed bycircuitry 125 and/or 127, which are described below.Circuitry 123 is also configured to encrypt and/or encode thecontents 135A-135N before delivery thereof to external device(s) 196. -
Circuitry 125 supports outputting multiple streams or files or an integrated stream or file. For example,circuitry 125 may synchronize frames of thecontents 135A-135N by applying time offsets to one or more of thecontents 135A-135N and/or by adjusting the frame rates of one or more of thecontents 135A-135N. In accordance with this example,circuitry 125 may increase the frames rates of one or more of thecontents 135A-135N, decrease the frame rates of one or more of thecontents 135A-135N, increase the frame rates of some of thecontents 135A-135N while decreasing the frame rates of others of thecontents 135A-135N, etc. -
Circuitry 127 is configured to resize the regions that are associated with thecontents 135A-135N based on any of a variety reasons, including but not limited to bandwidth limitations, user input, etc.Circuitry 127 may reduce the size of region(s) that are associated with one or more of thecontents 135A-135N, increase the size of region(s) that are associated with one or more of thecontents 135A-135N, or reduce the size of some regions which correspond to a first subset of thecontents 135A-135N while increasing the size of other regions which correspond to a second subset of thecontents 135A-135N.Circuitry 190 may reduce the resolution of one or more of thecontents 135A-135N, increase the resolution of one or more of thecontents 135A-135N, remove overlapping content from one or more of thecontents 135A-135N, change (e.g., increase or decrease) a frame rate that is associated with one or more of thecontents 135A-135N, crop one or more of thecontents 135A-135N, etc. For instance,circuitry 127 may perform such operations based on resizing of the corresponding regions. - Screen interface(s)
circuitry 129 provides thevarious contents 135A-135N to external device(s) 133 for presentation. Screen interface(s)circuitry 129 may provide thecontents 135A-135N in any suitable number of streams. For instance, screen interface(s)circuitry 129 may provide thecontents 135A-135N in respective streams or in a single combined stream to external device(s) 133. Screen interface(s)circuitry 129 provides the screen configuration commands that specify how the regions of each adaptable light manipulating 2D/3Dx assembly of the external device(s) 133 is to be configured to support the presentation of the multiple instances of content. The screen configuration commands may be integrated among thecontents 135A-135N or separate from thecontents 135A-135N. - Although the circuitry and functionality illustrated with respect to
FIGS. 1A and 1B may fall within one device housing (as illustrated), it may also be distributed across or fully contained within many of such media nodes. As such, the one or more media nodes may operate independently or in concert to carry out the various aspects of the illustrated functionality. A media node can be any node in the entire end-to-end pathway, including even at one of the media sources (which might receive other content (e.g., the second content) from another media source), within the screen assembly device, within a network node, in any premises device supporting a screen device such as a set top box, a removable media (e.g., DVD, CD or Blu-Ray) player, gateway, access point, television, etc. - The remainder of this section describes some exemplary display systems that include display elements, such as an adaptable light manipulator, a non-uniform light generator, and a pixel array, to enable multiple two-dimensional (2D) and three-dimensional (3D) viewing configurations. A two-dimensional configuration is used to display a 2D representation of video content. A three-dimensional configuration is used to display a 3D representation of video content. A three-dimensional configuration may include any two or more viewpoints (a.k.a. perspectives), two of which may be combined to provide a three-dimensional viewing experience. For instance, a three-dimensional configuration that includes n viewpoints is said to be a 3Dn configuration, where n is a positive integer greater than or equal to two. The configurations that are used to display the different video contents or portions thereof may be different or the same. Moreover, different video contents may be fully unrelated or at least partially related. For example, first content may be at least partially related to second content if the second content is 2D or 3D content and the first content includes movie text (e.g., closed caption text) that relates to the 2D or 3D content.
- A. Example Display Systems Using Adaptable Parallax Barriers
-
FIG. 1C is a block diagram of anexemplary display system 100 that utilizes an adaptable parallax barrier to support multiple viewing configurations in accordance with an embodiment. As shown inFIG. 1C ,display system 100 includesdriver circuitry 102 and ascreen 104, whereinscreen 104 include apixel array 122 and anadaptable parallax barrier 124. As further shown inFIG. 1C ,driver circuitry 104 includes pixelarray driver circuitry 112 and adaptable parallaxbarrier driver circuitry 114. -
Pixel array 122 comprises a two-dimensional array of pixels (e.g., arranged as a grid or other distribution).Pixel array 122 is a self-illuminating or light-generating pixel array such that the pixels ofpixel array 122 each emit light included inlight 132. Each pixel may be a separately addressable light source (e.g., a pixel of a plasma display, an LCD display, an LED display such as an OLED display, or of other type of display). Each pixel ofpixel array 122 may be individually controllable to vary color and intensity. In an embodiment, each pixel ofpixel array 122 may include a plurality of sub-pixels that correspond to separate color channels, such as a trio of red, green, and blue sub-pixels included in each pixel. -
Adaptable parallax barrier 124 is positioned proximate to a surface ofpixel array 122.Barrier element array 142 is a layer ofadaptable parallax barrier 124 that includes a plurality of barrier elements or blocking regions arranged in an array. Each barrier element of the array is configured to be selectively opaque or transparent. Combinations of barrier elements may be configured to be selectively opaque or transparent to enable various effects. For example, the states of the barrier elements ofbarrier element array 142 may be configured such that light 132 emanating frompixel array 122 is filtered to produce filtered light 134, wherein filteredlight 134 includes one or more two-dimensional and/or three-dimensional images that may be viewed byusers 136 in aviewing space 106. - Depending upon the implementation, each barrier element may have a round, square, or rectangular shape, and
barrier element array 142 may have any number of rows of barrier elements that extend a vertical length ofbarrier element array 142. In another embodiment, each barrier element may have a “band” shape that extends a vertical length ofbarrier element array 142, such thatbarrier element array 142 includes a single horizontal row of barrier elements. Each barrier element may include one or more of such bands, and different regions ofbarrier element array 142 may include barrier elements that include different numbers of such bands. - It is noted that in some embodiments, barrier elements may be capable of being completely transparent or opaque, and in other embodiments, barrier elements may not be capable of being fully transparent or opaque. For instance, such barrier elements may be capable of being 95% transparent when considered to be “transparent” and may be capable of being 5% transparent when considered to be “opaque.” “Transparent” and “opaque” as used herein are intended to encompass barrier elements being substantially transparent (e.g., greater than 75% transparent, including completely transparent) and substantially opaque (e.g., less than 25% transparent, including completely opaque), respectively.
-
Driver circuitry 102 receives control signals 108 from control circuitry (not shown inFIG. 1C ). For example, control signals 108 may be received via a pathway from processing circuitry, such asprocessing circuitry 162 ofFIG. 1A orprocessing circuitry 103 ofFIG. 1B . The control signals 108cause driver circuitry 102 to placescreen 104 in a selected one of a plurality of different viewing configurations. In particular, based oncontrol signals 108, adaptable parallaxbarrier driver circuitry 114 transmits drivesignals 154 that causebarrier element array 142 to be placed in a state that supports the selected viewing configuration. The selected viewing configuration may be a particular two-dimensional viewing configuration, a particular three-dimensional viewing configuration, or a viewing configuration that supports the display of different types of two-dimensional and/or three-dimensional content in corresponding display regions. - For example,
FIG. 2 shows an exemplary arrangement of anadaptable parallax barrier 200 that supports a particular three-dimensional viewing configuration.Adaptable parallax barrier 200 is an example ofadaptable parallax barrier 124 ofFIG. 1C . As shown inFIG. 2 ,adaptable parallax barrier 200 includes abarrier element array 202, which includes a plurality ofbarrier elements 204 arranged in a two-dimensional array. Furthermore, as shown inFIG. 2 ,barrier element array 202 includes a plurality of parallel strips ofbarrier elements 204 that are selected to be non-blocking to form a plurality of parallel non-blocking strips (or “slits”) 206 a-206 g. As shown inFIG. 2 , parallel non-blocking strips 206 a-206 g (non-blocking slits) are alternated with parallel blocking strips 208 a-208 g ofbarrier elements 204 that are selected to be blocking. In the example ofFIG. 2 , non-blocking strips 206 a-206 g and blocking strips 208 a-208 g each have a width (along the x-dimension) of twobarrier elements 204, and have lengths that extend along the entire y-dimension (twenty barrier elements 204) ofbarrier element array 202, although in other embodiments, may have alternative dimensions. Non-blocking strips 206 a-206 g and blocking strips 208 a-208 g form a parallax barrier configuration foradaptable parallax barrier 200. The spacing (and number) of parallel non-blocking strips 206 inbarrier element array 202 may be selectable by choosing any number and combination of particular strips ofbarrier elements 204 inbarrier element array 202 to be non-blocking, to be alternated with blocking strips 208, as desired. For example, the spacing (and number) of parallel non-blocking strips 206 inbarrier element array 202 may be selected based on control signals that are received via a pathway from processing circuitry, such asprocessing circuitry 162 ofFIG. 1A orprocessing circuitry 103 ofFIG. 1B . It will be recognized that hundreds, thousands, or even larger numbers of non-blocking strips 206 and blocking strips 208 may be present inadaptable parallax barrier 200. -
FIG. 3 shows an alternative example of anadaptable parallax barrier 300 that has also been configured to support a particular three-dimensional viewing configuration. Similarly toadaptable parallax barrier 200 ofFIG. 2 ,adaptable parallax barrier 300 includes abarrier element array 302, which includes a plurality ofbarrier elements 304 arranged in a two-dimensional array (28×1 array).Barrier elements 304 have widths (along the x-dimension) similar to the widths ofbarrier elements 204 inFIG. 2 , but have lengths that extend along the entire vertical length (y-dimension) ofbarrier element array 302. As shown inFIG. 3 ,barrier element array 302 includes parallel non-blocking strips 306 a-306 g alternated with parallel blocking strips 308 a-308 g. In the example ofFIG. 3 , parallel non-blocking strips 306 a-306 g and parallel blocking strips 308 a-308 g each have a width (along the x-dimension) of twobarrier elements 304, and have lengths that extend along the entire y-dimension (one barrier element 304) ofbarrier element array 302.Adaptable parallax barrier 300 may be configured in accordance with control signals that are received via a pathway from processing circuitry, such asprocessing circuitry 162 ofFIG. 1A orprocessing circuitry 103 ofFIG. 1B , for example. - Each of
adaptable parallax barriers FIGS. 2 and 3 respectively, filter light produced by a pixel array to form one or more three-dimensional views in a viewing space, thus supporting a three-dimensional viewing configuration. To achieve a two-dimensional viewing configuration, all of the barrier elements of eitheradaptable parallax barrier Stereoscopic 3D Display Regions.” - In the adaptable parallax barrier configurations shown in
FIGS. 2 and 3 , the entirety of the barrier element array is filled with parallel non-blocking strips to support three-dimensional viewing. In further embodiments, one or more regions of an adaptable parallax barrier may be filled with parallel non-blocking strips to deliver three-dimensional images, and one or more other regions of the adaptable parallax barrier may be rendered transparent to deliver two-dimensional images. Thus, a viewing configuration that mixes two-dimensional and three-dimensional viewing regions may be supported. - For instance,
FIG. 4 shows an exemplary arrangement of anadaptable parallax barrier 400 that supports a viewing configuration that mixes two-dimensional and three-dimensional viewing regions according to example embodiments. The arrangement ofadaptable parallax barrier 400 may be based on control signals that are received via a pathway from processing circuitry, such asprocessing circuitry 162 ofFIG. 1A orprocessing circuitry 103 ofFIG. 1B , for example.Adaptable parallax barrier 400 is similar toadaptable parallax barrier 200 ofFIG. 2 , havingbarrier element array 202 including a plurality ofbarrier elements 204 arranged in a two-dimensional array. InFIG. 4 , afirst region 402 ofbarrier element array 202 includes a plurality of parallel non-blocking strips alternated with parallel blocking strips that together fillfirst region 402. Asecond region 404 ofbarrier element array 202 is surrounded byfirst region 402.Second region 404 is a rectangular shaped region ofbarrier element array 202 that includes a two-dimensional array ofbarrier elements 204 that are non-blocking. Thus, inFIG. 4 ,barrier element array 202 is configured to enable a three-dimensional image to be generated by pixels of a pixel array that are adjacent to barrier elements offirst region 402, and to enable a two-dimensional image to be generated by pixels of the pixel array that are adjacent to barrier elements inside ofsecond region 404. Note that alternatively,first region 402 may include allnon-blocking barrier elements 202 to pass a two-dimensional image, andsecond region 404 may include parallel non-blocking strips alternated with parallel blocking strips to pass a three-dimensional image. In further embodiments,adaptable parallax barrier 400 may have additional numbers, sizes, and arrangements of regions configured to pass different combinations of two-dimensional images and three-dimensional images. - In still further embodiments, different regions of an adaptable parallax barrier that have parallel non-blocking strips may have the parallel non-blocking strips oriented at different angles to deliver three-dimensional images to viewers that are oriented differently. Thus, a viewing configuration that mixes three-dimensional viewing regions having different viewing orientations may be supported.
- For example,
FIG. 5 shows an exemplary arrangement of anadaptable parallax barrier 500 in which transparent slits have different orientations, according to an example embodiment. The arrangement ofadaptable parallax barrier 500 may be based on control signals that are received via a pathway from processing circuitry, such asprocessing circuitry 162 ofFIG. 1A orprocessing circuitry 103 ofFIG. 1B , for example.Adaptable parallax barrier 500 is similar toadaptable parallax barrier 200 ofFIG. 2 , havingbarrier element array 202 including a plurality ofbarrier elements 204 arranged in a two-dimensional array. A first region 510 (e.g., a bottom half) ofbarrier element array 202 includes a first plurality of parallel strips ofbarrier elements 204 that are selected to be non-blocking to form a first plurality of parallel non-blocking strips 502 a-502 e (each having a width of two barrier elements 204). As shown inFIG. 5 , parallel non-blocking strips 502 a-502 e are alternated with parallel blocking strips 504 a-504 f of barrier elements 204 (each having a width of three barrier elements 204). Parallel non-blocking strips 502 a-502 e are oriented in a first direction (e.g., along a vertical axis). - Furthermore, as shown in
FIG. 5 , a second region 512 (e.g., a top half) ofbarrier element array 202 includes a second plurality of parallel strips ofbarrier elements 204 that are selected to be non-blocking to form a second plurality of parallel non-blocking strips 506 a-506 d (each having a width of one barrier element 204). As shown inFIG. 5 , parallel non-blocking strips 506 a-506 d are alternated with parallel blocking strips 508 a-508 c of barrier elements 204 (each having a width of two barrier elements 204). Parallel non-blocking strips 506 a-506 d are oriented in a second direction (e.g., along a horizontal axis). - As such, in
FIG. 5 , first and second pluralities of parallel non-blocking strips 502 a-502 e and 506 a-506 d are present inbarrier element array 202 that are oriented perpendicularly to each other. The region ofbarrier element array 202 that includes first plurality of parallel non-blocking strips 502 a-502 e may be configured to deliver a three-dimensional image in a viewing space to be viewable by a user whose body is oriented vertically (e.g., sitting upright or standing up). The region ofbarrier element array 202 that includes second plurality of parallel non-blocking strips 506 a-506 d may be configured to deliver a three-dimensional image in a viewing space to be viewable by a user whose body is oriented horizontally (e.g., laying down). In this manner, users who are oriented differently relative to each other can still each be provided with a corresponding three-dimensional image that accommodates their position. - The foregoing adaptable parallax barriers and arrangements thereof have been described herein by way of example only. Additional adaptable parallax barriers and arrangements thereof may be used to support additional viewing configurations. For example, additional adaptable parallax barrier implementations and arrangements thereof are described in the aforementioned, incorporated U.S. patent application Ser. No. 12/845,440 filed on Jul. 28, 2010, and entitled “Adaptable Parallax Barrier Supporting Mixed 2D and
Stereoscopic 3D Display Regions,” and in commonly-owned, co-pending U.S. patent application Ser. No. 12/845,461, filed on Jul. 28, 2010, and entitled “Display Supporting Multiple Simultaneous 3D Views,” the entirety of which is incorporated by reference herein. - Returning now to the description of
display system 100 ofFIG. 1C , since a configuration ofadaptable parallax barrier 124 can be dynamically modified to support a particular viewing configuration,pixel array 122 must also be controlled to support the same viewing configuration. In particular, the rendering of pixels of an image (also referred to herein as “image pixels”) among the pixels of pixel array 122 (also referred to herein as “display pixels”) must be handled in a manner that is consistent with a current configuration ofadaptable parallax barrier 124. This may entail, for example, changing a number of display pixels that represents each image pixel (i.e., changing the resolution of a displayed image) and/or changing which display pixels or groups thereof correspond to the respective image pixels (i.e., changing the locations at which the image pixels are displayed), in response to modification of a configuration ofadaptable parallax barrier 124. Such changes may be implemented by a controller (not shown inFIG. 1C ) via delivery of appropriate control signals 108 to pixelarray driver circuitry 112. - For example, in one embodiment, when a configuration of
adaptable parallax barrier 124 supports a first viewing configuration responsive to controlsignals 108, pixelarray driver circuitry 204 sends drive signals 152 in conformance withcontrol signals 108 such that the rendering of images topixel array 122 occurs in a manner that also supports the first viewing configuration. Furthermore, when the configuration ofadaptable parallax barrier 124 is modified to support a second viewing configuration responsive to controlsignals 108, pixelarray driver circuitry 204 sends drive signals 152 in conformance with the control signals 108 such that the rendering of images topixel array 122 occurs in a manner that also supports the second viewing configuration. -
FIG. 6 depicts aflowchart 600 of an exemplary method for controlling a pixel array to support the same viewing configuration as an adaptable light manipulator (such as adaptable parallax barrier 124) in accordance with an embodiment. As shown inFIG. 6 , the method offlowchart 600 begins atstep 602. Duringstep 602, a configuration of an adaptable light manipulator, such asadaptable parallax barrier 124, is modified. Atstep 604, a number of display pixels in a pixel array, such aspixel array 122, that represents each image pixel of a plurality of image pixels is changed in response to modifying the configuration of the adaptable light manipulator. -
FIGS. 8 and 9 provide a simple illustration of an exemplary application of the method offlowchart 600. As shown inFIG. 8 , a portion of apixel array 800 includes a 16×16 array of display pixels. An example display pixel is shown asdisplay pixel 802. In one embodiment, each display pixel comprises a trio of red, green, and blue sub-pixels as discussed above. A first image comprising a 4×4 array of image pixels (each shown depicting the letter “A” to indicate that each is included in the same image) is mapped to the display pixels such that 4 display pixels are used to present each image pixel. An example of an image pixel is shown asimage pixel 804. InFIG. 8 , the first image is intended to represent an image that is viewed when an adaptable light manipulator disposed proximate to the pixel array is configured to support a two-dimensional viewing configuration. -
FIG. 9 is intended to represent the same portion ofpixel array 800 after the configuration of the adaptable light manipulator has been changed to support a three-dimensional viewing configuration. The three-dimensional viewing configuration requires the combined display of a first image and a second image across the same portion ofpixel array 800. This means that the first image must be represented with only half the display pixels. To achieve this, the pixel array is controlled such that 2 rather than 4 display pixels are used to present each image pixel of the first image (each still shown depicting the letter “A”). This corresponds to a decreased viewing resolution of the first image. The other half of the display pixels are now used to present each image pixel of a second image (each shown depicting the letter “B”). The image pixels associated with the different images are aligned with the adaptable light manipulator to achieve a desired three-dimensional viewing effect. -
FIG. 7 depicts aflowchart 700 of another exemplary method for controlling a pixel array to support the same viewing configuration as an adaptable light manipulator (such as adaptable parallax barrier 124) in accordance with an embodiment. As shown inFIG. 7 , the method offlowchart 700 begins atstep 702. Duringstep 702, a plurality of image pixels is mapped to a plurality of respective first subsets of display pixels in a pixel array, such aspixel array 122. Atstep 704, a configuration of an adaptable light manipulator that is positioned proximate to the pixel array is changed. For example, in an embodiment in which the adaptable light manipulator includesadaptable parallax barrier 124, a slit pattern, orientation, or the like, ofadaptable parallax barrier 124 may be changed. Atstep 706, a mapping of the plurality of image pixels is changed from the plurality of respective first subsets of the display pixels to a plurality of respective second subsets of the display pixels in the pixel array to compensate for changing the configuration of the adaptable light manipulator. -
FIGS. 9 and 10 provide a simple illustration of an exemplary application of the method offlowchart 700. As shown inFIG. 9 , a portion of apixel array 800 is used to simultaneously display a first image comprising image pixels shown depicting the letter “A” and a second image comprising image pixels shown depicting the letter “B.” As noted above, this display format is utilized to support a three-dimensional viewing configuration corresponding to a particular arrangement of an adaptable light manipulator disposed proximate to the pixel array.FIG. 10 is intended to represent the same portion ofpixel array 800 after the configuration of the adaptable light manipulator has been changed to support a modified three-dimensional viewing configuration (e.g., in response to a changed location of a viewer or some other factor). The modified three-dimensional viewing configuration requires the display location of the first image and the second image to be shifted, as shown inFIG. 10 . Thus, for example, rather than renderingimage pixel 904 to the bottom-most two display pixels in the far-left column ofarray portion 800, thesame image pixel 904 is now rendered to the bottom-most two display pixels in the second column from the left ofarray portion 800. - Numerous other methods may be used to control the rendering of image pixels to display pixels in support of a desired two-dimensional and/or three-dimensional viewing configuration implemented by an adaptable parallax barrier or other adaptable light manipulator. Additional details concerning such control of a pixel array may be found in the aforementioned, incorporated U.S. patent application Ser. No. 12/774,225, filed on May 5, 2010, and entitled “Controlling a Pixel Array to Support an Adaptable Light Manipulator.”
-
FIG. 11 shows a block diagram of anexemplary display system 1100, which is another example of a display system that utilizes an adaptable parallax barrier to support multiple viewing configurations. As shown inFIG. 11 ,display system 1100 includesdriver circuitry 1102 and ascreen 1104, whereinscreen 1104 include alight generator 1122, anadaptable parallax barrier 1124 and apixel array 1126. As further shown inFIG. 11 ,driver circuitry 1102 includes lightgenerator driver circuitry 1112, adaptable parallaxbarrier driver circuitry 1114 and pixelarray driver circuitry 1116. -
Light generator 1122 emits light 1132.Adaptable parallax barrier 1124 is positioned proximate tolight generator 1122.Barrier element array 1144 is a layer ofadaptable parallax barrier 1124 that includes a plurality of barrier elements or blocking regions arranged in an array. Each barrier element of the array is configured to be selectively opaque or transparent.Barrier element array 1144 filters light 1132 received fromlight generator 1122 to generate filtered light 1134. Filtered light 1134 is configured to enable a two-dimensional image or a three-dimensional image (e.g., formed by a pair of two-dimensional images in filtered light 1134) to be formed based on images subsequently imposed on filtered light 1134 bypixel array 1126. -
Pixel array 1126 includes a two-dimensional array of pixels (e.g., arranged in a grid or other distribution) likepixel array 122 ofFIG. 1C . However,pixel array 1126 is not self-illuminating, and instead is a light filter that imposes images (e.g., in the form of color, grayscale, etc.) on filtered light 1134 fromadaptable parallax barrier 1124 to generate filtered light 1136 to include one or more images. Each pixel ofpixel array 1126 may be a separately addressable filter (e.g., a pixel of a plasma display, an LCD display, an LED display, or of other type of display). Each pixel ofpixel array 1126 may be individually controllable to vary the color imposed on the corresponding light passing through, and/or to vary the intensity of the passed light in filtered light 1136. In an embodiment, each pixel ofpixel array 1126 may include a plurality of sub-pixels that correspond to separate color channels, such as a trio of red, green, and blue sub-pixels included in each pixel. -
Driver circuitry 1102 receivescontrol signals 1108 from control circuitry (not shown inFIG. 11 ). For example,control signals 1108 may be received via a pathway from processing circuitry, such asprocessing circuitry 162 ofFIG. 1A orprocessing circuitry 103 ofFIG. 1B . The control signals 1108cause driver circuitry 1102 to placescreen 1104 in a selected one of a plurality of different viewing configurations. In particular, based oncontrol signals 1108, adaptable parallaxbarrier driver circuitry 1114 transmits drivesignals 1154 that causebarrier element array 1144 to be placed in a state that supports the selected viewing configuration. Likewise, based oncontrol signals 1108, pixelarray driver circuitry 1116 transmits drivesignals 1156 to cause pixels of one or more images (also referred to herein as “image pixels”) to be rendered among the pixels of pixel array 1126 (also referred to herein as “display pixels”) in a manner that is consistent with a current configuration ofadaptable parallax barrier 1124. The selected viewing configuration may be a particular two-dimensional viewing configuration, a particular three-dimensional viewing configuration, or a viewing configuration that supports the display of different types of two-dimensional and/or three-dimensional content in different display regions. - As discussed in the aforementioned, incorporated U.S. patent application Ser. No. ______, filed on even date herewith and entitled “Backlighting Array Supporting Adaptable Parallax Barrier,” conventional LCD displays typically include a backlight and a display panel that includes an array of LCD pixels. The backlight is designed to produce a sheet of light of uniform luminosity for illuminating the LCD pixels. When simultaneously displaying two-dimensional, three-dimensional and multi-view three-dimensional regions using an adaptable parallax barrier such as that described in the aforementioned, incorporated U.S. patent application Ser. No. 12/845,440, filed on Jul. 28, 2010, and entitled “Adaptable Parallax Barrier Supporting Mixed 2D and
Stereoscopic 3D Display Regions,” the use of a conventional backlight will result in a disparity in perceived brightness between the different simultaneously-displayed regions. This is because the number of visible pixels per unit area associated with a two-dimensional region will generally exceed the number of visible pixels per unit area associated with a particular three-dimensional or multi-view three-dimensional region (in which the pixels must be partitioned among different eyes/views). - To address this issue,
light generator 1122 includes abacklight array 1142 which is a two-dimensional array of light sources. Such light sources may be arranged, for example, in a rectangular grid. Each light source inbacklight array 1142 is individually addressable and controllable to select an amount of light emitted thereby. A single light source may comprise one or more light-emitting elements depending upon the implementation. In one embodiment, each light source inbacklight array 1142 comprises a single light-emitting diode (LED) although this example is not intended to be limiting. - The amount of light emitted by the individual light sources that make up
backlight array 1142 can selectively controlled bydrive signals 1152 generated by lightgenerator driver circuitry 1112 so that the brightness associated with each of a plurality of display regions ofscreen 1104 can also be controlled. This enablesdisplay system 1100 to provide a desired brightness level for each display region automatically and/or in response to user input. For example,backlight array 1142 can be controlled such that a uniform level of brightness is achieved across different simultaneously-displayed display regions, even though the number of perceptible pixels per unit area varies from display region to display region. As another example,backlight array 1142 can be controlled such that the level of brightness associated with a particular display region is increased or reduced without impacting (or without substantially impacting) the brightness of other simultaneously-displayed display regions. - To help illustrate this,
FIG. 12 provides an exploded view of anexemplary display system 1200 that implements a controllable backlight array as described immediately above.Display system 1200 comprises one implementation ofdisplay system 1100. As shown inFIG. 12 ,display system 1200 includes alight generator 1202 that includes abacklight array 1212, anadaptable parallax barrier 1204 that includes abarrier element array 1222 and adisplay panel 1206 that includes apixel array 1232. These elements may be aligned with and positioned proximate to each other to create an integrated display screen. - In accordance with the example configuration shown in
FIG. 12 , afirst portion 1234 ofpixel array 1232 and afirst portion 1224 ofbarrier element array 1222 have been manipulated to create a first display region that displays multi-view three-dimensional content, asecond portion 1236 ofpixel array 1232 and asecond portion 1226 ofbarrier element array 1222 have been manipulated to create a second display region that displays a three-dimensional image, and a third portion of 1238 ofpixel array 1232 and athird portion 1228 ofbarrier element array 1222 have been manipulated to create a third display region that displays a two-dimensional image. To independently control the brightness of each of the first, second and third display regions, the amount of light emitted by light sources included within afirst portion 1214, asecond portion 1216 and athird portion 1218 ofbacklight array 1212 can respectively be controlled. For example, the light sources withinfirst portion 1214 may be controlled to provide greater luminosity than the light sources withinsecond portion 1216 andthird portion 1218 as the number of perceivable pixels per unit area will be smallest in the first display region with whichfirst portion 1214 is aligned. In further accordance with this example, the light sources withinsecond portion 1216 may be controlled to provide greater luminosity than the light sources withinthird portion 1218 since the number of perceivable pixels per unit area will be smaller in the second display region with whichsecond portion 1216 is aligned than the third display region with whichthird portion 1218 is aligned. Of course, if uniform luminosity is not desired across the various display regions then other control schemes may be used. - Of course, the arrangement shown in
FIG. 12 provides only a single teaching example. It should be noted that a display system in accordance with an embodiment can dynamically manipulatepixel array 1232 andbarrier element array 1222 in a coordinated fashion to dynamically and simultaneously create any number of display regions of different sizes and in different locations, wherein each of the created display regions can display one of two-dimensional, three-dimensional or multi-view three-dimensional content. To accommodate this,backlight array 1212 can also be dynamically manipulated in a coordinated fashion withpixel array 1232 andbarrier element array 1222 to ensure that each display region is perceived at a desired level of brightness. - In the arrangement shown in
FIG. 12 , there is a one-to-one correspondence between each light source inbacklight array 1212 and every display pixel inpixel array 1232. However, this need not be the case to achieve regional brightness control. For example, in certain embodiments, the number of light sources provided inbacklight array 1212 is less than the number of pixels provided inpixel array 1232. For instance, in one embodiment, a single light source may be provided inbacklight array 1212 for every N pixels provided inpixel array 1232, wherein N is an integer greater than 1. In an embodiment in which the number of light sources inbacklight array 1212 is less than the number of pixels inpixel array 1232, each light source may be arranged so that it provides backlighting for a particular group of pixels inpixel array 1232, although this is only an example. In alternate embodiments, the number of light sources provided inbacklight array 1212 is greater than the number of pixels provided inpixel array 1232. - Also, in the examples described above, light sources in
backlight array 1212 are described as being individually controllable. However, in alternate embodiments, light sources inbacklight array 1212 may only be controllable in groups. This may facilitate a reduction in the complexity of the control infrastructure associated withbacklight array 1212. In still further embodiments, light sources inbacklight array 1212 may be controllable both individually and in groups. It will be recognized thatlight generator 1202,adaptable parallax barrier 1204, anddisplay panel 1206 may be controlled based on control signals that are received via a pathway from processing circuitry, such asprocessing circuitry 162 ofFIG. 1A orprocessing circuitry 103 ofFIG. 1B . - It is also noted that although
FIGS. 11 and 12 show display system configurations in which a barrier element array of an adaptable parallax barrier is disposed between a backlight array of individually addressable and controllable light sources and a pixel array, in alternate implementations the pixel array may be disposed between the backlight array and the barrier element array. Such an alternate implementation is shown inFIG. 13 . In particular,FIG. 13 is a block diagram of anexemplary display system 1300 that includes apixel array 1324 disposed between alight generator 1322 that includes abacklight array 1342 and anadaptable parallax barrier 1326 that includes abarrier element array 1344 to support the generation of two-dimensional and/or three-dimensional images perceivable in aviewing space 1306. In such alternate implementations, selective control of the luminosity of groups or individual ones of the light sources inbacklight array 1342 may also be used to vary the backlighting luminosity associated with different display regions created by the interaction ofbacklight array 1342,pixel array 1324 andbarrier element array 1344. For example,light generator 1322.pixel array 1324, and/oradaptable parallax barrier 1326 may be controlled based on control signals that are received via a pathway from processing circuitry, such asprocessing circuitry 162 ofFIG. 1A orprocessing circuitry 103 ofFIG. 1B . - Other example display system implementations that utilize a backlight array of independently-controllable light sources are described in the aforementioned, incorporated U.S. patent application Ser. No. ______, filed on even date herewith and entitled “Backlighting Array Supporting Adaptable Parallax Barrier.” That application also describes other approaches for controlling the brightness of different simultaneously-displayed display regions of a display system. Some of these approaches will be described below.
- For example, to achieve independent region-by-region brightness control in a display system that includes a conventional backlight panel designed to produce a sheet of light of uniform luminosity, the amount of light passed by the individual pixels that make up a pixel array can be selectively controlled so that the brightness associated with each of a plurality of display regions can also be controlled. To help illustrate this, FIG. 14 provides an exploded view of an
exemplary display system 1400 that implements a regional brightness control scheme based on pixel intensity as described immediately above. The regional brightness control scheme may be implemented based on control signals that are received via a pathway from processing circuitry, such asprocessing circuitry 162 ofFIG. 1A orprocessing circuitry 103 ofFIG. 1B , for example. As shown inFIG. 14 ,display system 1400 includes adisplay panel 1402 and anadaptable parallax barrier 1404.Display system 1400 also includes a backlight panel, although this element is not shown inFIG. 14 . These elements may be aligned with and positioned proximate to each other to create an integrated display screen. - As further shown in
FIG. 14 ,display panel 1402 includes apixel array 1412. Each of the pixels in afirst portion 1414 ofpixel array 1412 is individually controlled by pixel array driver circuitry to pass a selected amount of light produced by a backlight panel (not shown inFIG. 14 ), thereby producing display-generated light representative of a single two-dimensional image. Each of the pixels in asecond portion 1416 ofpixel array 1412 is individually controlled by the pixel array driver circuitry to pass a selected amount of light produced by the backlight panel, thereby producing display-generated light representative of two two-dimensional images that, when combined by the brain of a viewer positioned in an appropriate location relative to displaysystem 1400, will be perceived as a single three-dimensional image. -
Adaptable parallax barrier 1404 includesbarrier element array 1422 that includes afirst portion 1424 and asecond portion 1426.Barrier element array 1422 is aligned withpixel array 1414 such thatfirst portion 1424 of blockingregion array 1422 overlaysfirst portion 1414 ofpixel array 1412 andsecond portion 1426 of blockingregion array 1422 overlayssecond portion 1416 ofpixel array 1412. Adaptable parallax barrier driver circuitry causes all the barrier elements withinfirst portion 1424 ofbarrier element array 1422 to be transparent. Thus, the two-dimensional image generated by the pixels offirst portion 1414 ofpixel array 1412 will simply be passed through to a viewer in a viewing space in front ofdisplay system 1400. Furthermore, the adaptable parallax barrier driver circuitry manipulates the barrier elements withinsecond portion 1426 of blockingregion array 1422 to form a plurality of parallel transparent strips alternated with parallel opaque strips, thereby creating a parallax effect that enables the two two-dimensional images generated by the pixels ofsecond portion 1416 ofpixel array 1412 to be perceived as a three-dimensional image by a viewer in the viewing space in front ofdisplay system 1400. - Assume that a viewer is positioned such that he/she can perceive both the two-dimensional image passed by
first portion 1424 ofbarrier element array 1422 and the three-dimensional image formed through parallax bysecond portion 1426 ofbarrier element 1422. As discussed above, the pixels per unit area perceived by this viewer with respect to the two-dimensional image will be greater than the pixels per unit area perceived by this viewer with respect to the three-dimensional image. Thus, the two-dimensional image will appear brighter to the viewer than the three dimensional image when backlighting of constant luminosity is provided behindpixel array 1412. - To address this issue, drive signals may be transmitted to
display panel 1402 that selectively cause the pixels included infirst portion 1414 ofpixel array 1412 to pass less light from the backlight panel (i.e., become less intense), thereby reducing the brightness of the two-dimensional image produced from the pixels infirst portion 1414 ofpixel array 1412. Alternatively or additionally, drive signals may be transmitted todisplay panel 1402 that selectively cause the pixels included insecond portion 1416 ofpixel array 1412 to pass more light from the backlight panel (i.e., become more intense), thereby increasing the brightness of the three-dimensional image produced from the pixels insecond portion 1416 ofpixel array 1412. By controlling the intensity of the pixels inportions pixel array 1412 in this manner, the brightness of the two-dimensional image produced from the pixels infirst portion 1414 ofpixel array 1412 and the brightness of the three-dimensional image produced from the pixels insecond portion 1416 ofpixel array 1412 can be kept consistent. Additionally, by providing independent control over the intensity of the pixels inportions pixel array 1412, independent control over the brightness of the two-dimensional and three-dimensional images generated therefrom can also be achieved. - Of course, the arrangement shown in
FIG. 14 provides only a single teaching example. It should be noted that a display system in accordance with an embodiment can dynamically manipulatepixel array 1412 and blockingelement array 1422 in a coordinated fashion to dynamically and simultaneously create any number of display regions of different sizes and in different locations, wherein each of the created display regions can display one of two-dimensional, three-dimensional or multi-view three-dimensional content. To accommodate this, the intensity of the pixels inpixel array 1412 can also be dynamically manipulated in a coordinated fashion to ensure that each display region is perceived at a desired level of brightness. - In one embodiment, a regional brightness control scheme combines the use of a backlight array of independently-controllable light sources as previously described with regional pixel intensity control. The advantages of such a control scheme will now be described with reference to
FIG. 15 .FIG. 15 illustrates a front perspective view of anexemplary display panel 1500.Display panel 1500 includes apixel array 1502 that includes afirst portion 1504 and asecond portion 1506, wherein each offirst portion 1504 andsecond portion 1506 includes a different subset of the pixels inpixel array 1502. It is to be assumed thatfirst portion 1504 ofpixel array 1502 is illuminated by backlighting provided by an aligned first portion of a backlight array (not shown inFIG. 15 ), wherein the backlight array is similar tobacklight array 1142 described above in reference toFIG. 11 .Second portion 1506 ofpixel array 1502 is illuminated by backlighting provided by an aligned second portion of the backlight array. In one example, the amount of light emitted by each light source in the second portion of the backlight array to illuminatesecond portion 1506 ofpixel array 1502 is controlled such that it is greater than the amount of light emitted by each light source in the first portion of the backlight array to illuminatefirst portion 1504 ofpixel array 1502. This control scheme may be applied, for example, to cause a three-dimensional image formed by interaction between the pixels insecond portion 1506 ofpixel array 1502 and an adaptable parallax barrier to appear to have a uniform brightness level with respect to a two-dimensional image formed by interaction between the pixels infirst portion 1504 ofpixel array 1504 and the adaptable parallax barrier. - However, the difference in the amount of light emitted by each light source in the first and second portions of the backlight array to illuminate corresponding first and
second portions pixel array 1502 may also give rise to undesired visual artifacts. In particular, the difference may cause pixels in boundary areas immediately outside ofsecond portion 1506 ofpixel array 1502 to appear brighter than desired in relation to other pixels infirst portion 1504 ofpixel array 1502. For example, as shown inFIG. 15 , the pixels inboundary area 1512 immediately outside ofsecond portion 1506 ofpixel array 1502 may appear brighter than desired in relation to other pixels infirst portion 1504 ofpixel array 1502. This may be due to the fact that the increased luminosity provided by the light sources in the second portion of the backlight array has “spilled over” to impact the pixels inboundary area 1512, causing those pixels to be brighter than desired. Conversely, the difference may cause pixels in boundary areas immediately inside ofsecond portion 1506 ofpixel array 1502 to appear dimmer than desired in relation to other pixels insecond portion 1506 ofpixel array 1502. For example, as shown inFIG. 15 , the pixels inboundary area 1514 immediately inside ofsecond portion 1506 ofpixel array 1502 may appear dimmer than desired in relation to other pixels insecond portion 1506 ofpixel array 1502. This may be due to the fact that the reduced luminosity of the light sources in the first portion of the backlight array has “spilled over” to impact the pixels inboundary area 1514, causing those pixels to be dimmer than desired. - To address this issue, an embodiment may selectively control the amount of light passed by the pixels located in
boundary region 1512 orboundary region 1514 to compensate for the undesired visual effects. For example, driver circuitry associated withpixel array 1502 may selectively cause the pixels included inboundary area 1512 ofpixel array 1502 to pass less light from the backlight panel (i.e., become less intense), thereby reducing the brightness of the pixels inboundary area 1512, thus compensating for an undesired increase in brightness due to “spill over” from light sources in the second portion of the backlight array. Alternatively or additionally, driver circuitry associated withpixel array 1502 may selectively cause the pixels included inboundary area 1514 ofpixel array 1502 to pass more light from the backlight panel (i.e., become more intense), thereby increasing the brightness of the pixels inboundary area 1514, thus compensating for an undesired reduction in brightness due to “spill over” from light sources in the first portion of the backlight array. By controlling the intensity of the pixels inboundary areas - The illustration provided in
FIG. 15 provides only one example of undesired visual effects that can arise from the use of a backlight array to provide regional brightness control. Persons skilled in the relevant art(s) will appreciate that many different display regions having many different brightness characteristics can be simultaneously generated by a display system in accordance with embodiments, thereby giving rise to different undesired visual effects relating to the brightness of boundary areas inside and outside of the different display regions. In each case, the intensity of pixels located in such boundaries areas can be selectively increased or reduced to mitigate or avoid such undesired visual effects. - In additional embodiments, a regional brightness control scheme is implemented in a display system that does not include a backlight panel at all, but instead utilizes a display panel comprising an array of organic light emitting diodes (OLEDs) or polymer light emitting diodes (PLEDs) which function as display pixels and also provide their own illumination.
Display system 100 described above in reference toFIG. 1C may be representative of such a system, provided thatpixel array 122 comprises an array of OLEDs or PLEDs. In accordance with such an implementation, the amount of light emitted by the individual OLED/PLED pixels that make up the OLED/PLED pixel array can be selectively controlled so that the brightness associated with each of a plurality of display regions ofdisplay system 100 can also be controlled. This enablesdisplay system 100 to provide a desired brightness level for each display region automatically and/or in response to user input. For example, the OLED/PLED pixel array can be controlled such that a uniform level of brightness is achieved across different simultaneously-displayed display regions, even though the number of perceptible pixels per unit area varies from display region to display region. As another example, the OLED/PLED pixel array can be controlled such that the level of brightness associated with a particular display region is increased or reduced without impacting (or without substantially impacting) the brightness of other simultaneously-displayed display regions. - Where OLED/PLED pixel regions such as those described above are adjacent to each other, it is possible that the brightness characteristics of one pixel region can impact the perceived brightness of an adjacent pixel region having different brightness characteristics, creating an undesired visual effect. For example, a first OLED/PLED pixel region having a relatively high level of brightness to support the viewing of multi-view three-dimensional content may be adjacent to a second OLED/PLED pixel region having a relatively low level of brightness to support the viewing of two-dimensional content. In this scenario, light from pixels in a perimeter area of the first OLED/PLED pixel region that are close to the boundary between the two pixel regions may “spill over” into a perimeter area of the second OLED/PLED pixel region. This may cause pixels in the perimeter area of the second OLED/PLED pixel region to appear brighter than desired in relation to other pixels in the second OLED/PLED pixel region. Conversely, pixels in the perimeter area of the first OLED/PLED pixel array may appear dimmer than desired in relation to other pixels in the first OLED/PLED pixel region because of the adjacency to the second OLED/PLED pixel region. To address this issue, it is possible to selectively increase or reduce the brightness of one or more OLED/PLED pixels in either perimeter area to reduce the “spill over” effect arising from the different brightness characteristics between the regions.
- In still further embodiments, a regional brightness control scheme is implemented in a display system that includes an adaptable parallax barrier that also supports brightness regulation via an “overlay” approach. Such an approach involves the use of a brightness regulation overlay that is either independent of or integrated with an adaptable parallax barrier. The brightness regulation overlay is used to help achieve the aforementioned goals of maintaining standard brightness across various regional screen configurations and compensating for or minimizing backlighting dispersion.
- The brightness regulation overlay comprises an element that allows regional dimming through various tones of “grey” pixels. In one example embodiment, an adaptable parallax barrier and the brightness regulation overlay are implemented as a non-color (i.e., black, white and grayscale) LCD sandwich, although other implementations may be used. The combined adaptable parallax barrier and brightness regulation overlay provide full transparent or opaque states for each pixel, as well as a grayscale alternative that can be used to “balance out” brightness variations caused by the parallax barrier itself.
- Control over the individual barrier elements of the parallax barrier and the individual grayscale pixels of the brightness regulation overlay may be provided by using coordinated driver circuitry signaling. Such coordinate signaling may cause the pixels of the adaptable parallax barrier and the brightness regulation overlay (collectively referred to below as the manipulator pixels) to create opaque and transparent barrier elements associated with a particular parallax barrier configuration and a grayscale support there between to allow creation of overlays. The regional brightness control scheme described above with reference to
FIG. 15 , which may include such coordinated signaling, may be implemented based on control signals that are received via a pathway from processing circuitry, such asprocessing circuitry 162 ofFIG. 1A orprocessing circuitry 103 ofFIG. 1B , for example. -
FIG. 16 illustrates two exemplary configurations of anadaptable light manipulator 1600 that includes an adaptable parallax barrier and a brightness regulation overlay implemented as a light manipulating LCD sandwich with manipulator grayscale pixels. The exemplary configurations ofadaptable light manipulator 1600 may be based on control signals that are received via a pathway from processing circuitry, such asprocessing circuitry 162 ofFIG. 1A orprocessing circuitry 103 ofFIG. 1B , for example. InFIG. 16 , the grayscale pixels map to the display pixels on a one-to-one basis, but that need not be the case. - A first exemplary configuration of
adaptable light manipulator 1600 is shown above the section line denoted withreference numeral 1602. In accordance with the first exemplary configuration, a three-dimensional region 1604 is created with fully transparent or fully opaque manipulator pixels that provide parallax barrier functionality and a two-dimensional region 1606 is created having continuous medium gray manipulator pixels. The medium gray manipulator pixels operate to reduce the perceived brightness of two-dimensional region 1606 to better match that of three-dimensional region 1604. It is noted that in other example configurations, two-dimensional region 1606 could instead comprise a three-dimensional region having a number of views that is different than three-dimensional region 1604, thus also requiring brightness regulation. - In the first exemplary configuration, no boundary region compensation is performed. In the second exemplary configuration, which is shown below
section line 1602, boundary region compensation is performed. For example, aboundary region 1610 within two-dimensional region 1606 may be “lightened” to a light gray to compensate for any diminution of light that might occur near the boundary with three-dimensional region 1604. In contrast, the grayscale level of aninner portion 1608 of two-dimensional region 1606 is maintained at the same medium gray level as in the portion of two-dimensional region 1606 abovesection line 1602. As a further example, afirst boundary region 1612 and asecond boundary region 1614 within three-dimensional region 1604 comprise darker and lighter gray transitional areas, respectively, to account for light dispersion from two-dimensional region 1606. In contrast, aninner portion 1616 of three-dimensional region 1604 includes only fully transparent or fully opaque manipulator pixels consistent with a parallax barrier configuration and no brightness regulation. - In one embodiment, the configuration of
adaptable light manipulator 1600 is achieved by first creating a white through various grayscale areas that correspond to the regions and boundary areas to be formed. Once established, the manipulator pixels in these areas that comprise the opaque portions of the parallax barrier are overwritten to turn them black. Of course this two-stage approach is conceptual only and no “overwriting” need be performed. - In certain embodiments,
adaptable light manipulator 1600 comprises the only component used in a display system for performing brightness regulation and/or boundary region compensation. In alternate embodiments, the display system further utilizes any one or more of the following aforementioned techniques for performing brightness regulation and/or boundary region compensation: a backlight array with independently-controllable light sources, and/or a pixel array and associated control logic for selectively increasing or decreasing the intensity of display pixels (e.g., either LCD pixels or OLED/PLED pixels). Note that in certain embodiments (such as the one described above in reference toFIG. 16 ),adaptable light manipulator 1600 is implemented as an integrated adaptable parallax barrier and brightness regulation overlay. However, in alternate embodiments,adaptable light manipulator 1600 is implemented using an adaptable parallax barrier panel and an independent brightness regulation overlay panel. - B. Example Display Systems Using Adaptable Lenticular Lenses
- In display systems in accordance with further embodiments, rather than using an adaptable parallax barrier to perform light manipulation in support of multiple viewing configurations, an adaptable lenticular lens may be used. For example, with respect to
example display system 100 ofFIG. 1C ,adaptable parallax barrier 124 may be replaced with an adaptable lenticular lens. Likewise, with respect toexample display system 1300 ofFIG. 13 ,adaptable parallax barrier 1326 may be replaced with an adaptable lenticular lens. The configuration of such an adaptable lenticular lens may be based on control signals that are received via a pathway from processing circuitry, such asprocessing circuitry 162 ofFIG. 1A orprocessing circuitry 103 ofFIG. 1B , for example. -
FIG. 17 shows a perspective view of an exemplary adaptablelenticular lens 1700 in accordance with an embodiment. As shown inFIG. 17 , adaptablelenticular lens 1700 includes asub-lens array 1702.Sub-lens array 1702 includes a plurality of sub-lenses 1704 arranged in a two-dimensional array (e.g., arranged side-by-side in a row). Each sub-lens 1704 is shown inFIG. 17 as generally cylindrical in shape and having a substantially semi-circular cross-section, but in other embodiments may have other shapes. InFIG. 17 ,sub-lens array 1702 is shown to include eight sub-lenses for illustrative purposes and is not intended to be limiting. For instance,sub-lens array 1702 may include any number (e.g., hundreds, thousands, etc.) of sub-lenses 1704.FIG. 18 shows a side view of adaptablelenticular lens 1700. InFIG. 18 , light may be passed through adaptablelenticular lens 1700 in the direction of dotted arrow 1802 to be diverted. Adaptablelenticular lens 1700 is adaptable in that it can be modified to manipulate light in different ways in order to accommodate different viewing configurations. For example, in one embodiment, adaptable lenticular lens is made from an elastic material and can be stretched or shrunk in one or more directions in response to generated drive signals. - Further description regarding the use of an adaptable lenticular lens to deliver three-dimensional views is provided in the aforementioned, incorporated U.S. patent application Ser. No. 12/774,307, filed on May 5, 2010, and entitled “Display with Elastic Light Manipulator.”
- C. Example Display Systems Using Multiple Light Manipulators
- Display systems in accordance with further embodiments may include multiple layers of light manipulators. Such display systems may enable multiple three-dimensional images to be displayed in a viewing space. The multiple light manipulating layers may enable spatial separation of the images. For instance, in accordance with one embodiment, a display device that includes multiple light manipulator layers may be configured to display a first three-dimensional image in a first region of a viewing space (e.g., a left-side area), a second three-dimensional image in a second region of the viewing space (e.g., a central area), a third three-dimensional image in a third region of the viewing space (e.g., a right-side area), etc. In fact, a display device that includes multiple light manipulator layers may be configured to display any number of spatially separated three-dimensional images as desired for a particular application (e.g., according to a number and spacing of viewers in the viewing space, etc.).
-
FIG. 19 is a block diagram of anexemplary display system 1900 that includes multiple light manipulator layers in accordance with an embodiment. As shown inFIG. 19 ,display system 1900 includesdriver circuitry 1902 and ascreen 1904, whereinscreen 1904 includes apixel array 1922, afirst light manipulator 1924 and asecond light manipulator 1926. As shown inFIG. 19 ,first light manipulator 1924 includes firstlight manipulator elements 1942 andsecond light manipulator 1926 includes secondlight manipulator elements 1944. Furthermore, as shown inFIG. 19 ,driver circuitry 1902 includes pixelarray driver circuitry 1912 and lightmanipulator driver circuitry 1914. -
Light 1932 is received atfirst light manipulator 1924 frompixel array 1922. Pixelarray driver circuitry 1912 may generatedrive signals 1952 based on acontrol signal 1908 received from control circuitry (not shown inFIG. 19 ) and drivesignals 1952 may be received bypixel array 1922 to generate light 1932. For example,control signal 1908 may be received via a pathway from processing circuitry, such asprocessing circuitry 162 ofFIG. 1A orprocessing circuitry 103 ofFIG. 1B . Each pixel ofpixel array 1922 may generate light that is received atfirst light manipulator 1924. In an embodiment, pixelarray driver circuitry 1912 may generatedrive signals 1952 to causepixel array 1922 to emit light 1932 containing a plurality of images corresponding to the sets of pixels. -
First light manipulator 1924 may be configured to manipulate light 1932 received frompixel array 1922. As shown inFIG. 19 ,first light manipulator 1924 includeslight manipulator elements 1942 configured to perform manipulating (e.g., filtering, diverting, etc.) of light 1932 to generate manipulated light 1934.Light manipulator elements 1942 may optionally be configurable to adjust the manipulating performed byfirst light manipulator 1924.First light manipulator 1924 may perform filtering in a similar manner as an adaptable parallax barrier described above or in other manner. In another embodiment,first light manipulator 1924 may include a lenticular lens that diverts light 1932 to perform light manipulating, generating manipulated light 1934. In an embodiment, lightmanipulator driver circuitry 1914 may generatedrive signals 1954 based oncontrol signal 1908 received bydriver circuitry 1902 to causelight manipulator elements 1942 to manipulate light 1932 as desired. - Manipulated light 1934 is received by
second light manipulator 1926 to generate manipulated light 1936 that includes a plurality of three-dimensional images 1962A-1962N formed in aviewing space 1906. It will be recognized that manipulated light 1936 may include any number N of three-dimensional images. As shown inFIG. 19 ,second light manipulator 1926 includeslight manipulator elements 1944 configured to perform manipulating of manipulated light 1934 to generate manipulated light 1936.Light manipulator elements 1944 may optionally be configurable to adjust the manipulating performed bysecond light manipulator 1926. In an embodiment, lightmanipulator driver circuitry 1914 may generatedrive signals 1956 based oncontrol signal 1908 to causelight manipulator elements 1944 to manipulate manipulated light 1934 to generate manipulated light 1936 including three-dimensional images 1962A-1962N as desired. In embodiments,second light manipulator 1926 may include an adaptable parallax barrier or lenticular lens configured to manipulate manipulated light 1934 to generate manipulated light 1936. - As such,
screen 1904 ofdisplay system 1900 supports multiple viewers with media content in the form of three-dimensional images or views.Screen 1904 may provide a first three-dimensional view based on first three-dimensional media content to a first viewer, a second three-dimensional view based on second three-dimensional media content to a second viewer, and optionally further three-dimensional views based on further three-dimensional media content to further viewers. First andsecond light manipulators screen 1904, with each viewer being enabled to view corresponding media content without viewing media content directed to other viewers. Furthermore, the areas ofscreen 1904 that provide the various three-dimensional views of media content overlap each other at least in part. In the embodiment ofFIG. 19 , the areas may be the same area. As such, multiple three-dimensional views that are each viewable by a corresponding viewer may be delivered by a single screen. Embodiments ofdisplay system 1900 may also be configured to generate two-dimensional views, as well as any combination of one or more two-dimensional views simultaneously with one or more three-dimensional views. -
FIG. 20 shows a block diagram of anexemplary display system 2000, which is a further example of a display system that includes multiple light manipulator layers. Likedisplay system 1900 ofFIG. 19 ,display system 2000 is configured to display multiple three-dimensional images 2062A-2062N in aviewing space 2006 in a spatially separated manner. As shown inFIG. 20 ,display system 2000 includesdriver circuitry 2002 and ascreen 2004, whereinscreen 2004 includes alight generator 2022, afirst light manipulator 2024, asecond light manipulator 2026 and apixel array 2028. As shown inFIG. 20 ,light generator 2022 optionally includes abacklight array 2042,first light manipulator 2024 includes firstlight manipulator elements 2044, andsecond light manipulator 2026 includes secondlight manipulator elements 2046. Furthermore, as shown inFIG. 20 ,driver circuitry 2002 receivescontrol signals 2008 and includes lightgenerator driver circuitry 2012, lightmanipulator driver circuitry 2014, and pixelarray driver circuitry 2016. Control signals 2008 may be received via a pathway from processing circuitry, such asprocessing circuitry 162 ofFIG. 1A orprocessing circuitry 103 ofFIG. 1B , for example. Lightgenerator driver circuitry 2012, lightmanipulator driver circuitry 2014, and pixelarray driver circuitry 2016 may generate drive signals to perform their respective functions based on control signals 2008. As shown inFIG. 20 , first andsecond light manipulators light generator 2022 andpixel array 2028. In another embodiment,pixel array 2028 may instead be located between first andsecond light manipulators - This section describes exemplary systems and methods that support presentation of multi-path and multi-source viewing content. For example,
FIG. 21 is a block diagram of anexemplary system 2100 that supports presentation of three-dimensional viewing content based on portions thereof that are received from respective sources in accordance with an embodiment. As shown inFIG. 21 ,system 2100 includes afirst source 2102A, asecond source 2102B, amedia circuitry 2104, and ascreen 2106.First source 2102A provides first aview portion 2122A of three-dimensional (3D)viewing content 2134 via afirst pathway 2120A.First view portion 2122A represents a first subset of perspective views that are represented by the3D viewing content 2134.Second source 2102B provides asecond view portion 2122B of the3D viewing content 2134 via asecond pathway 2120B. Thesecond view portion 2122B represents a second subset of the perspective views that are represented by the3D viewing content 2134. Each of the first and second subsets may include any suitable number (1, 2, 3, 4, etc.) of the perspective views that are represented by the3D viewing content 2134. A number of the perspective views that are included in the first subset and a number of the perspective views that are included in the second subset may be the same or different. - In some embodiments,
second source 2102B provides a difference file in lieu of thesecond view portion 2122B. The difference file defines a difference between thefirst view portion 2122A and thesecond view portion 2122B. Although the following discussion refers repeatedly to thesecond view portion 2122B, it will be recognized that the discussion also applies ifsecond source 2102B provides the difference file in lieu of thesecond view portion 2122B. - Each of first and
second sources - Each of the first and
second pathways second pathways -
Media circuitry 2104 is configured to process the first andsecond view portions 3D viewing content 2134.Media circuitry 2104 includesfirst circuitry 2112,second circuitry 2114,third circuitry 2116, andfourth circuitry 2118.First circuitry 2112 receives the first andsecond view portions second view portions first circuitry 2112 may decode the first andsecond view portions second circuitry 2114. In accordance with this example, iffirst circuitry 2112 receives the difference file in lieu of thesecond view portion 2122B fromsecond source 2102B,first circuitry 2112 may decode thefirst view portion 2122A and the difference file in accordance with one or more techniques described in commonly-owned co-pending U.S. patent application Ser. No. ______, filed on even date herewith and entitled “Video Compression Supporting Selective Delivery of 2D, Stereoscopic 3D andMulti-View 3D Content,” the entirety of which is incorporated by reference herein. -
Second circuitry 2114 generates drive signal(s) 2124 based on the first andsecond view portions screen 2106 to support a visual presentation of the three-dimensional viewing content 2134. For example,second circuitry 2114 may include pixel array driver circuitry (e.g., pixelarray driver circuitry pixel array screen 2106. In another example,second circuitry 2114 may include light manipulator driver circuitry (e.g., adaptable parallaxbarrier driver circuitry manipulator driver circuitry 1914 or 2014) for controlling one or more light manipulators (e.g., adaptable parallax barrier(s) 124 and/or 1124, and/or light manipulator(s) 1924, 1926, 2024 and/or 2026) inscreen 2106. In yet another example,second circuitry 2114 may include light generator driver circuitry (e.g., lightgenerator driver circuitry 1112 or 2012) for controlling a light generator (e.g.,light generator 1122 or 2022) inscreen 2106. -
Second circuitry 2114 may synchronize thefirst view portion 2122A and thesecond view portion 2122B. Second circuitry may buffer thefirst view portion 2122A and/or thesecond view portion 2122B to perform the synchronization. Such buffering may enablesecond circuitry 2114 to shift thefirst view portion 2122A and/or thesecond view portion 2122B with respect to time to align frames that are included in thesecond view portion 2122B with corresponding frames that are included in thefirst view portion 2122A, or vice versa. In accordance with this example,second circuitry 2114 generates the drive signal(s) in response to synchronizing the first andsecond view portions -
Third circuitry 2116 responds to offers that are provided byoffer system 2108.Third circuitry 2116 receives the offers viafirst circuitry 2112. As shown inFIG. 21 ,first circuitry 2112 receives anoffer 2126 that relates tosecond view portion 2122B fromoffer system 2108.First circuitry 2112 forwards theoffer 2126 tothird circuitry 2116. In an example,third circuitry 2116 may determine whether to accept theoffer 2126 based on one or more predetermined criteria. Such criteria may require, for example, that a cost that is specified by theoffer 2126 be less than a cost threshold, that theoffer 2126 specify one or more perspective views represented by thesecond view portion 2122B that are included among one or more designated perspective views, etc. In another example,third circuitry 2116 may determine whether to accept theoffer 2126 based on input from a viewer. In accordance with this example,third circuitry 2116 may send a request regarding theoffer 2126 to the viewer and determine whether to accept theoffer 2126 based on the viewer's response to the request. -
Third circuitry 2116 is shown inFIG. 21 to provide anacceptance 2128 of theoffer 2126 to offersystem 2108 for purposes of illustration. Provision of theacceptance 2128 bythird circuitry 2116 may trigger any of a variety of events. For example,second source 2102B may provide thesecond view portion 2122B tofirst circuitry 2112 in response tothird circuitry 2116 providing theacceptance 2128. In another example,offer system 2108 may provide an enablingsignal 2132 tofirst circuitry 2112 that enablesmedia circuitry 2104 to access thesecond view portion 2122B in response tothird circuitry 2116 providing theacceptance 2128. For instance, the enablingsignal 2132 may include information, such as a passcode or a decryption key, thatfirst circuitry 2112 may use to obtain access to thesecond view portion 2122B. In yet another example,third circuitry 2116 may trigger a billing event regarding thesecond view portion 2122B based at least in part on provision of theacceptance 2128. For instance, the billing event may involve billing the viewer a cost that is specified in theoffer 2126. - The discussion above regarding the
offer 2132 and theacceptance 2128 is provided for illustrative purposes and is not intended to be limiting. It will be recognized thatsecond source 2102B may provide thesecond view portion 2122B tofirst circuitry 2112 regardless whether theoffer 2126 and theacceptance 2128 are present. Moreover,first circuitry 2112 may be capable of accessing thesecond view portion 2122B regardless whetherfirst circuitry 2112 receives the enablingsignal 2132. -
Fourth circuitry 2108 determines that thefirst view portion 2122A is received byfirst circuitry 2112. For instance,fourth circuitry 2108 may receive an indicator fromfirst circuitry 2112 that indicates receipt of thefirst view portion 2122A. Upon determining that thefirst view portion 2122A is received,fourth circuitry 2108 delivers anindication 2130 relating to thefirst view portion 2122A to offersystem 2108. Theindication 2130 indicates that thefirst view portion 2122A is received bymedia circuitry 2104. In an embodiment,first circuitry 2112 receives theoffer 2126 fromoffer system 2108 in response tofourth circuitry 2118 providing theindication 2130 to offersystem 2108. -
Offer system 2108 provides theoffer 2126 relating to thesecond view portion 2122B tofirst circuitry 2112.Offer system 2108 may receive theacceptance 2128 fromthird circuitry 2116 is response to providing theoffer 2126. In one embodiment, upon receiving theacceptance 2128,offer system 2108 provides theninstruction 2134 tosecond source 2102B. Theinstruction 2134 instructssecond source 2102B to deliver thesecond view portion 2122B tomedia circuitry 2104. Accordingly, second source may not deliver thesecond view portion 2122B tomedia circuitry 2104 until receipt of theinstruction 2134. In another embodiment, upon receiving theacceptance 2128,offer system 2108 provides the enablingsignal 2132 tofirst circuitry 2112 for enablingmedia circuitry 2104 to access thesecond view portion 2122B. - The output of
media circuitry 2104 comprises the drive signal(s) 2124.Screen 2106 presents the3D viewing content 2134 inviewing space 2110 based on the drive signal(s) 2124. As described above,screen 2106 may include a pixel array, one or more light manipulators, and/or a light generator for supporting presentation of the3D viewing content 2134.Screen 2106 may be any suitable type of screen, including but not limited to an LCD screen, a plasma screen, a light emitting device (LED) screen (e.g., an OLED (organic LED) screen), etc. - It will be recognized that although
first circuitry 2112,second circuitry 2114,third circuitry 2116, andfourth circuitry 2118 are labeled as such, the functionality offirst circuitry 2112,second circuitry 2114,third circuitry 2116, andfourth circuitry 2118 may be implemented in hardware, software, firmware, or any combination thereof. Moreover,system 2100 may not include one or more offirst source 2102A,second source 2102B,screen 2106,offer system 2108,first circuitry 2112,second circuitry 2114,third circuitry 2116, and/orfourth circuitry 2118. Furthermore,system 2100 may include elements in addition to or in lieu offirst source 2102A,second source 2102B,screen 2106,offer system 2108,first circuitry 2112,second circuitry 2114,third circuitry 2116, and/orfourth circuitry 2118. -
FIG. 22 is a block diagram of anotherexemplary system 2100 that supports presentation of three-dimensional viewing content based on portions thereof that are received from respective sources in accordance with an embodiment. As shown inFIG. 22 ,display system 2200 includes afirst source 2202A, asecond source 2202B,media circuitry 2204, and ascreen 2206. First andsecond sources screen 2206 operate in like manner to first andsecond sources screen 2106, as described above with reference toFIG. 21 . For instance, first andsecond sources second view portions second pathways media circuitry 2104.Screen 2206 presents3D viewing content 2234 inviewing space 2210 based on drive signal(s) 2224 that are received frommedia circuitry 2204. -
Media circuitry 2204 includesfirst circuitry 2212,second circuitry 2214, andthird circuitry 2216. First andsecond circuitry second circuitry FIG. 21 . For instance,first circuitry 2212 receives the first andsecond view portions second sources Second circuitry 2214 generates the drive signal(s) 2224 based on the first andsecond view portions -
First circuitry 2212 is shown inFIG. 22 to receive acontrol signal 2236, asearch instruction 2238, and anorientation indication 2240 for illustrative purposes. It will be recognized thatfirst circuitry 2212 need not necessarily receive each of thecontrol signal 2236, thesearch instruction 2238, and theorientation indication 2240. For instance, first circuitry may receive any one or more of thecontrol signal 2236, thesearch instruction 2238, and/or theorientation indication 2240. - The
control signal 2236 is generated in response to viewer input. For instance, thecontrol signal 2236 may specify one or more portions or perspective views that are identified by the viewer input.First circuitry 2212 may receive thecontrol signal 2236 from a user input interface that is accessible to the viewer. The user input interface may be a remote control device, a traditional computer input device such as a keyboard or mouse, a touch screen, a gamepad or other type of gaming console input device, or one or more sensors including but not limited to video cameras, microphones and motion sensors. In an embodiment,third circuitry 2216 selects thesecond view portion 2222B based on thecontrol signal 2236. For instance,third circuitry 2216 may review available portions of content to identify the portion(s) that are specified by thecontrol signal 2236 or that represent perspective views that are specified by thecontrol signal 2236. In accordance with this embodiment,third circuitry 2216 may select thesecond view portion 2222B in response to thesecond view portion 2222B including the identified portion(s). - The
search instruction 2238 is intended to initiate a search for portion(s) of content that may be combined with thefirst view portion 2222A for presentation of the3D viewing content 2234. Thesearch instruction 2238 may be generated by a user input interface in response to viewer input, for example. In an embodiment,third circuitry 2216 initiates the search based on thesearch instruction 2238. In accordance with this embodiment,first circuitry 2212 may receive thesecond view portion 2222B in response to initiation of the search. - The
orientation indication 2240 indicates an orientation of the viewer with respect toscreen 2206. For example, theorientation indication 2240 may be received from a device that is worn by the viewer, held by the viewer, sitting in the viewer's lap, in the viewer's pocket, sitting next the viewer, etc. In another example, theorientation indication 2240 may be received in response to a distancing signal that is transmitted toward the viewer bythird circuitry 2216. In accordance with this example,third circuitry 2216 may determine an orientation (e.g., location) of the viewer based on a difference between a time at whichthird circuitry 2216 transmits the distancing signal and a time at which third circuitry receives theorientation indication 2240. For instance, a reflection of the distancing signal from the viewer may be received bythird circuitry 2216 as theorientation indication 2240. - In an embodiment,
third circuitry 2216 selects thesecond view portion 2222B based on the orientation of the viewer, as indicated by theorientation indication 2240. As shown inFIG. 22 ,third circuitry 2216 provides aselection instruction 2242 tosecond source 2202B. Theselection instruction 2242 instructssecond source 2202B to provide thesecond view portion 2222B tomedia circuitry 2204. - In an example, if the
orientation indication 2240 indicates that the orientation of the viewer is toward a left side ofscreen 2206,third circuitry 2216 may select thesecond view portion 2222B based on thesecond view portion 2222B representing perspective views that facilitate a left-oriented viewing experience, such as perspective views 1, 2, and 4 of 3D8 viewing content. In accordance with this example, if thefirst view portion 2222A represents a single perspective view, such as perspective view 3, the3D viewing content 2234 may be presented as 3D4 viewing content that represents perspective views 1, 2, 3, and 4. - In another example, if the
orientation indication 2240 indicates that the orientation of the viewer is substantially aligned with a center ofscreen 2206,third circuitry 2216 may select thesecond view portion 2222B based on thesecond view portion 2222B representing perspective views that facilitate a center-oriented viewing experience, such as perspective views 4, 6, 8, 10, 12, and 14 of 3D16 viewing content. In accordance with this example, if thefirst view portion 2222A represents two perspective views, such as perspective views 5 and 9, the3D viewing content 2234 may be presented as 3D8 viewing content that represents perspective views 4, 5, 6, 8, 9, 10, 12, and 14. - In yet another example, if the
orientation indication 2240 indicates that the orientation of the viewer is toward a right side ofscreen 2206,third circuitry 2216 may select the second view portion 2222 based on the second view portion 2222 representing perspective views that facilitate a right-oriented viewing experience, such as perspective views 9, 11, 13, and 15 of 3D16 viewing content. In accordance with this example, if thefirst view portion 2222A represents four perspective views (e.g., perspective views 8, 10, 12, and 14), the3D viewing content 2234 may be presented as 3D8 viewing content that represents perspective views 8, 9, 10, 11, 12, 13, 14, and 15. The examples provided herein are merely teaching examples and are not intended to be limiting. - Presentation of multi-path and multi-source viewing content may be supported in a variety of ways according to embodiments. For instance,
FIGS. 23-29 depictsflowcharts Flowcharts system 2100 shown inFIG. 21 orsystem 2200 shown inFIG. 22 , for example. However the methods offlowcharts discussion regarding flowcharts - As shown in
FIG. 23 ,flowchart 2300 begins withstep 2302. Instep 2302, a first data portion of three-dimensional viewing content is received via a first pathway. The first data portion originates from a first source. The first data portion is associated with a first perspective view. For instance, the first data portion may comprise a two-dimensional portion of the three-dimensional viewing content, though the scope of the embodiments is not limited in this respect. In an exemplary implementation,first circuitry first view portion 3D viewing content first pathway First view portion first source - At
step 2304, a second data portion of the three-dimensional viewing content is received via a second pathway. The second data portion originates from a second source. The second data portion is associated with a second perspective view. In an exemplary implementation,first circuitry second view portion 3D viewing content second pathway Second view portion second source - At
step 2306, a visual presentation of the three-dimensional viewing content is caused based on both the first data portion and the second data portion. In an exemplary implementation,second circuitry 3D viewing content first view portion second view portion - In an embodiment, instead of performing
step 2304 offlowchart 2300, the steps shown inflowchart 2400 orflowchart 2500 of respectiveFIG. 24 or 25 may be performed. As shown inFIG. 24 ,flowchart 2400 begins at step 2402. In step 2402, a search for a second data portion of the three-dimensional viewing content is initiated in response to a search instruction. In an exemplary implementation,third circuitry 2216 initiates a search forsecond view portion 2222B in response tosearch instruction 2238. - At
step 2404, the second data portion is received via a second pathway in response to initiating the search. The second data portion originates from a second source. The second data portion is associated with a second perspective view. In an exemplary implementation,first circuitry 2212second view portion 2222B. - As shown in
FIG. 25 ,flowchart 2500 begins atstep 2502. Instep 2502, an offer relating to a second data portion of the three-dimensional viewing content is received. In an exemplary implementation,first circuitry 2112 receivesoffer 2126 relating tosecond view portion 2122B. - At
step 2504, acceptance of the offer is carried out. For instance, carrying out the acceptance of the offer may trigger a billing event regarding the second data portion. In an exemplary implementation,third circuitry 2116 carries out acceptance ofoffer 2126. For instance,Third circuitry 2116 may provideacceptance 2128 to acceptoffer 2126. - At
step 2506, the second data portion is received via a second pathway. The second data portion originates from a second source. The second data portion is associated with a second perspective view. In an exemplary implementation,first circuitry 2112 receivessecond view portion 2122B viasecond pathway 2120B. - In an embodiment, instead of performing
step 2502 offlowchart 2500, the steps shown in flowchart 2600 ofFIG. 26 may be performed. As shown inFIG. 26 , flowchart 2600 begins atstep 2602. Instep 2602, an indication relating to the first data portion is delivered. In an exemplary implementation,fourth circuitry 2118 deliversindication 2130 relating tofirst view portion 2122A. - At
step 2604, an offer relating to a second data portion of the three-dimensional viewing content is received. The offer is based at least in part on the indication. In an exemplary implementation,first circuitry 2112 receivesoffer 2126 relating tosecond view portion 2122B. -
Flowchart 2300 ofFIG. 3 may further include the step shown inflowchart 2700 ofFIG. 27 or the step shown inflowchart 2800 ofFIG. 28 . As shown inFIG. 27 ,flowchart 2700 includesstep 2702. Atstep 2702, the second data portion is selected based on an orientation of a viewer with respect to a screen assembly that supports the visual presentation of the three-dimensional viewing content. In an exemplary implementation,third circuitry 2216 selectssecond view portion 2222B based on an orientation of a viewer with respect toscreen 2206, which supports visual presentation of3D viewing content 2234. - As shown in
FIG. 28 ,flowchart 2800 includesstep 2802. Atstep 2802, the second data portion is selected based on viewer input. In an exemplary implementation,third circuitry 2216 selectssecond view portion 2222B based oncontrol signal 2236, which is generated in response to viewer input. -
FIG. 29 depicts an exemplary implementation of the method offlowchart 2300 in accordance with an embodiment. As shown inFIG. 29 , flowchart 2900 begins atstep 2902. Instep 2902, a first data portion of three-dimensional viewing content that comprises a two-dimensional portion is received via a first pathway. The first data portion is associated with a single first perspective view. The first data portion originates from a storage that is local to a device that causes a visual presentation of the three-dimensional viewing content. In an exemplary implementation,first circuitry first view portion first pathway first view portion first view portion first source media circuitry - At
step 2904, a second data portion of the three-dimensional viewing content is received via a second pathway. The second data portion is associated with at least one second perspective view. The second data portion originates from a second source. In an exemplary implementation,first circuitry second view portion second pathway second view portion second view portion second source second source media circuitry - At step 2906, the visual presentation of the three-dimensional viewing content is caused based on both the first data portion and the second data portion. The three-dimensional viewing content represents at least two perspective views. In an exemplary implementation,
second circuitry 3D viewing content first view portion second view portion 3D viewing content -
FIG. 30 is a block diagram of anexemplary system 3000 that directs configurations of respective regions of a screen assembly to support display of respective instances of content in accordance with an embodiment. As shown inFIG. 30 ,system 3000 includesfirst source 3002A,second source 3002B,media system 3004, andscreen 3006.First source 3002A provides afirst content instance 3022A via afirst pathway 3020A.Second source 3002B provides asecond content instance 3022B via asecond pathway 3020B. Each of the first andsecond content instances first content instance 3022A and a number of perspective views represented by thesecond content instance 3022B may be the same or different. -
First source 3002A and/orsecond source 3002B may include multiple sources. For example, portions of thefirst content instance 3022A may be provided by respective sources that are included infirst source 3002A. Each portion of thefirst content instance 3022A may represent a respective subset of the perspective views that are represented by thefirst content instance 3022A. In another example, portions of thesecond content instance 3022B may be provided by respective sources that are included insecond source 3002B. Each portion of thesecond content instance 3022B may represent a respective subset of the perspective views that are represented by thesecond content instance 3022B. -
Media circuitry 3004 includesfirst circuitry 3012 andsecond circuitry 3014.First circuitry 3012 receives the first andsecond content instances second content instances first circuitry 3012 may decode the first andsecond content instances second circuitry 3014. -
Second circuitry 3014 generates first drive signal(s) 3024A to direct a first configuration of afirst region 3044A ofscreen 3006. The first configuration supports display of thefirst content instance 3022A.Second circuitry 3014 further generates second drive signal(s) 3024B to direct a second configuration of asecond region 3044B ofscreen 3006. The second configuration supports display of thesecond content instance 3022B. The second configuration is different from the first configuration. - For example,
second circuitry 3014 may include pixel array driver circuitry (e.g., pixelarray driver circuitry second circuitry 3014 may include light manipulator driver circuitry (e.g., adaptable parallaxbarrier driver circuitry manipulator driver circuitry 1914 or 2014) for generating light manipulator drive signals (e.g., drive signals 154, 1154, 1954, and/or 1956). In yet another example,second circuitry 3014 may include light generator driver circuitry (e.g., lightgenerator driver circuitry 1112 or 2012) for generating light generator drive signals (e.g., drive signals 1152). Any of the aforementioned drive signals may be included among the first and second drive signal(s) 3024A and 3024B. -
Screen 3006 includesfirst region 3044A andsecond region 3044B. The first andsecond regions pixel array light generator 1122 or 2022). For instance, the first drive signal(s) 3024A may be configured to control configurations of the portions of the pixel array, light manipulator(s), and/or light generator that are included infirst region 3044A. The second drive signal(s) 3024B may be configured to control configurations of the portions of the pixel array, light manipulator(s), and/or light generator that are included insecond region 3044B. -
FIG. 31 depicts aflowchart 3100 of a method for directing configurations of respective regions of a screen assembly for supporting display of respective instances of content in accordance with embodiments. As shown inFIG. 31 ,flowchart 3100 begins atstep 3102. Instep 3102, first viewing content that originates from a first source is received via a first pathway. In an exemplary implementation,first circuitry 3012 receivesfirst content instance 3022A viafirst pathway 3020A. In accordance with this implementation, thefirst content instance 3022A originates fromfirst source 3002A. - At
step 3104, second viewing content that originates from a second source is received via a second pathway. In an exemplary implementation,first circuitry 3012 receivessecond content instance 3022B viasecond pathway 3020B. In accordance with this implementation, thesecond content instance 3022B originates fromsecond source 3002B. - In an embodiment, the first pathway comprises a local pathway, and the second pathway comprises a remote pathway. A local pathway is a pathway from a local source. A remote pathway is a pathway from a remote source. Examples of a remote source include but are not limited to a broadcast media server or an on-demand media server. Examples of a local source include but are not limited to a disc player (e.g., a DVD player, a CD player, or Blu-Ray disc player), a personal computer (e.g., a desktop computer, a laptop computer, or a tablet computer), a personal media player, or a smart phone.
- In another embodiment, the first viewing content is two-dimensional content, and the second viewing content is three-dimensional content. In accordance with this embodiment, the first viewing content represents a single perspective view. In further accordance with this embodiment, the second viewing content represents multiple views, any two of which may be combined for perception as three-dimensional image(s).
- In yet another embodiment, the first viewing content is first three-dimensional content, and the second viewing content is second three-dimensional content. The first three-dimensional content may represent a first number of perspectives, and the second three-dimensional content may represent a second number of perspectives. The first number may be different from or the same as the first number.
- The second viewing content may be related to the first viewing content or unrelated to the first viewing content. If the first viewing content and the second viewing content correspond to a common video event, the first viewing content and the second viewing content are said to be related. Otherwise, the first viewing content and the second viewing content are said to be unrelated.
- At
step 3106, a first configuration of a first region of a screen assembly is directed. The first configuration supports display of the first viewing content. In an exemplary implementation,second circuitry 3014 directs a first configuration offirst region 3044A ofscreen 3006. In accordance with this implementation, the first configuration offirst region 3044A supports display offirst content instance 3022A. - At
step 3108, a second configuration of a second region of the screen assembly is directed. The second configuration supports display of the second viewing content. The second configuration is different from the first configuration. In an exemplary implementation,second circuitry 3014 directs a second configuration ofsecond region 3044B ofscreen 3006 that is different from the first configuration offirst region 3044A. In accordance with this implementation, the second configuration ofsecond region 3044B supports display ofsecond content instance 3022B. -
FIG. 32 is a block diagram of an example practical implementation of a display system 3200 in accordance with an embodiment. As shown inFIG. 32 , display system 3200 generally comprisescontrol circuitry 3202,driver circuitry 3204 and ascreen 3206. - As shown in
FIG. 32 ,control circuitry 3202 includes aprocessing unit 3214, which may comprise one or more general-purpose or special-purpose processors or one or more processing cores.Processing unit 3214 is connected to acommunication infrastructure 3212, such as a communication bus.Control circuitry 3202 may also include a primary or main memory (not shown inFIG. 32 ), such as random access memory (RAM), that is connected tocommunication infrastructure 3212. The main memory may have control logic stored thereon for execution byprocessing unit 3214 as well as data stored thereon that may be input to or output byprocessing unit 3214 during execution of such control logic. -
Control circuitry 3202 may also include one or more secondary storage devices (not shown inFIG. 32 ) that are connected tocommunication infrastructure 3212, including but not limited to a hard disk drive, a removable storage drive (such as an optical disk drive, a floppy disk drive, a magnetic tape drive, or the like), or an interface for communicating with a removable storage unit such as an interface for communicating with a memory card, memory stick or the like. Each of these secondary storage devices provide an additional means for storing control logic for execution byprocessing unit 3214 as well as data that may be input to or output byprocessing unit 3214 during execution of such control logic. -
Control circuitry 3202 further includes a user input interface 3218, aviewer tracking unit 3216, and amedia interface 3220. User input interface 3218 is intended to generally represent any type of interface that may be used to receive user input, including but not limited to a remote control device, a traditional computer input device such as a keyboard or mouse, a touch screen, a gamepad or other type of gaming console input device, or one or more sensors including but not limited to video cameras, microphones and motion sensors. -
Viewer tracking unit 3216 is intended to generally represent any type of functionality for determining or estimating a location of one or more viewers of display system 3200 and/or a head orientation of one or more viewers of display system 3200. Viewer tracking unit may perform such functions using different types of sensors (e.g., cameras, motion sensors, microphones or the like) or by using tracking systems such as those that wirelessly track an object (e.g., headset, remote control, or the like) currently being held or worn by a viewer. -
Media interface 3220 is intended to represent any type of interface that is capable of receiving media content such as video content or image content. In certain implementations,media interface 3220 may comprise an interface for receiving media content from a remote source such as a broadcast media server, an on-demand media server, or the like. In such implementations,media interface 3220 may comprise, for example and without limitation, a wired or wireless internet or intranet connection, a satellite interface, a fiber interface, a coaxial cable interface, or a fiber-coaxial cable interface.Media interface 3220 may also comprise an interface for receiving media content from a local source such as a DVD or Blu-Ray disc player, a personal computer, a personal media player, smart phone, or the like.Media interface 3220 may be capable of retrieving video content from multiple sources. -
Control circuitry 3202 further includes acommunication interface 3222.Communication interface 3222 enablescontrol circuitry 3202 to send control signals via acommunication medium 3252 to anothercommunication interface 3230 withindriver circuitry 3204, thereby enablingcontrol circuitry 3202 to control the operation ofdriver circuitry 3204.Communication medium 3252 may comprise any kind of wired or wireless communication medium suitable for transmitting such control signals. - As shown in
FIG. 32 ,driver circuitry 3204 includes theaforementioned communication interface 3230 as well as pixelarray driver circuitry 3232 and adaptable lightmanipulator driver circuitry 3234. Driver circuitry also optionally includes lightgenerator driver circuitry 3236. Each of these driver circuitry elements is configured to receive control signals from control circuitry 3202 (via the link betweencommunication interface 3222 and communication interface 3230) and, responsive thereto, to send selected drive signals to a corresponding hardware element withinscreen 3206, the drive signals causing the corresponding hardware element to operate in a particular manner. In particular, pixelarray driver circuitry 3232 is configured to send selected drive signals to apixel array 3242 withinscreen 3206, adaptable lightmanipulator driver circuitry 3234 is configured to send selected drive signals to anadaptable light manipulator 3244 withinscreen elements 3206, and optional lightgenerator driver circuitry 3236 is configured to send selected drive signals to anoptional light generator 3246 withinscreen 3206. - In one example mode of operation,
processing unit 3214 operates pursuant to control logic to receive video content viamedia interface 3220 and to generate control signals necessary to causedriver circuitry 3204 to render such video content to screen 3206 in accordance with a selected viewing configuration. The control logic that is executed byprocessing unit 3214 may be retrieved, for example, from a primary memory or a secondary storage device connected toprocessing unit 3214 viacommunication infrastructure 3212 as discussed above. The control logic may also be retrieved from some other local or remote source. Where the control logic is stored on a computer readable medium, that computer readable medium may be referred to herein as a computer program product. - Among other features,
driver circuitry 3204 may be controlled in a manner previously described to send coordinated drive signals necessary for simultaneously displaying two-dimensional images, three-dimensional images and multi-view three-dimensional content via different display regions of the screen. The manner in whichpixel array 3242, adaptable light manipulator 3244 (e.g., an adaptable parallax barrier), andlight generator 3246 may be manipulated in a coordinated fashion to perform this function was described previously herein. Note that in accordance with certain implementations (e.g., implementations in which pixel array comprises an OLED/PLED pixel array),screen 3206 need not includelight generator 3246. - In one embodiment, at least part of the function of generating control signals necessary to cause
pixel array 3242,adaptable light manipulator 3244 andlight generator 3246 to render video content to screen 3206 in accordance with a selected viewing configuration is performed by drivesignal processing circuitry 3238 which is integrated withindriver circuitry 3204. Such circuitry may operate, for example, in conjunction with and/or under the control ofprocessing unit 3214 to generate the necessary control signals. - In certain implementations,
control circuitry 3202,driver circuitry 3204 andscreen elements 3206 are all included within a single housing. For example and without limitation, all these elements may exist within a television, a laptop computer, a tablet computer, or a telephone. In accordance with such an implementation, thelink 3252 formed betweencommunication interfaces driver circuitry 3204 andcommunication infrastructure 3212. In an alternate implementation,control circuitry 3202 is disposed within a first housing, such as set top box or personal computer, anddriver circuitry 3204 andscreen 3206 are disposed within a second housing, such as a television or computer monitor. The set top box may be any type of set top box including but not limited to fiber, Internet, cable, satellite, or terrestrial digital. - While various embodiments of the present invention have been described above, it should be understood that they have been presented by way of example only, and not limitation. It will be apparent to persons skilled in the relevant art that various changes in form and detail can be made therein without departing from the spirit and scope of the invention. Thus, the breadth and scope of the present invention should not be limited by any of the above-described exemplary embodiments, but should be defined only in accordance with the following claims and their equivalents.
Claims (28)
Priority Applications (6)
Application Number | Priority Date | Filing Date | Title |
---|---|---|---|
US12/982,330 US20110157326A1 (en) | 2009-12-31 | 2010-12-30 | Multi-path and multi-source 3d content storage, retrieval, and delivery |
US13/220,601 US8897377B2 (en) | 2009-12-31 | 2011-08-29 | Transcoding multiple media elements for independent wireless delivery |
US13/285,644 US9406252B2 (en) | 2009-12-31 | 2011-10-31 | Adaptive multi-standard video coder supporting adaptive standard selection and mid-stream switch-over |
US13/285,861 US20120047535A1 (en) | 2009-12-31 | 2011-10-31 | Streaming transcoder with adaptive upstream & downstream transcode coordination |
US13/285,779 US20120044987A1 (en) | 2009-12-31 | 2011-10-31 | Entropy coder supporting selective employment of syntax and context adaptation |
US14/551,216 US9351010B2 (en) | 2009-12-31 | 2014-11-24 | Transcoding multiple media elements for independent wireless delivery |
Applications Claiming Priority (3)
Application Number | Priority Date | Filing Date | Title |
---|---|---|---|
US29181809P | 2009-12-31 | 2009-12-31 | |
US30311910P | 2010-02-10 | 2010-02-10 | |
US12/982,330 US20110157326A1 (en) | 2009-12-31 | 2010-12-30 | Multi-path and multi-source 3d content storage, retrieval, and delivery |
Related Child Applications (2)
Application Number | Title | Priority Date | Filing Date |
---|---|---|---|
US12/982,199 Continuation-In-Part US8988506B2 (en) | 2009-12-31 | 2010-12-30 | Transcoder supporting selective delivery of 2D, stereoscopic 3D, and multi-view 3D content from source video |
US13/220,601 Continuation-In-Part US8897377B2 (en) | 2009-12-31 | 2011-08-29 | Transcoding multiple media elements for independent wireless delivery |
Publications (1)
Publication Number | Publication Date |
---|---|
US20110157326A1 true US20110157326A1 (en) | 2011-06-30 |
Family
ID=43797724
Family Applications (27)
Application Number | Title | Priority Date | Filing Date |
---|---|---|---|
US12/774,307 Active 2032-01-14 US8964013B2 (en) | 2009-12-31 | 2010-05-05 | Display with elastic light manipulator |
US12/774,225 Abandoned US20110157322A1 (en) | 2009-12-31 | 2010-05-05 | Controlling a pixel array to support an adaptable light manipulator |
US12/845,461 Active 2031-10-30 US8767050B2 (en) | 2009-12-31 | 2010-07-28 | Display supporting multiple simultaneous 3D views |
US12/845,440 Abandoned US20110157697A1 (en) | 2009-12-31 | 2010-07-28 | Adaptable parallax barrier supporting mixed 2d and stereoscopic 3d display regions |
US12/845,409 Abandoned US20110157696A1 (en) | 2009-12-31 | 2010-07-28 | Display with adaptable parallax barrier |
US12/982,140 Abandoned US20110161843A1 (en) | 2009-12-31 | 2010-12-30 | Internet browser and associated content definition supporting mixed two and three dimensional displays |
US12/982,031 Active 2032-12-14 US9019263B2 (en) | 2009-12-31 | 2010-12-30 | Coordinated driving of adaptable light manipulator, backlighting and pixel array in support of adaptable 2D and 3D displays |
US12/982,309 Active 2033-05-02 US9204138B2 (en) | 2009-12-31 | 2010-12-30 | User controlled regional display of mixed two and three dimensional content |
US12/982,053 Abandoned US20110157309A1 (en) | 2009-12-31 | 2010-12-30 | Hierarchical video compression supporting selective delivery of two-dimensional and three-dimensional video content |
US12/982,248 Abandoned US20110157315A1 (en) | 2009-12-31 | 2010-12-30 | Interpolation of three-dimensional video content |
US12/982,377 Abandoned US20110157327A1 (en) | 2009-12-31 | 2010-12-30 | 3d audio delivery accompanying 3d display supported by viewer/listener position and orientation tracking |
US12/982,199 Active 2032-09-27 US8988506B2 (en) | 2009-12-31 | 2010-12-30 | Transcoder supporting selective delivery of 2D, stereoscopic 3D, and multi-view 3D content from source video |
US12/982,273 Active 2032-08-13 US9979954B2 (en) | 2009-12-31 | 2010-12-30 | Eyewear with time shared viewing supporting delivery of differing content to multiple viewers |
US12/982,047 Abandoned US20110157330A1 (en) | 2009-12-31 | 2010-12-30 | 2d/3d projection system |
US12/982,088 Active 2032-01-06 US9066092B2 (en) | 2009-12-31 | 2010-12-30 | Communication infrastructure including simultaneous video pathways for multi-viewer support |
US12/982,362 Active 2031-02-05 US9049440B2 (en) | 2009-12-31 | 2010-12-30 | Independent viewer tailoring of same media source content via a common 2D-3D display |
US12/982,156 Active 2035-11-09 US9654767B2 (en) | 2009-12-31 | 2010-12-30 | Programming architecture supporting mixed two and three dimensional displays |
US12/982,330 Abandoned US20110157326A1 (en) | 2009-12-31 | 2010-12-30 | Multi-path and multi-source 3d content storage, retrieval, and delivery |
US12/982,124 Active 2033-02-08 US9124885B2 (en) | 2009-12-31 | 2010-12-30 | Operating system supporting mixed 2D, stereoscopic 3D and multi-view 3D displays |
US12/982,020 Abandoned US20110157257A1 (en) | 2009-12-31 | 2010-12-30 | Backlighting array supporting adaptable parallax barrier |
US12/982,173 Active 2033-08-22 US9143770B2 (en) | 2009-12-31 | 2010-12-30 | Application programming interface supporting mixed two and three dimensional displays |
US12/982,069 Active 2033-05-07 US8922545B2 (en) | 2009-12-31 | 2010-12-30 | Three-dimensional display system with adaptation based on viewing reference of viewer(s) |
US12/982,212 Active 2032-04-05 US9013546B2 (en) | 2009-12-31 | 2010-12-30 | Adaptable media stream servicing two and three dimensional content |
US12/982,062 Active 2032-06-13 US8687042B2 (en) | 2009-12-31 | 2010-12-30 | Set-top box circuitry supporting 2D and 3D content reductions to accommodate viewing environment constraints |
US14/504,095 Abandoned US20150015668A1 (en) | 2009-12-31 | 2014-10-01 | Three-dimensional display system with adaptation based on viewing reference of viewer(s) |
US14/616,130 Abandoned US20150156473A1 (en) | 2009-12-31 | 2015-02-06 | Transcoder supporting selective delivery of 2d, stereoscopic 3d, and multi-view 3d content from source video |
US14/723,922 Abandoned US20150264341A1 (en) | 2009-12-31 | 2015-05-28 | Communication infrastructure including simultaneous video pathways for multi-viewer support |
Family Applications Before (17)
Application Number | Title | Priority Date | Filing Date |
---|---|---|---|
US12/774,307 Active 2032-01-14 US8964013B2 (en) | 2009-12-31 | 2010-05-05 | Display with elastic light manipulator |
US12/774,225 Abandoned US20110157322A1 (en) | 2009-12-31 | 2010-05-05 | Controlling a pixel array to support an adaptable light manipulator |
US12/845,461 Active 2031-10-30 US8767050B2 (en) | 2009-12-31 | 2010-07-28 | Display supporting multiple simultaneous 3D views |
US12/845,440 Abandoned US20110157697A1 (en) | 2009-12-31 | 2010-07-28 | Adaptable parallax barrier supporting mixed 2d and stereoscopic 3d display regions |
US12/845,409 Abandoned US20110157696A1 (en) | 2009-12-31 | 2010-07-28 | Display with adaptable parallax barrier |
US12/982,140 Abandoned US20110161843A1 (en) | 2009-12-31 | 2010-12-30 | Internet browser and associated content definition supporting mixed two and three dimensional displays |
US12/982,031 Active 2032-12-14 US9019263B2 (en) | 2009-12-31 | 2010-12-30 | Coordinated driving of adaptable light manipulator, backlighting and pixel array in support of adaptable 2D and 3D displays |
US12/982,309 Active 2033-05-02 US9204138B2 (en) | 2009-12-31 | 2010-12-30 | User controlled regional display of mixed two and three dimensional content |
US12/982,053 Abandoned US20110157309A1 (en) | 2009-12-31 | 2010-12-30 | Hierarchical video compression supporting selective delivery of two-dimensional and three-dimensional video content |
US12/982,248 Abandoned US20110157315A1 (en) | 2009-12-31 | 2010-12-30 | Interpolation of three-dimensional video content |
US12/982,377 Abandoned US20110157327A1 (en) | 2009-12-31 | 2010-12-30 | 3d audio delivery accompanying 3d display supported by viewer/listener position and orientation tracking |
US12/982,199 Active 2032-09-27 US8988506B2 (en) | 2009-12-31 | 2010-12-30 | Transcoder supporting selective delivery of 2D, stereoscopic 3D, and multi-view 3D content from source video |
US12/982,273 Active 2032-08-13 US9979954B2 (en) | 2009-12-31 | 2010-12-30 | Eyewear with time shared viewing supporting delivery of differing content to multiple viewers |
US12/982,047 Abandoned US20110157330A1 (en) | 2009-12-31 | 2010-12-30 | 2d/3d projection system |
US12/982,088 Active 2032-01-06 US9066092B2 (en) | 2009-12-31 | 2010-12-30 | Communication infrastructure including simultaneous video pathways for multi-viewer support |
US12/982,362 Active 2031-02-05 US9049440B2 (en) | 2009-12-31 | 2010-12-30 | Independent viewer tailoring of same media source content via a common 2D-3D display |
US12/982,156 Active 2035-11-09 US9654767B2 (en) | 2009-12-31 | 2010-12-30 | Programming architecture supporting mixed two and three dimensional displays |
Family Applications After (9)
Application Number | Title | Priority Date | Filing Date |
---|---|---|---|
US12/982,124 Active 2033-02-08 US9124885B2 (en) | 2009-12-31 | 2010-12-30 | Operating system supporting mixed 2D, stereoscopic 3D and multi-view 3D displays |
US12/982,020 Abandoned US20110157257A1 (en) | 2009-12-31 | 2010-12-30 | Backlighting array supporting adaptable parallax barrier |
US12/982,173 Active 2033-08-22 US9143770B2 (en) | 2009-12-31 | 2010-12-30 | Application programming interface supporting mixed two and three dimensional displays |
US12/982,069 Active 2033-05-07 US8922545B2 (en) | 2009-12-31 | 2010-12-30 | Three-dimensional display system with adaptation based on viewing reference of viewer(s) |
US12/982,212 Active 2032-04-05 US9013546B2 (en) | 2009-12-31 | 2010-12-30 | Adaptable media stream servicing two and three dimensional content |
US12/982,062 Active 2032-06-13 US8687042B2 (en) | 2009-12-31 | 2010-12-30 | Set-top box circuitry supporting 2D and 3D content reductions to accommodate viewing environment constraints |
US14/504,095 Abandoned US20150015668A1 (en) | 2009-12-31 | 2014-10-01 | Three-dimensional display system with adaptation based on viewing reference of viewer(s) |
US14/616,130 Abandoned US20150156473A1 (en) | 2009-12-31 | 2015-02-06 | Transcoder supporting selective delivery of 2d, stereoscopic 3d, and multi-view 3d content from source video |
US14/723,922 Abandoned US20150264341A1 (en) | 2009-12-31 | 2015-05-28 | Communication infrastructure including simultaneous video pathways for multi-viewer support |
Country Status (5)
Country | Link |
---|---|
US (27) | US8964013B2 (en) |
EP (4) | EP2357630A1 (en) |
CN (3) | CN102183840A (en) |
HK (1) | HK1161754A1 (en) |
TW (3) | TWI467234B (en) |
Cited By (14)
Publication number | Priority date | Publication date | Assignee | Title |
---|---|---|---|---|
US20110164115A1 (en) * | 2009-12-31 | 2011-07-07 | Broadcom Corporation | Transcoder supporting selective delivery of 2d, stereoscopic 3d, and multi-view 3d content from source video |
US20110164188A1 (en) * | 2009-12-31 | 2011-07-07 | Broadcom Corporation | Remote control with integrated position, viewer identification and optical and audio test |
US20120249872A1 (en) * | 2011-03-28 | 2012-10-04 | Sony Corporation | Video signal processing apparatus and video signal processing method |
US20130009921A1 (en) * | 2011-07-06 | 2013-01-10 | Sony Corporation | Display control device, display control method, and computer program |
US20140036044A1 (en) * | 2012-08-03 | 2014-02-06 | Samsung Electronics Co., Ltd. | Display apparatus which displays a plurality of content views, glasses apparatus which synchronizes with one of the content views, and methods thereof |
US8854531B2 (en) | 2009-12-31 | 2014-10-07 | Broadcom Corporation | Multiple remote controllers that each simultaneously controls a different visual presentation of a 2D/3D display |
US20150042557A1 (en) * | 2012-03-07 | 2015-02-12 | Sony Corporation | Information processing apparatus, information processing method, and program |
TWI510813B (en) * | 2013-06-18 | 2015-12-01 | Zhangjiagang Kangde Xin Optronics Material Co Ltd | A liquid crystal parallax barrier device that displays three-dimensional images in both directions |
US9247286B2 (en) | 2009-12-31 | 2016-01-26 | Broadcom Corporation | Frame formatting supporting mixed two and three dimensional video data communication |
US20160237030A1 (en) * | 2013-10-12 | 2016-08-18 | Zhejiang Hisun Pharmaceutical Co., Ltd. | Synthetic intermediate of maxacalcitol, preparation method therefor and use thereof |
US20170148488A1 (en) * | 2015-11-20 | 2017-05-25 | Mediatek Inc. | Video data processing system and associated method for analyzing and summarizing recorded video data |
US10802324B2 (en) | 2017-03-14 | 2020-10-13 | Boe Technology Group Co., Ltd. | Double vision display method and device |
CN113383540A (en) * | 2019-01-23 | 2021-09-10 | 奥崔迪合作公司 | Interoperable 3D image content processing |
CN113453939A (en) * | 2019-02-12 | 2021-09-28 | 株式会社日本显示器 | Display device |
Families Citing this family (501)
Publication number | Priority date | Publication date | Assignee | Title |
---|---|---|---|---|
US8416217B1 (en) | 2002-11-04 | 2013-04-09 | Neonode Inc. | Light-based finger gesture user interface |
US9015736B2 (en) * | 2005-12-29 | 2015-04-21 | Rovi Guides, Inc. | Systems and methods for episode tracking in an interactive media environment |
EP2023812B1 (en) | 2006-05-19 | 2016-01-27 | The Queen's Medical Center | Motion tracking system for real time adaptive imaging and spectroscopy |
FR2906899B1 (en) * | 2006-10-05 | 2009-01-16 | Essilor Int | DISPLAY DEVICE FOR STEREOSCOPIC VISUALIZATION. |
JP2008106185A (en) * | 2006-10-27 | 2008-05-08 | Shin Etsu Chem Co Ltd | Method for adhering thermally conductive silicone composition, primer for adhesion of thermally conductive silicone composition and method for production of adhesion composite of thermally conductive silicone composition |
US8570423B2 (en) * | 2009-01-28 | 2013-10-29 | Hewlett-Packard Development Company, L.P. | Systems for performing visual collaboration between remotely situated participants |
US8775023B2 (en) | 2009-02-15 | 2014-07-08 | Neanode Inc. | Light-based touch controls on a steering wheel and dashboard |
EP2256620A1 (en) * | 2009-05-29 | 2010-12-01 | Koninklijke Philips Electronics N.V. | Picture selection method for modular lighting system |
US8125418B2 (en) * | 2009-06-26 | 2012-02-28 | Global Oled Technology Llc | Passive-matrix chiplet drivers for displays |
WO2011021894A2 (en) * | 2009-08-20 | 2011-02-24 | Lg Electronics Inc. | Image display apparatus and method for operating the same |
JP5187639B2 (en) * | 2009-08-28 | 2013-04-24 | 独立行政法人情報通信研究機構 | 3D display |
US20110080472A1 (en) * | 2009-10-02 | 2011-04-07 | Eric Gagneraud | Autostereoscopic status display |
US9420250B2 (en) * | 2009-10-07 | 2016-08-16 | Robert Laganiere | Video analytics method and system |
CN102474632A (en) * | 2009-12-08 | 2012-05-23 | 美国博通公司 | Method and system for handling multiple 3-d video formats |
US20110143769A1 (en) * | 2009-12-16 | 2011-06-16 | Microsoft Corporation | Dual display mobile communication device |
WO2011075825A1 (en) | 2009-12-21 | 2011-06-30 | Kik Interactive, Inc. | Systems and methods for accessing and controlling media stored remotely |
US8684531B2 (en) * | 2009-12-28 | 2014-04-01 | Vision3D Technologies, Llc | Stereoscopic display device projecting parallax image and adjusting amount of parallax |
US20110187839A1 (en) * | 2010-02-01 | 2011-08-04 | VIZIO Inc. | Frame based three-dimensional encoding method |
US20110191328A1 (en) * | 2010-02-03 | 2011-08-04 | Vernon Todd H | System and method for extracting representative media content from an online document |
US20110202845A1 (en) * | 2010-02-17 | 2011-08-18 | Anthony Jon Mountjoy | System and method for generating and distributing three dimensional interactive content |
US20110205336A1 (en) * | 2010-02-23 | 2011-08-25 | Panasonic Corporation | Three-dimensional image reproducing apparatus |
DE102010009737A1 (en) * | 2010-03-01 | 2011-09-01 | Institut für Rundfunktechnik GmbH | Method and arrangement for reproducing 3D image content |
JP5462672B2 (en) * | 2010-03-16 | 2014-04-02 | 株式会社ジャパンディスプレイ | Display device and electronic device |
US8634873B2 (en) * | 2010-03-17 | 2014-01-21 | Microsoft Corporation | Mobile communication device having multiple, interchangeable second devices |
KR101289269B1 (en) * | 2010-03-23 | 2013-07-24 | 한국전자통신연구원 | An apparatus and method for displaying image data in image system |
KR20110109565A (en) * | 2010-03-31 | 2011-10-06 | 삼성전자주식회사 | Backlight unit, 3d display having the same and method of making 3d image |
US10448083B2 (en) * | 2010-04-06 | 2019-10-15 | Comcast Cable Communications, Llc | Streaming and rendering of 3-dimensional video |
KR20110115806A (en) * | 2010-04-16 | 2011-10-24 | 삼성전자주식회사 | Display apparatus and 3d glasses, and display system including the same |
CN102449534B (en) * | 2010-04-21 | 2014-07-02 | 松下电器产业株式会社 | Three-dimensional video display device and three-dimensional video display method |
US8667533B2 (en) * | 2010-04-22 | 2014-03-04 | Microsoft Corporation | Customizing streaming content presentation |
US9271052B2 (en) * | 2010-05-10 | 2016-02-23 | Comcast Cable Communications, Llc | Grid encoded media asset data |
US9030536B2 (en) | 2010-06-04 | 2015-05-12 | At&T Intellectual Property I, Lp | Apparatus and method for presenting media content |
JP5510097B2 (en) * | 2010-06-16 | 2014-06-04 | ソニー株式会社 | Signal transmission method, signal transmission device, and signal reception device |
US10089937B2 (en) * | 2010-06-21 | 2018-10-02 | Microsoft Technology Licensing, Llc | Spatial and temporal multiplexing display |
US9225975B2 (en) | 2010-06-21 | 2015-12-29 | Microsoft Technology Licensing, Llc | Optimization of a multi-view display |
KR20110139497A (en) * | 2010-06-23 | 2011-12-29 | 삼성전자주식회사 | Display apparatus and method for displaying thereof |
JP2012013980A (en) * | 2010-07-01 | 2012-01-19 | Sony Corp | Stereoscopic display device and display drive circuit |
US9049426B2 (en) * | 2010-07-07 | 2015-06-02 | At&T Intellectual Property I, Lp | Apparatus and method for distributing three dimensional media content |
US8670070B2 (en) * | 2010-07-15 | 2014-03-11 | Broadcom Corporation | Method and system for achieving better picture quality in various zoom modes |
US9032470B2 (en) | 2010-07-20 | 2015-05-12 | At&T Intellectual Property I, Lp | Apparatus for adapting a presentation of media content according to a position of a viewing apparatus |
US9232274B2 (en) | 2010-07-20 | 2016-01-05 | At&T Intellectual Property I, L.P. | Apparatus for adapting a presentation of media content to a requesting device |
JP2012034138A (en) * | 2010-07-29 | 2012-02-16 | Toshiba Corp | Signal processing apparatus and signal processing method |
KR20120020627A (en) * | 2010-08-30 | 2012-03-08 | 삼성전자주식회사 | Apparatus and method for image processing using 3d image format |
TW201227684A (en) * | 2010-09-01 | 2012-07-01 | Seereal Technologies Sa | Backplane device |
JP5058316B2 (en) * | 2010-09-03 | 2012-10-24 | 株式会社東芝 | Electronic device, image processing method, and image processing program |
US20120057007A1 (en) * | 2010-09-03 | 2012-03-08 | Satoshi Ishiguro | Simplified Visual Screening Check on Television |
JP5364666B2 (en) * | 2010-09-13 | 2013-12-11 | 株式会社東芝 | Stereoscopic image display apparatus, method and program |
JP5368399B2 (en) * | 2010-09-17 | 2013-12-18 | 富士フイルム株式会社 | Electronic album generating apparatus, stereoscopic image pasting apparatus, operation control method thereof, and program thereof |
EP2432218B1 (en) * | 2010-09-20 | 2016-04-20 | EchoStar Technologies L.L.C. | Methods of displaying an electronic program guide |
AU2011305445B2 (en) | 2010-09-24 | 2017-03-16 | The Board Of Trustees Of The Leland Stanford Junior University | Direct capture, amplification and sequencing of target DNA using immobilized primers |
WO2012050036A1 (en) * | 2010-10-13 | 2012-04-19 | シャープ株式会社 | Display device |
KR20120046937A (en) * | 2010-11-03 | 2012-05-11 | 삼성전자주식회사 | Method and apparatus for providing 3d effect in video device |
US10157526B2 (en) | 2010-11-05 | 2018-12-18 | Razberi Technologies, Inc. | System and method for a security system |
US11082665B2 (en) | 2010-11-05 | 2021-08-03 | Razberi Secure Technologies, Llc | System and method for a security system |
US8922658B2 (en) * | 2010-11-05 | 2014-12-30 | Tom Galvin | Network video recorder system |
KR101670927B1 (en) * | 2010-11-05 | 2016-11-01 | 삼성전자주식회사 | Display apparatus and method |
US10477158B2 (en) | 2010-11-05 | 2019-11-12 | Razberi Technologies, Inc. | System and method for a security system |
US9860490B2 (en) | 2010-11-05 | 2018-01-02 | Tom Galvin | Network video recorder system |
US9218115B2 (en) | 2010-12-02 | 2015-12-22 | Lg Electronics Inc. | Input device and image display apparatus including the same |
US9172943B2 (en) * | 2010-12-07 | 2015-10-27 | At&T Intellectual Property I, L.P. | Dynamic modification of video content at a set-top box device |
KR20120065774A (en) * | 2010-12-13 | 2012-06-21 | 삼성전자주식회사 | Audio providing apparatus, audio receiver and method for providing audio |
KR101734285B1 (en) * | 2010-12-14 | 2017-05-11 | 엘지전자 주식회사 | Video processing apparatus of mobile terminal and method thereof |
US8963694B2 (en) * | 2010-12-17 | 2015-02-24 | Sony Corporation | System and method for remote controlled device selection based on device position data and orientation data of a user |
US20120154559A1 (en) * | 2010-12-21 | 2012-06-21 | Voss Shane D | Generate Media |
US9386294B2 (en) * | 2011-01-05 | 2016-07-05 | Google Technology Holdings LLC | Method and apparatus for 3DTV image adjustment |
US20120178380A1 (en) * | 2011-01-07 | 2012-07-12 | Microsoft Corporation | Wireless Communication Techniques |
US8643684B2 (en) * | 2011-01-18 | 2014-02-04 | Disney Enterprises, Inc. | Multi-layer plenoptic displays that combine multiple emissive and light modulating planes |
TW201232280A (en) * | 2011-01-20 | 2012-08-01 | Hon Hai Prec Ind Co Ltd | System and method for sharing desktop information |
KR20120088467A (en) * | 2011-01-31 | 2012-08-08 | 삼성전자주식회사 | Method and apparatus for displaying partial 3d image in 2d image disaply area |
JP5632764B2 (en) * | 2011-02-02 | 2014-11-26 | セイコーインスツル株式会社 | Stereoscopic image display device |
US20120202187A1 (en) * | 2011-02-03 | 2012-08-09 | Shadowbox Comics, Llc | Method for distribution and display of sequential graphic art |
US10083639B2 (en) * | 2011-02-04 | 2018-09-25 | Seiko Epson Corporation | Control device for controlling image display device, head-mounted display device, image display system, control method for the image display device, and control method for the head-mounted display device |
US8724467B2 (en) | 2011-02-04 | 2014-05-13 | Cisco Technology, Inc. | System and method for managing congestion in a network environment |
TWI569041B (en) | 2011-02-14 | 2017-02-01 | 半導體能源研究所股份有限公司 | Display device |
US8630247B2 (en) * | 2011-02-15 | 2014-01-14 | Cisco Technology, Inc. | System and method for managing tracking area identity lists in a mobile network environment |
US9035860B2 (en) | 2011-02-16 | 2015-05-19 | Semiconductor Energy Laboratory Co., Ltd. | Display device |
KR101899178B1 (en) | 2011-02-16 | 2018-09-14 | 가부시키가이샤 한도오따이 에네루기 켄큐쇼 | Display device |
US9443455B2 (en) | 2011-02-25 | 2016-09-13 | Semiconductor Energy Laboratory Co., Ltd. | Display device having a plurality of pixels |
KR101852428B1 (en) * | 2011-03-09 | 2018-04-26 | 엘지전자 주식회사 | Mobile twrminal and 3d object control method thereof |
US9558687B2 (en) | 2011-03-11 | 2017-01-31 | Semiconductor Energy Laboratory Co., Ltd. | Display device and method for driving the same |
US9578299B2 (en) | 2011-03-14 | 2017-02-21 | Qualcomm Incorporated | Stereoscopic conversion for shader based graphics content |
JP5766479B2 (en) * | 2011-03-25 | 2015-08-19 | 京セラ株式会社 | Electronic device, control method, and control program |
JP5730091B2 (en) * | 2011-03-25 | 2015-06-03 | 株式会社ジャパンディスプレイ | Display panel, display device and electronic device |
JP5092033B2 (en) * | 2011-03-28 | 2012-12-05 | 株式会社東芝 | Electronic device, display control method, and display control program |
WO2012138539A2 (en) * | 2011-04-08 | 2012-10-11 | The Regents Of The University Of California | Interactive system for collecting, displaying, and ranking items based on quantitative and textual input from multiple participants |
US8988512B2 (en) * | 2011-04-14 | 2015-03-24 | Mediatek Inc. | Method for adjusting playback of multimedia content according to detection result of user status and related apparatus thereof |
JP5162000B2 (en) * | 2011-04-19 | 2013-03-13 | 株式会社東芝 | Information processing apparatus, information processing method, and program |
JP5161999B2 (en) * | 2011-04-19 | 2013-03-13 | 株式会社東芝 | Electronic device, display control method, and display control program |
JP5161998B2 (en) * | 2011-04-19 | 2013-03-13 | 株式会社東芝 | Information processing apparatus, information processing method, and program |
KR101569602B1 (en) * | 2011-05-05 | 2015-11-16 | 엠파이어 테크놀로지 디벨롭먼트 엘엘씨 | Lenticular directional display |
US20120287115A1 (en) * | 2011-05-10 | 2012-11-15 | Ding Junjie | Method for generating image frames |
KR20120126458A (en) * | 2011-05-11 | 2012-11-21 | 엘지전자 주식회사 | Method for processing broadcasting signal and display device thereof |
WO2012156778A1 (en) * | 2011-05-13 | 2012-11-22 | Sony Ericsson Mobile Communications Ab | Adjusting parallax barriers |
US8913104B2 (en) * | 2011-05-24 | 2014-12-16 | Bose Corporation | Audio synchronization for two dimensional and three dimensional video signals |
US9420259B2 (en) * | 2011-05-24 | 2016-08-16 | Comcast Cable Communications, Llc | Dynamic distribution of three-dimensional content |
JP6050941B2 (en) * | 2011-05-26 | 2016-12-21 | サターン ライセンシング エルエルシーSaturn Licensing LLC | Display device and method, and program |
US9442562B2 (en) * | 2011-05-27 | 2016-09-13 | Dolby Laboratories Licensing Corporation | Systems and methods of image processing that adjust for viewer position, screen size and viewing distance |
US9084068B2 (en) * | 2011-05-30 | 2015-07-14 | Sony Corporation | Sensor-based placement of sound in video recording |
CN103262551B (en) * | 2011-06-01 | 2015-12-09 | 松下电器产业株式会社 | Image processor, dispensing device, image processing system, image treatment method, sending method and integrated circuit |
JP2012253543A (en) * | 2011-06-02 | 2012-12-20 | Seiko Epson Corp | Display device, control method of display device, and program |
JP5770018B2 (en) * | 2011-06-03 | 2015-08-26 | 任天堂株式会社 | Display control program, display control apparatus, display control method, and display control system |
US9420268B2 (en) | 2011-06-23 | 2016-08-16 | Lg Electronics Inc. | Apparatus and method for displaying 3-dimensional image |
CN103621073B (en) * | 2011-06-24 | 2016-06-22 | 汤姆逊许可公司 | Transmit the method and apparatus of three-dimensional content |
US9602766B2 (en) | 2011-06-24 | 2017-03-21 | At&T Intellectual Property I, L.P. | Apparatus and method for presenting three dimensional objects with telepresence |
US9030522B2 (en) | 2011-06-24 | 2015-05-12 | At&T Intellectual Property I, Lp | Apparatus and method for providing media content |
US9445046B2 (en) | 2011-06-24 | 2016-09-13 | At&T Intellectual Property I, L.P. | Apparatus and method for presenting media content with telepresence |
KR101772458B1 (en) * | 2011-06-28 | 2017-08-30 | 엘지전자 주식회사 | Display device and method for controlling thereof |
US20130265300A1 (en) * | 2011-07-03 | 2013-10-10 | Neorai Vardi | Computer device in form of wearable glasses and user interface thereof |
US8988411B2 (en) | 2011-07-08 | 2015-03-24 | Semiconductor Energy Laboratory Co., Ltd. | Display device |
US9137522B2 (en) * | 2011-07-11 | 2015-09-15 | Realtek Semiconductor Corp. | Device and method for 3-D display control |
US9294752B2 (en) * | 2011-07-13 | 2016-03-22 | Google Technology Holdings LLC | Dual mode user interface system and method for 3D video |
US8928708B2 (en) | 2011-07-15 | 2015-01-06 | Semiconductor Energy Laboratory Co., Ltd. | Display device and method for driving the display device |
US8587635B2 (en) | 2011-07-15 | 2013-11-19 | At&T Intellectual Property I, L.P. | Apparatus and method for providing media services with telepresence |
KR101926477B1 (en) * | 2011-07-18 | 2018-12-11 | 삼성전자 주식회사 | Contents play method and apparatus |
KR20130010834A (en) * | 2011-07-19 | 2013-01-29 | 가부시키가이샤 한도오따이 에네루기 켄큐쇼 | Display device |
JP2013038454A (en) * | 2011-08-03 | 2013-02-21 | Sony Corp | Image processor, method, and program |
JP2013038504A (en) | 2011-08-04 | 2013-02-21 | Sony Corp | Imaging device, image processing method and program |
JP5815326B2 (en) * | 2011-08-12 | 2015-11-17 | ルネサスエレクトロニクス株式会社 | Video decoding device and image display device |
EP2745462B1 (en) * | 2011-08-18 | 2021-10-20 | Pfaqutruma Research LLC | Systems and methods of virtual world interaction |
US10659724B2 (en) * | 2011-08-24 | 2020-05-19 | Ati Technologies Ulc | Method and apparatus for providing dropped picture image processing |
US9606209B2 (en) | 2011-08-26 | 2017-03-28 | Kineticor, Inc. | Methods, systems, and devices for intra-scan motion correction |
JP2013050538A (en) | 2011-08-30 | 2013-03-14 | Sony Corp | Display device and electronic apparatus |
JP2013050539A (en) * | 2011-08-30 | 2013-03-14 | Sony Corp | Display device and electronic apparatus |
JP2013050537A (en) * | 2011-08-30 | 2013-03-14 | Sony Corp | Display device and electronic apparatus |
US20130050596A1 (en) * | 2011-08-30 | 2013-02-28 | Industrial Technology Research Institute | Auto-stereoscopic display and method for fabricating the same |
WO2013032221A1 (en) * | 2011-08-31 | 2013-03-07 | 엘지전자 주식회사 | Digital broadcast signal processing method and device |
US8872813B2 (en) | 2011-09-02 | 2014-10-28 | Adobe Systems Incorporated | Parallax image authoring and viewing in digital media |
CN102368244B (en) * | 2011-09-08 | 2013-05-15 | 广州市动景计算机科技有限公司 | Page content alignment method, device and mobile terminal browser |
DE112012003931T5 (en) | 2011-09-21 | 2014-07-10 | Magna Electronics, Inc. | Image processing system for a motor vehicle with image data transmission and power supply via a coaxial cable |
CN102510503B (en) * | 2011-09-30 | 2015-06-03 | 深圳超多维光电子有限公司 | Stereoscopic display method and stereoscopic display equipment |
JP5715539B2 (en) * | 2011-10-06 | 2015-05-07 | 株式会社ジャパンディスプレイ | Display device and electronic device |
KR20130037861A (en) * | 2011-10-07 | 2013-04-17 | 삼성디스플레이 주식회사 | Display apparatus and method of displaying three dimensional image using the same |
KR101813035B1 (en) * | 2011-10-10 | 2017-12-28 | 엘지전자 주식회사 | Mobile terminal and method for controlling the same |
JP2014534695A (en) * | 2011-10-13 | 2014-12-18 | サムスン エレクトロニクス カンパニー リミテッド | Content display method, content synchronization method, broadcast content display method, and display apparatus |
GB2495725B (en) * | 2011-10-18 | 2014-10-01 | Sony Comp Entertainment Europe | Image transfer apparatus and method |
JP5149435B1 (en) * | 2011-11-04 | 2013-02-20 | 株式会社東芝 | Video processing apparatus and video processing method |
CA2794898C (en) | 2011-11-10 | 2019-10-29 | Victor Yang | Method of rendering and manipulating anatomical images on mobile computing device |
KR101887058B1 (en) * | 2011-11-11 | 2018-08-09 | 엘지전자 주식회사 | A process for processing a three-dimensional image and a method for controlling electric power of the same |
WO2013073428A1 (en) * | 2011-11-15 | 2013-05-23 | シャープ株式会社 | Display device |
US20130127841A1 (en) * | 2011-11-18 | 2013-05-23 | Samsung Electronics Co., Ltd. | Three-dimensional (3d) image display method and apparatus for 3d imaging and displaying contents according to start or end of operation |
US9942580B2 (en) * | 2011-11-18 | 2018-04-10 | At&T Intellecutal Property I, L.P. | System and method for automatically selecting encoding/decoding for streaming media |
US8660362B2 (en) * | 2011-11-21 | 2014-02-25 | Microsoft Corporation | Combined depth filtering and super resolution |
WO2013081985A1 (en) | 2011-11-28 | 2013-06-06 | Magna Electronics, Inc. | Vision system for vehicle |
DE102011055967B4 (en) * | 2011-12-02 | 2016-03-10 | Seereal Technologies S.A. | Measuring method and device for carrying out the measuring method |
US9626798B2 (en) | 2011-12-05 | 2017-04-18 | At&T Intellectual Property I, L.P. | System and method to digitally replace objects in images or video |
CN103163650A (en) * | 2011-12-08 | 2013-06-19 | 武汉天马微电子有限公司 | Naked eye three-dimensional (3D) grating structure |
US20130156090A1 (en) * | 2011-12-14 | 2013-06-20 | Ati Technologies Ulc | Method and apparatus for enabling multiuser use |
US9042266B2 (en) * | 2011-12-21 | 2015-05-26 | Kik Interactive, Inc. | Methods and apparatus for initializing a network connection for an output device |
KR20140018414A (en) * | 2011-12-22 | 2014-02-12 | 텐센트 테크놀로지(센젠) 컴퍼니 리미티드 | Browser based application program extension method and device |
CN202995143U (en) * | 2011-12-29 | 2013-06-12 | 三星电子株式会社 | Glasses device and display device |
US9392251B2 (en) | 2011-12-29 | 2016-07-12 | Samsung Electronics Co., Ltd. | Display apparatus, glasses apparatus and method for controlling depth |
EP2611176A3 (en) * | 2011-12-29 | 2015-11-18 | Samsung Electronics Co., Ltd. | Display apparatus and controlling method thereof |
TWI467235B (en) * | 2012-02-06 | 2015-01-01 | Innocom Tech Shenzhen Co Ltd | Three-dimensional (3d) display and displaying method thereof |
US11164394B2 (en) | 2012-02-24 | 2021-11-02 | Matterport, Inc. | Employing three-dimensional (3D) data predicted from two-dimensional (2D) images using neural networks for 3D modeling applications and other applications |
US9324190B2 (en) | 2012-02-24 | 2016-04-26 | Matterport, Inc. | Capturing and aligning three-dimensional scenes |
CN103294453B (en) * | 2012-02-24 | 2017-02-22 | 华为技术有限公司 | Image processing method and image processing device |
US10848731B2 (en) | 2012-02-24 | 2020-11-24 | Matterport, Inc. | Capturing and aligning panoramic image and depth data |
KR20130098023A (en) * | 2012-02-27 | 2013-09-04 | 한국전자통신연구원 | Apparatus and method for displaying an image on 3-dimentional display based on multi-layer parallax barrier |
JP5942477B2 (en) * | 2012-02-29 | 2016-06-29 | 富士ゼロックス株式会社 | Setting device and program |
EP2637416A1 (en) * | 2012-03-06 | 2013-09-11 | Alcatel Lucent | A system and method for optimized streaming of variable multi-viewpoint media |
JP5762998B2 (en) * | 2012-03-07 | 2015-08-12 | 株式会社ジャパンディスプレイ | Display device and electronic device |
JP5779124B2 (en) * | 2012-03-13 | 2015-09-16 | 株式会社ジャパンディスプレイ | Display device and electronic device |
JP5806150B2 (en) * | 2012-03-13 | 2015-11-10 | 株式会社ジャパンディスプレイ | Display device |
US9280042B2 (en) * | 2012-03-16 | 2016-03-08 | City University Of Hong Kong | Automatic switching of a multi-mode projector display screen for displaying three-dimensional and two-dimensional images |
BR112014001749B1 (en) | 2012-03-16 | 2022-08-16 | Tencent Technology (Shenzhen) Company Limited | OFFLINE DOWNLOAD METHOD AND SYSTEM |
CN102650741B (en) * | 2012-03-16 | 2014-06-11 | 京东方科技集团股份有限公司 | Light splitting device, manufacturing method thereof and 3D (Three-Dimensional) display device |
US9733707B2 (en) | 2012-03-22 | 2017-08-15 | Honeywell International Inc. | Touch screen display user interface and method for improving touch interface utility on the same employing a rules-based masking system |
US20130265297A1 (en) * | 2012-04-06 | 2013-10-10 | Motorola Mobility, Inc. | Display of a Corrected Browser Projection of a Visual Guide for Placing a Three Dimensional Object in a Browser |
US9308439B2 (en) * | 2012-04-10 | 2016-04-12 | Bally Gaming, Inc. | Controlling three-dimensional presentation of wagering game content |
WO2013153418A1 (en) * | 2012-04-12 | 2013-10-17 | Sony Mobile Communications Ab | Improved 3d image display system |
KR101923150B1 (en) * | 2012-04-16 | 2018-11-29 | 삼성디스플레이 주식회사 | Display apparatus and method of displaying three dimensional image using the same |
CN102645959A (en) * | 2012-04-16 | 2012-08-22 | 上海颖杰计算机系统设备有限公司 | 3D (Three Dimensional) integrated computer |
WO2013158322A1 (en) * | 2012-04-18 | 2013-10-24 | The Regents Of The University Of California | Simultaneous 2d and 3d images on a display |
EP2653906B1 (en) | 2012-04-20 | 2022-08-24 | Dolby Laboratories Licensing Corporation | A system for delivering stereoscopic images |
CN103379362B (en) * | 2012-04-24 | 2017-07-07 | 腾讯科技(深圳)有限公司 | VOD method and system |
US9201495B2 (en) * | 2012-04-24 | 2015-12-01 | Mobitv, Inc. | Control of perspective in multi-dimensional media |
US9707892B2 (en) * | 2012-04-25 | 2017-07-18 | Gentex Corporation | Multi-focus optical system |
US20130290867A1 (en) * | 2012-04-27 | 2013-10-31 | Litera Technologies, LLC | Systems and Methods For Providing Dynamic and Interactive Viewing and Control of Applications |
KR20130123599A (en) * | 2012-05-03 | 2013-11-13 | 한국과학기술원 | Speed dependent automatic dimming technique |
CN103457960B (en) | 2012-05-15 | 2018-03-09 | 腾讯科技(深圳)有限公司 | The method and system of load document in web game |
US10089537B2 (en) | 2012-05-18 | 2018-10-02 | Magna Electronics Inc. | Vehicle vision system with front and rear camera integration |
EP2856760B1 (en) * | 2012-06-01 | 2018-09-05 | Koninklijke Philips N.V. | Autostereoscopic display device and driving method |
US9201270B2 (en) * | 2012-06-01 | 2015-12-01 | Leia Inc. | Directional backlight with a modulation layer |
US8570651B1 (en) * | 2012-06-04 | 2013-10-29 | Hae-Yong Choi | Both side screen for combined use of 2D/3D images |
US9482296B2 (en) | 2012-06-05 | 2016-11-01 | Apple Inc. | Rendering road signs during navigation |
US9997069B2 (en) | 2012-06-05 | 2018-06-12 | Apple Inc. | Context-aware voice guidance |
US9159153B2 (en) | 2012-06-05 | 2015-10-13 | Apple Inc. | Method, system and apparatus for providing visual feedback of a map view change |
US8965696B2 (en) | 2012-06-05 | 2015-02-24 | Apple Inc. | Providing navigation instructions while operating navigation application in background |
US10176633B2 (en) | 2012-06-05 | 2019-01-08 | Apple Inc. | Integrated mapping and navigation application |
US9367959B2 (en) * | 2012-06-05 | 2016-06-14 | Apple Inc. | Mapping application with 3D presentation |
US9886794B2 (en) | 2012-06-05 | 2018-02-06 | Apple Inc. | Problem reporting in maps |
US8983778B2 (en) | 2012-06-05 | 2015-03-17 | Apple Inc. | Generation of intersection information by a mapping service |
US9418672B2 (en) | 2012-06-05 | 2016-08-16 | Apple Inc. | Navigation application with adaptive instruction text |
US10156455B2 (en) | 2012-06-05 | 2018-12-18 | Apple Inc. | Context-aware voice guidance |
JP6046923B2 (en) * | 2012-06-07 | 2016-12-21 | キヤノン株式会社 | Image coding apparatus, image coding method, and program |
EP2859463B1 (en) * | 2012-06-08 | 2018-08-29 | LG Electronics Inc. | Rendering method of 3d web-page and terminal using the same |
US9800862B2 (en) * | 2012-06-12 | 2017-10-24 | The Board Of Trustees Of The University Of Illinois | System and methods for visualizing information |
US9829996B2 (en) * | 2012-06-25 | 2017-11-28 | Zspace, Inc. | Operations in a three dimensional display system |
WO2014000129A1 (en) * | 2012-06-30 | 2014-01-03 | Intel Corporation | 3d graphical user interface |
WO2014007414A1 (en) * | 2012-07-06 | 2014-01-09 | Lg Electronics Inc. | Terminal for increasing visual comfort sensation of 3d object and control method thereof |
US20140022241A1 (en) * | 2012-07-18 | 2014-01-23 | Electronics And Telecommunications Research Institute | Display apparatus and method based on symmetrically spb |
US10353718B2 (en) * | 2012-07-23 | 2019-07-16 | Vmware, Inc. | Providing access to a remote application via a web client |
US8959176B2 (en) | 2012-07-31 | 2015-02-17 | Apple Inc. | Streaming common media content to multiple devices |
US9491784B2 (en) * | 2012-07-31 | 2016-11-08 | Apple Inc. | Streaming common media content to multiple devices |
CA2822217A1 (en) | 2012-08-02 | 2014-02-02 | Iwatchlife Inc. | Method and system for anonymous video analytics processing |
US9786281B1 (en) * | 2012-08-02 | 2017-10-10 | Amazon Technologies, Inc. | Household agent learning |
US9423871B2 (en) * | 2012-08-07 | 2016-08-23 | Honeywell International Inc. | System and method for reducing the effects of inadvertent touch on a touch screen controller |
KR101994295B1 (en) * | 2012-08-08 | 2019-06-28 | 삼성전자주식회사 | Terminal and method for generating live image in terminal |
US9225972B2 (en) | 2012-08-10 | 2015-12-29 | Pixtronix, Inc. | Three dimensional (3D) image generation using electromechanical display elements |
US9198209B2 (en) | 2012-08-21 | 2015-11-24 | Cisco Technology, Inc. | Providing integrated end-to-end architecture that includes quality of service transport for tunneled traffic |
TWI509289B (en) * | 2012-08-27 | 2015-11-21 | Innocom Tech Shenzhen Co Ltd | Stereoscopic display apparatus and image display method thereof |
CN103631021B (en) * | 2012-08-27 | 2016-06-15 | 群康科技(深圳)有限公司 | 3 d display device and image display method thereof |
KR20140028780A (en) * | 2012-08-30 | 2014-03-10 | 삼성디스플레이 주식회사 | Display apparatus and method of displaying three dimensional image using the same |
US9811878B1 (en) * | 2012-09-04 | 2017-11-07 | Amazon Technologies, Inc. | Dynamic processing of image borders |
US10171540B2 (en) * | 2012-09-07 | 2019-01-01 | High Sec Labs Ltd | Method and apparatus for streaming video security |
US20150138444A1 (en) * | 2012-09-14 | 2015-05-21 | Masayuki Hirabayashi | Video display apparatus and terminal device |
US9179232B2 (en) * | 2012-09-17 | 2015-11-03 | Nokia Technologies Oy | Method and apparatus for associating audio objects with content and geo-location |
JP5837009B2 (en) * | 2012-09-26 | 2015-12-24 | キヤノン株式会社 | Display device and control method thereof |
CN104104934B (en) * | 2012-10-04 | 2019-02-19 | 陈笛 | The component and method of the more spectators' Three-dimensional Displays of glasses-free |
JP5928286B2 (en) * | 2012-10-05 | 2016-06-01 | 富士ゼロックス株式会社 | Information processing apparatus and program |
MX2015004575A (en) * | 2012-10-10 | 2016-07-06 | Broadcast 3Dtv Inc | System for distributing auto-stereoscopic images. |
US20140104242A1 (en) * | 2012-10-12 | 2014-04-17 | Nvidia Corporation | System and method for concurrent display of a video signal on a plurality of display devices |
CN102917265A (en) * | 2012-10-25 | 2013-02-06 | 深圳创维-Rgb电子有限公司 | Information browsing method and system based on network television |
US9235103B2 (en) * | 2012-10-25 | 2016-01-12 | Au Optronics Corporation | 3D liquid crystal display comprising four electrodes alternately arrange between a first and second substrate |
US9161018B2 (en) * | 2012-10-26 | 2015-10-13 | Christopher L. UHL | Methods and systems for synthesizing stereoscopic images |
TWI452345B (en) * | 2012-10-26 | 2014-09-11 | Au Optronics Corp | Three dimensions display device and displaying method thereof |
JP2014092744A (en) * | 2012-11-06 | 2014-05-19 | Japan Display Inc | Stereoscopic display device |
US9674510B2 (en) * | 2012-11-21 | 2017-06-06 | Elwha Llc | Pulsed projection system for 3D video |
CN102981343B (en) * | 2012-11-21 | 2015-01-07 | 京东方科技集团股份有限公司 | Convertible lens and preparation method thereof, as well as two-dimensional and three-dimensional display surface substrate and display device |
CN104516168B (en) * | 2012-11-21 | 2018-05-08 | 京东方科技集团股份有限公司 | Convertible lens and preparation method thereof, 2 d-3 d display base plate and display device |
US9547937B2 (en) * | 2012-11-30 | 2017-01-17 | Legend3D, Inc. | Three-dimensional annotation system and method |
US10009644B2 (en) | 2012-12-04 | 2018-06-26 | Interaxon Inc | System and method for enhancing content using brain-state data |
US9265458B2 (en) | 2012-12-04 | 2016-02-23 | Sync-Think, Inc. | Application of smooth pursuit cognitive testing paradigms to clinical drug development |
US9128580B2 (en) | 2012-12-07 | 2015-09-08 | Honeywell International Inc. | System and method for interacting with a touch screen interface utilizing an intelligent stencil mask |
US20140165209A1 (en) * | 2012-12-11 | 2014-06-12 | Verizon Patent And Licensing Inc. | Digital content delivery platform for multiple retailers |
US9047054B1 (en) * | 2012-12-20 | 2015-06-02 | Audible, Inc. | User location-based management of content presentation |
US9497448B2 (en) * | 2012-12-31 | 2016-11-15 | Lg Display Co., Ltd. | Image processing method of transparent display apparatus and apparatus thereof |
TWI531213B (en) * | 2013-01-18 | 2016-04-21 | 國立成功大學 | Image conversion method and module for naked-eye 3d display |
US10327708B2 (en) | 2013-01-24 | 2019-06-25 | Kineticor, Inc. | Systems, devices, and methods for tracking and compensating for patient motion during a medical imaging scan |
US9717461B2 (en) | 2013-01-24 | 2017-08-01 | Kineticor, Inc. | Systems, devices, and methods for tracking and compensating for patient motion during a medical imaging scan |
US9305365B2 (en) | 2013-01-24 | 2016-04-05 | Kineticor, Inc. | Systems, devices, and methods for tracking moving targets |
CN105392423B (en) | 2013-02-01 | 2018-08-17 | 凯内蒂科尔股份有限公司 | The motion tracking system of real-time adaptive motion compensation in biomedical imaging |
WO2014129134A1 (en) * | 2013-02-19 | 2014-08-28 | パナソニック株式会社 | Image display device |
TWI502247B (en) * | 2013-02-26 | 2015-10-01 | Chunghwa Picture Tubes Ltd | Autostereoscopic display device and display method thereof |
US8712217B1 (en) * | 2013-03-01 | 2014-04-29 | Comcast Cable Communications, Llc | Methods and systems for time-shifting content |
US9380976B2 (en) | 2013-03-11 | 2016-07-05 | Sync-Think, Inc. | Optical neuroinformatics |
US20140267601A1 (en) * | 2013-03-14 | 2014-09-18 | Corel Corporation | System and method for efficient editing of 3d video |
US20140268324A1 (en) * | 2013-03-18 | 2014-09-18 | 3-D Virtual Lens Technologies, Llc | Method of displaying 3d images from 2d source images using a barrier grid |
CN103236074B (en) * | 2013-03-25 | 2015-12-23 | 深圳超多维光电子有限公司 | A kind of 2D/3D image processing method and device |
US10110647B2 (en) * | 2013-03-28 | 2018-10-23 | Qualcomm Incorporated | Method and apparatus for altering bandwidth consumption |
KR101981530B1 (en) | 2013-03-29 | 2019-05-23 | 엘지디스플레이 주식회사 | Stereoscopic image display device and method for driving the same |
CN103235415B (en) * | 2013-04-01 | 2015-12-23 | 昆山龙腾光电有限公司 | Based on the multi-view free stereoscopic displayer of grating |
KR101970577B1 (en) * | 2013-04-09 | 2019-04-19 | 엘지디스플레이 주식회사 | Stereoscopic display device and eye-tracking method thereof |
US20140316907A1 (en) * | 2013-04-17 | 2014-10-23 | Asaf NAIM | Multilayered user interface for internet browser |
US20140328505A1 (en) * | 2013-05-02 | 2014-11-06 | Microsoft Corporation | Sound field adaptation based upon user tracking |
CN103293689B (en) * | 2013-05-31 | 2015-05-13 | 京东方科技集团股份有限公司 | Method capable of switching between different display modes and display device |
KR20140142863A (en) * | 2013-06-05 | 2014-12-15 | 한국전자통신연구원 | Apparatus and method for providing graphic editors |
CN104238185B (en) * | 2013-06-19 | 2017-04-12 | 扬升照明股份有限公司 | Light source module, display device and light source module drive method |
CN103309639A (en) * | 2013-06-21 | 2013-09-18 | 广东威创视讯科技股份有限公司 | Method and device based on split screen display of three-dimensional scene |
US10003789B2 (en) | 2013-06-24 | 2018-06-19 | The Regents Of The University Of California | Practical two-frame 3D+2D TV |
CN103365657B (en) * | 2013-06-28 | 2019-03-15 | 北京智谷睿拓技术服务有限公司 | Display control method, device and the display equipment including the device |
TWI495904B (en) * | 2013-07-12 | 2015-08-11 | Vision Technology Co Ltd C | Field sequential color lcd and method for generating 3d images by matching a software optical grating |
US9418469B1 (en) | 2013-07-19 | 2016-08-16 | Outward, Inc. | Generating video content |
JP2015025968A (en) * | 2013-07-26 | 2015-02-05 | ソニー株式会社 | Presentation medium and display device |
US9678929B2 (en) * | 2013-08-01 | 2017-06-13 | Equldo Limited | Stereoscopic online web content creation and rendering |
TWI489148B (en) * | 2013-08-23 | 2015-06-21 | Au Optronics Corp | Stereoscopic display and the driving method |
TWI505243B (en) * | 2013-09-10 | 2015-10-21 | Zhangjiagang Kangde Xin Optronics Material Co Ltd | A device that can display 2D and 3D images at the same time |
KR101856568B1 (en) * | 2013-09-16 | 2018-06-19 | 삼성전자주식회사 | Multi view image display apparatus and controlling method thereof |
US10592064B2 (en) * | 2013-09-17 | 2020-03-17 | Amazon Technologies, Inc. | Approaches for three-dimensional object display used in content navigation |
US10067634B2 (en) | 2013-09-17 | 2018-09-04 | Amazon Technologies, Inc. | Approaches for three-dimensional object display |
US9392355B1 (en) * | 2013-09-19 | 2016-07-12 | Voyetra Turtle Beach, Inc. | Gaming headset with voice scrambling for private in-game conversations |
US9591295B2 (en) * | 2013-09-24 | 2017-03-07 | Amazon Technologies, Inc. | Approaches for simulating three-dimensional views |
WO2015054235A1 (en) * | 2013-10-07 | 2015-04-16 | Vid Scale, Inc. | User adaptive 3d video rendering and delivery |
US10652525B2 (en) | 2013-10-31 | 2020-05-12 | 3Di Llc | Quad view display system |
US9883173B2 (en) | 2013-12-25 | 2018-01-30 | 3Di Llc | Stereoscopic display |
US10116914B2 (en) * | 2013-10-31 | 2018-10-30 | 3Di Llc | Stereoscopic display |
US9986228B2 (en) | 2016-03-24 | 2018-05-29 | 3Di Llc | Trackable glasses system that provides multiple views of a shared display |
US11343487B2 (en) | 2013-10-31 | 2022-05-24 | David Woods | Trackable glasses system for perspective views of a display |
JP6411862B2 (en) * | 2013-11-15 | 2018-10-24 | パナソニック株式会社 | File generation method and file generation apparatus |
KR20150057064A (en) * | 2013-11-18 | 2015-05-28 | 엘지전자 주식회사 | Electronic device and control method thereof |
US20150138184A1 (en) * | 2013-11-20 | 2015-05-21 | Apple Inc. | Spatially interactive computing device |
TWI511112B (en) * | 2013-11-27 | 2015-12-01 | Acer Inc | Image display method and display system |
CN103605211B (en) * | 2013-11-27 | 2016-04-20 | 南京大学 | Tablet non-auxiliary stereo display device and method |
KR20150065056A (en) * | 2013-12-04 | 2015-06-12 | 삼성디스플레이 주식회사 | Image display apparatus |
US9988047B2 (en) | 2013-12-12 | 2018-06-05 | Magna Electronics Inc. | Vehicle control system with traffic driving control |
US20150189256A1 (en) * | 2013-12-16 | 2015-07-02 | Christian Stroetmann | Autostereoscopic multi-layer display and control approaches |
CN103676302B (en) * | 2013-12-31 | 2016-04-06 | 京东方科技集团股份有限公司 | Realize array base palte, display device and method that 2D/3D display switches |
US10303242B2 (en) | 2014-01-06 | 2019-05-28 | Avegant Corp. | Media chair apparatus, system, and method |
US10409079B2 (en) | 2014-01-06 | 2019-09-10 | Avegant Corp. | Apparatus, system, and method for displaying an image using a plate |
JP6467680B2 (en) * | 2014-01-10 | 2019-02-13 | パナソニックIpマネジメント株式会社 | File generation method and file generation apparatus |
US20150205884A1 (en) * | 2014-01-22 | 2015-07-23 | AI Squared | Emphasizing a portion of the visible content elements of a markup language document |
EP3097689B1 (en) | 2014-01-23 | 2019-12-25 | Telefonaktiebolaget LM Ericsson (publ) | Multi-view display control for channel selection |
US9182605B2 (en) * | 2014-01-29 | 2015-11-10 | Emine Goulanian | Front-projection autostereoscopic 3D display system |
US10554962B2 (en) | 2014-02-07 | 2020-02-04 | Samsung Electronics Co., Ltd. | Multi-layer high transparency display for light field generation |
US10565925B2 (en) | 2014-02-07 | 2020-02-18 | Samsung Electronics Co., Ltd. | Full color display with intrinsic transparency |
US10375365B2 (en) | 2014-02-07 | 2019-08-06 | Samsung Electronics Co., Ltd. | Projection system with enhanced color and contrast |
US10453371B2 (en) | 2014-02-07 | 2019-10-22 | Samsung Electronics Co., Ltd. | Multi-layer display with color and contrast enhancement |
CN103792672B (en) * | 2014-02-14 | 2016-03-23 | 成都京东方光电科技有限公司 | Stereo display assembly, liquid crystal panel and display device |
CN104853008B (en) * | 2014-02-17 | 2020-05-19 | 北京三星通信技术研究有限公司 | Portable device and method capable of switching between two-dimensional display and three-dimensional display |
KR101678389B1 (en) * | 2014-02-28 | 2016-11-22 | 엔트릭스 주식회사 | Method for providing media data based on cloud computing, apparatus and system |
US9348495B2 (en) | 2014-03-07 | 2016-05-24 | Sony Corporation | Control of large screen display using wireless portable computer and facilitating selection of audio on a headphone |
CN103903548B (en) * | 2014-03-07 | 2016-03-02 | 京东方科技集团股份有限公司 | A kind of driving method of display panel and drive system |
CN106572810A (en) | 2014-03-24 | 2017-04-19 | 凯内蒂科尔股份有限公司 | Systems, methods, and devices for removing prospective motion correction from medical imaging scans |
US9373306B2 (en) * | 2014-03-25 | 2016-06-21 | Intel Coporation | Direct viewer projection |
KR102175813B1 (en) * | 2014-04-18 | 2020-11-09 | 삼성디스플레이 주식회사 | Three dimensional image display device and method of processing image |
US20150334367A1 (en) * | 2014-05-13 | 2015-11-19 | Nagravision S.A. | Techniques for displaying three dimensional objects |
US9838756B2 (en) * | 2014-05-20 | 2017-12-05 | Electronics And Telecommunications Research Institute | Method and apparatus for providing three-dimensional territorial broadcasting based on non real time service |
KR102204830B1 (en) * | 2014-05-20 | 2021-01-19 | 한국전자통신연구원 | Method and apparatus for providing three-dimensional territorial brordcasting based on non real time service |
CN104023223B (en) * | 2014-05-29 | 2016-03-02 | 京东方科技集团股份有限公司 | Display control method, Apparatus and system |
CN104090365A (en) * | 2014-06-18 | 2014-10-08 | 京东方科技集团股份有限公司 | Shutter glasses, display device, display system and display method |
US10613585B2 (en) * | 2014-06-19 | 2020-04-07 | Samsung Electronics Co., Ltd. | Transparent display apparatus, group play system using transparent display apparatus and performance methods thereof |
GB2527548A (en) * | 2014-06-25 | 2015-12-30 | Sharp Kk | Variable barrier pitch correction |
KR102221676B1 (en) * | 2014-07-02 | 2021-03-02 | 삼성전자주식회사 | Method, User terminal and Audio System for the speaker location and level control using the magnetic field |
CN104155769A (en) * | 2014-07-15 | 2014-11-19 | 深圳市亿思达显示科技有限公司 | 2D/3D co-fusion display device and advertizing device |
CN104090818A (en) * | 2014-07-16 | 2014-10-08 | 北京智谷睿拓技术服务有限公司 | Information processing method, device and system |
TWI556624B (en) * | 2014-07-18 | 2016-11-01 | 友達光電股份有限公司 | Image displaying method and image dispaly device |
CN104252058B (en) * | 2014-07-18 | 2017-06-20 | 京东方科技集团股份有限公司 | Grating control method and device, grating, display panel and 3D display devices |
EP3188660A4 (en) | 2014-07-23 | 2018-05-16 | Kineticor, Inc. | Systems, devices, and methods for tracking and compensating for patient motion during a medical imaging scan |
WO2016017695A1 (en) * | 2014-07-30 | 2016-02-04 | オリンパス株式会社 | Image processing device |
WO2016021861A1 (en) | 2014-08-02 | 2016-02-11 | Samsung Electronics Co., Ltd. | Electronic device and user interaction method thereof |
KR102366677B1 (en) * | 2014-08-02 | 2022-02-23 | 삼성전자주식회사 | Apparatus and Method for User Interaction thereof |
CN105323654B (en) * | 2014-08-05 | 2019-02-15 | 优视科技有限公司 | The method and apparatus for carrying out the content-data of automatic network is presented |
JP6327062B2 (en) * | 2014-08-25 | 2018-05-23 | オムロン株式会社 | Display device |
US9925980B2 (en) | 2014-09-17 | 2018-03-27 | Magna Electronics Inc. | Vehicle collision avoidance system with enhanced pedestrian avoidance |
US11205305B2 (en) | 2014-09-22 | 2021-12-21 | Samsung Electronics Company, Ltd. | Presentation of three-dimensional video |
US10257494B2 (en) | 2014-09-22 | 2019-04-09 | Samsung Electronics Co., Ltd. | Reconstruction of three-dimensional video |
CN107079147B (en) | 2014-09-25 | 2019-08-16 | 皇家飞利浦有限公司 | Display equipment with outbound course control and the backlight for this display equipment |
FR3026589A1 (en) * | 2014-09-30 | 2016-04-01 | Orange | METHOD AND DEVICE FOR ADAPTING THE DISPLAY OF A VIDEO STREAM BY A CLIENT |
FR3026852B1 (en) * | 2014-10-03 | 2016-12-02 | Thales Sa | SEMI-TRANSPARENT SCREEN DISPLAY SYSTEM SHARED BY TWO OBSERVERS |
US10506295B2 (en) * | 2014-10-09 | 2019-12-10 | Disney Enterprises, Inc. | Systems and methods for delivering secondary content to viewers |
KR102266064B1 (en) * | 2014-10-15 | 2021-06-18 | 삼성디스플레이 주식회사 | Method of driving display panel, display panel driving apparatus and display apparatus having the display panel driving apparatus |
US20160119685A1 (en) * | 2014-10-21 | 2016-04-28 | Samsung Electronics Co., Ltd. | Display method and display device |
CN104361622B (en) * | 2014-10-31 | 2018-06-19 | 福建星网视易信息系统有限公司 | A kind of interface method for drafting and device |
DE102014225796A1 (en) * | 2014-12-15 | 2016-06-16 | Bayerische Motoren Werke Aktiengesellschaft | Method for controlling a vehicle system |
CN104461440B (en) * | 2014-12-31 | 2018-01-02 | 上海天马有机发光显示技术有限公司 | Rendering intent, rendering device and display device |
EP3243093A4 (en) | 2015-01-10 | 2018-09-19 | LEIA Inc. | Diffraction grating-based backlighting having controlled diffractive coupling efficiency |
WO2016111706A1 (en) | 2015-01-10 | 2016-07-14 | Leia Inc. | Polarization-mixing light guide and multibeam grating-based backlighting using same |
CN107209406B (en) | 2015-01-10 | 2021-07-27 | 镭亚股份有限公司 | Two-dimensional/three-dimensional (2D/3D) switchable display backlight and electronic display |
WO2016118107A1 (en) | 2015-01-19 | 2016-07-28 | Leia Inc. | Unidirectional grating-based backlighting employing a reflective island |
KR20160089600A (en) * | 2015-01-19 | 2016-07-28 | 삼성디스플레이 주식회사 | Display device |
US9690110B2 (en) * | 2015-01-21 | 2017-06-27 | Apple Inc. | Fine-coarse autostereoscopic display |
WO2016122679A1 (en) * | 2015-01-28 | 2016-08-04 | Leia Inc. | Three-dimensional (3d) electronic display |
US9973725B2 (en) * | 2015-02-02 | 2018-05-15 | Continental Teves Ag & Co. Ohg | Modular television system |
JP6359990B2 (en) * | 2015-02-24 | 2018-07-18 | 株式会社ジャパンディスプレイ | Display device and display method |
JP6359989B2 (en) * | 2015-02-24 | 2018-07-18 | 株式会社ジャパンディスプレイ | Display device and display method |
TWI554788B (en) * | 2015-03-04 | 2016-10-21 | 友達光電股份有限公司 | Display device |
KR102321364B1 (en) * | 2015-03-05 | 2021-11-03 | 삼성전자주식회사 | Method for synthesizing a 3d backgroud content and device thereof |
EP3271761B1 (en) | 2015-03-16 | 2021-04-21 | LEIA Inc. | Unidirectional grating-based backlighting employing an angularly selective reflective layer |
JP6411257B2 (en) * | 2015-03-19 | 2018-10-24 | 株式会社ジャパンディスプレイ | Display device and control method thereof |
US9823474B2 (en) | 2015-04-02 | 2017-11-21 | Avegant Corp. | System, apparatus, and method for displaying an image with a wider field of view |
US9995857B2 (en) | 2015-04-03 | 2018-06-12 | Avegant Corp. | System, apparatus, and method for displaying an image using focal modulation |
US9846309B2 (en) * | 2015-04-17 | 2017-12-19 | Dongseo University Technology Headquarters | Depth-priority integral imaging display method using nonuniform dynamic mask array |
KR102329108B1 (en) | 2015-04-23 | 2021-11-18 | 레이아 인코포레이티드 | Dual light guide grating-based backlight and electronic display using same |
US10360617B2 (en) | 2015-04-24 | 2019-07-23 | Walmart Apollo, Llc | Automated shopping apparatus and method in response to consumption |
US9705936B2 (en) * | 2015-04-24 | 2017-07-11 | Mersive Technologies, Inc. | System and method for interactive and real-time visualization of distributed media |
KR102239156B1 (en) | 2015-05-09 | 2021-04-12 | 레이아 인코포레이티드 | Color-scanning grating-based backlight and electronic display using same |
CN104834104B (en) * | 2015-05-25 | 2017-05-24 | 京东方科技集团股份有限公司 | 2D/3D switchable display panel, and display method and display device thereof |
ES2819239T3 (en) | 2015-05-30 | 2021-04-15 | Leia Inc | Vehicle display system |
US10904091B2 (en) | 2015-06-03 | 2021-01-26 | Avago Technologies International Sales Pte. Limited | System for network-based reallocation of functions |
CN104883559A (en) * | 2015-06-06 | 2015-09-02 | 深圳市虚拟现实科技有限公司 | Video playing method and video playing device |
CN104851394B (en) * | 2015-06-10 | 2017-11-28 | 京东方科技集团股份有限公司 | A kind of display device and display methods |
CN104849870B (en) * | 2015-06-12 | 2018-01-09 | 京东方科技集团股份有限公司 | Display panel and display device |
CN107810631A (en) * | 2015-06-16 | 2018-03-16 | Lg电子株式会社 | Broadcast singal dispensing device, broadcast receiver, broadcast singal sending method and broadcast signal received method |
US9846310B2 (en) * | 2015-06-22 | 2017-12-19 | Innolux Corporation | 3D image display device with improved depth ranges |
GB2540376A (en) * | 2015-07-14 | 2017-01-18 | Sharp Kk | Parallax barrier with independently controllable regions |
GB2540377A (en) | 2015-07-14 | 2017-01-18 | Sharp Kk | Parallax barrier with independently controllable regions |
FR3038995B1 (en) * | 2015-07-15 | 2018-05-11 | F4 | INTERACTIVE DEVICE WITH CUSTOMIZABLE DISPLAY |
WO2017015056A1 (en) * | 2015-07-17 | 2017-01-26 | Abl Ip Holding Llc | Arrangements for software configurable lighting device |
EP3325401A1 (en) | 2015-07-17 | 2018-05-30 | ABL IP Holding LLC | Systems and methods to provide configuration data to a software configurable lighting device |
EP3325400A1 (en) | 2015-07-17 | 2018-05-30 | ABL IP Holding LLC | Software configurable lighting device |
US9943247B2 (en) | 2015-07-28 | 2018-04-17 | The University Of Hawai'i | Systems, devices, and methods for detecting false movements for motion correction during a medical imaging scan |
US10079000B2 (en) | 2015-08-12 | 2018-09-18 | Microsoft Technology Licensing, Llc | Reducing display degradation |
CN105100783B (en) * | 2015-08-19 | 2018-03-23 | 京东方科技集团股份有限公司 | 3D display device and 3D display method |
US10186188B2 (en) * | 2015-09-23 | 2019-01-22 | Motorola Solutions, Inc. | Multi-angle simultaneous view light-emitting diode display |
EP3148188A1 (en) * | 2015-09-24 | 2017-03-29 | Airbus Operations GmbH | Virtual windows for airborne verhicles |
FR3042620B1 (en) | 2015-10-16 | 2017-12-08 | F4 | INTERACTIVE WEB DEVICE WITH CUSTOMIZABLE DISPLAY |
CN106254845B (en) * | 2015-10-20 | 2017-08-25 | 深圳超多维光电子有限公司 | A kind of method of bore hole stereoscopic display, device and electronic equipment |
CN105306866A (en) * | 2015-10-27 | 2016-02-03 | 青岛海信电器股份有限公司 | Frame rate conversion method and device |
RU2720660C2 (en) * | 2015-11-10 | 2020-05-12 | Конинклейке Филипс Н.В. | Display device and a display device control method |
US11079931B2 (en) | 2015-11-13 | 2021-08-03 | Harman International Industries, Incorporated | User interface for in-vehicle system |
US10716515B2 (en) | 2015-11-23 | 2020-07-21 | Kineticor, Inc. | Systems, devices, and methods for tracking and compensating for patient motion during a medical imaging scan |
US10144419B2 (en) | 2015-11-23 | 2018-12-04 | Magna Electronics Inc. | Vehicle dynamic control system for emergency handling |
US9711128B2 (en) | 2015-12-04 | 2017-07-18 | Opentv, Inc. | Combined audio for multiple content presentation |
CA3011552A1 (en) | 2016-01-19 | 2017-07-27 | Walmart Apollo, Llc | Consumable item ordering system |
US10373544B1 (en) | 2016-01-29 | 2019-08-06 | Leia, Inc. | Transformation from tiled to composite images |
CN108885352B (en) * | 2016-01-29 | 2021-11-23 | 奇跃公司 | Display of three-dimensional images |
WO2017156622A1 (en) * | 2016-03-13 | 2017-09-21 | Rising Sun Productions Limited | Head-mounted audiovisual capture device |
US10063917B2 (en) | 2016-03-16 | 2018-08-28 | Sorenson Media Inc. | Fingerprint layouts for content fingerprinting |
US10691880B2 (en) * | 2016-03-29 | 2020-06-23 | Microsoft Technology Licensing, Llc | Ink in an electronic document |
US10200428B1 (en) * | 2016-03-30 | 2019-02-05 | Amazon Technologies, Inc. | Unicast routing of a media stream to subscribers |
US10185787B1 (en) * | 2016-04-06 | 2019-01-22 | Bentley Systems, Incorporated | Tool for accurate onsite model visualization that facilitates environment interaction |
US10256277B2 (en) * | 2016-04-11 | 2019-04-09 | Abl Ip Holding Llc | Luminaire utilizing a transparent organic light emitting device display |
WO2017188955A1 (en) * | 2016-04-28 | 2017-11-02 | Hewlett-Packard Development Company, L.P. | Digital display devices |
US10353534B2 (en) | 2016-05-13 | 2019-07-16 | Sap Se | Overview page in multi application user interface |
US10579238B2 (en) | 2016-05-13 | 2020-03-03 | Sap Se | Flexible screen layout across multiple platforms |
TWI626475B (en) * | 2016-06-08 | 2018-06-11 | 國立交通大學 | Stereoscopic display screen and stereoscopic display system |
KR102483042B1 (en) | 2016-06-17 | 2022-12-29 | 디티에스, 인코포레이티드 | Distance panning using near/far rendering |
CN105842865B (en) * | 2016-06-21 | 2018-01-30 | 成都工业学院 | A kind of slim grating 3D display device based on slit grating |
CN106257321B (en) * | 2016-06-28 | 2021-11-30 | 京东方科技集团股份有限公司 | 3D head-up display system and method |
US20180035236A1 (en) * | 2016-07-28 | 2018-02-01 | Leonardo Basterra | Audio System with Binaural Elements and Method of Use with Perspective Switching |
US10235010B2 (en) | 2016-07-28 | 2019-03-19 | Canon Kabushiki Kaisha | Information processing apparatus configured to generate an audio signal corresponding to a virtual viewpoint image, information processing system, information processing method, and non-transitory computer-readable storage medium |
US10089063B2 (en) | 2016-08-10 | 2018-10-02 | Qualcomm Incorporated | Multimedia device for processing spatialized audio based on movement |
US10154253B2 (en) * | 2016-08-29 | 2018-12-11 | Disney Enterprises, Inc. | Multi-view displays using images encoded with orbital angular momentum (OAM) on a pixel or image basis |
WO2018044711A1 (en) * | 2016-08-31 | 2018-03-08 | Wal-Mart Stores, Inc. | Systems and methods of enabling retail shopping while disabling components based on location |
US10127715B2 (en) * | 2016-11-18 | 2018-11-13 | Zspace, Inc. | 3D user interface—non-native stereoscopic image conversion |
US11003305B2 (en) * | 2016-11-18 | 2021-05-11 | Zspace, Inc. | 3D user interface |
US10271043B2 (en) * | 2016-11-18 | 2019-04-23 | Zspace, Inc. | 3D user interface—360-degree visualization of 2D webpage content |
US10621898B2 (en) * | 2016-11-23 | 2020-04-14 | Pure Depth Limited | Multi-layer display system for vehicle dash or the like |
GB2556910A (en) * | 2016-11-25 | 2018-06-13 | Nokia Technologies Oy | Virtual reality display |
US10170060B2 (en) * | 2016-12-27 | 2019-01-01 | Facebook Technologies, Llc | Interlaced liquid crystal display panel and backlight used in a head mounted display |
US10856016B2 (en) | 2016-12-31 | 2020-12-01 | Turner Broadcasting System, Inc. | Publishing disparate live media output streams in mixed mode based on user selection |
US10645462B2 (en) | 2016-12-31 | 2020-05-05 | Turner Broadcasting System, Inc. | Dynamic channel versioning in a broadcast air chain |
US10992973B2 (en) | 2016-12-31 | 2021-04-27 | Turner Broadcasting System, Inc. | Publishing a plurality of disparate live media output stream manifests using live input streams and pre-encoded media assets |
US10694231B2 (en) | 2016-12-31 | 2020-06-23 | Turner Broadcasting System, Inc. | Dynamic channel versioning in a broadcast air chain based on user preferences |
US10965967B2 (en) | 2016-12-31 | 2021-03-30 | Turner Broadcasting System, Inc. | Publishing a disparate per-client live media output stream based on dynamic insertion of targeted non-programming content and customized programming content |
US11038932B2 (en) | 2016-12-31 | 2021-06-15 | Turner Broadcasting System, Inc. | System for establishing a shared media session for one or more client devices |
US10075753B2 (en) | 2016-12-31 | 2018-09-11 | Turner Broadcasting System, Inc. | Dynamic scheduling and channel creation based on user selection |
US11051061B2 (en) | 2016-12-31 | 2021-06-29 | Turner Broadcasting System, Inc. | Publishing a disparate live media output stream using pre-encoded media assets |
US11051074B2 (en) | 2016-12-31 | 2021-06-29 | Turner Broadcasting System, Inc. | Publishing disparate live media output streams using live input streams |
US11134309B2 (en) | 2016-12-31 | 2021-09-28 | Turner Broadcasting System, Inc. | Creation of channels using pre-encoded media assets |
US10425700B2 (en) | 2016-12-31 | 2019-09-24 | Turner Broadcasting System, Inc. | Dynamic scheduling and channel creation based on real-time or near-real-time content context analysis |
US11109086B2 (en) | 2016-12-31 | 2021-08-31 | Turner Broadcasting System, Inc. | Publishing disparate live media output streams in mixed mode |
US11503352B2 (en) | 2016-12-31 | 2022-11-15 | Turner Broadcasting System, Inc. | Dynamic scheduling and channel creation based on external data |
CN108287679A (en) * | 2017-01-10 | 2018-07-17 | 中兴通讯股份有限公司 | A kind of display characteristic parameter adjusting method and terminal |
CN106710531B (en) * | 2017-01-19 | 2019-11-05 | 深圳市华星光电技术有限公司 | Backlight control circuit and electronic device |
US11044464B2 (en) * | 2017-02-09 | 2021-06-22 | Fyusion, Inc. | Dynamic content modification of image and video based multi-view interactive digital media representations |
US10650416B1 (en) * | 2017-02-17 | 2020-05-12 | Sprint Communications Company L.P. | Live production interface and response testing |
US10210833B2 (en) * | 2017-03-31 | 2019-02-19 | Panasonic Liquid Crystal Display Co., Ltd. | Display device |
US10078135B1 (en) * | 2017-04-25 | 2018-09-18 | Intel Corporation | Identifying a physical distance using audio channels |
WO2018213101A1 (en) | 2017-05-14 | 2018-11-22 | Leia Inc. | Multiview backlight, display, and method employing active emitters |
US10375375B2 (en) | 2017-05-15 | 2019-08-06 | Lg Electronics Inc. | Method of providing fixed region information or offset region information for subtitle in virtual reality system and device for controlling the same |
FR3066672B1 (en) * | 2017-05-19 | 2020-05-22 | Sagemcom Broadband Sas | METHOD FOR COMMUNICATING AN IMMERSIVE VIDEO |
US11245964B2 (en) | 2017-05-25 | 2022-02-08 | Turner Broadcasting System, Inc. | Management and delivery of over-the-top services over different content-streaming systems |
CN116666814A (en) | 2017-05-30 | 2023-08-29 | 奇跃公司 | Power supply assembly with fan assembly for electronic device |
EP3639136B1 (en) * | 2017-06-16 | 2023-07-19 | Microsoft Technology Licensing, LLC | Generating user interface containers |
CN107146573B (en) * | 2017-06-26 | 2020-05-01 | 上海天马有机发光显示技术有限公司 | Display panel, display method thereof and display device |
EP3422151A1 (en) * | 2017-06-30 | 2019-01-02 | Nokia Technologies Oy | Methods, apparatus, systems, computer programs for enabling consumption of virtual content for mediated reality |
US20190026004A1 (en) * | 2017-07-18 | 2019-01-24 | Chicago Labs, LLC | Three Dimensional Icons for Computer Applications |
JP7398962B2 (en) | 2017-07-28 | 2023-12-15 | マジック リープ, インコーポレイテッド | Fan assembly for displaying images |
CN107396087B (en) * | 2017-07-31 | 2019-03-12 | 京东方科技集团股份有限公司 | Naked eye three-dimensional display device and its control method |
US10692279B2 (en) * | 2017-07-31 | 2020-06-23 | Quantum Spatial, Inc. | Systems and methods for facilitating making partial selections of multidimensional information while maintaining a multidimensional structure |
US11049218B2 (en) | 2017-08-11 | 2021-06-29 | Samsung Electronics Company, Ltd. | Seamless image stitching |
US10515397B2 (en) * | 2017-09-08 | 2019-12-24 | Uptown Network LLC | System and method for facilitating virtual gift giving |
CN107707901B (en) * | 2017-09-30 | 2019-10-25 | 深圳超多维科技有限公司 | It is a kind of for the display methods of naked eye 3D display screen, device and equipment |
CN108205411A (en) * | 2017-09-30 | 2018-06-26 | 中兴通讯股份有限公司 | Display changeover method and device, terminal |
US10777057B1 (en) * | 2017-11-30 | 2020-09-15 | Amazon Technologies, Inc. | Premises security system with audio simulating occupancy |
US10212532B1 (en) | 2017-12-13 | 2019-02-19 | At&T Intellectual Property I, L.P. | Immersive media with media device |
EP3503579B1 (en) * | 2017-12-20 | 2022-03-23 | Nokia Technologies Oy | Multi-camera device |
US11132842B2 (en) * | 2017-12-22 | 2021-09-28 | Unity IPR ApS | Method and system for synchronizing a plurality of augmented reality devices to a virtual reality device |
JP2019154008A (en) * | 2018-03-06 | 2019-09-12 | シャープ株式会社 | Stereoscopic image display device, method for displaying liquid crystal display, and program for liquid crystal display |
CN108469682A (en) * | 2018-03-30 | 2018-08-31 | 京东方科技集团股份有限公司 | A kind of three-dimensional display apparatus and its 3 D displaying method |
CN108490703B (en) * | 2018-04-03 | 2021-10-15 | 京东方科技集团股份有限公司 | Display system and display control method thereof |
US11025892B1 (en) | 2018-04-04 | 2021-06-01 | James Andrew Aman | System and method for simultaneously providing public and private images |
US10523921B2 (en) * | 2018-04-06 | 2019-12-31 | Zspace, Inc. | Replacing 2D images with 3D images |
US10523922B2 (en) * | 2018-04-06 | 2019-12-31 | Zspace, Inc. | Identifying replacement 3D images for 2D images via ranking criteria |
KR102622714B1 (en) | 2018-04-08 | 2024-01-08 | 디티에스, 인코포레이티드 | Ambisonic depth extraction |
CN112567759B (en) * | 2018-04-11 | 2023-09-29 | 阿尔卡鲁兹公司 | Digital media system supporting multiple features regarding virtual reality content |
US10999573B2 (en) * | 2018-04-25 | 2021-05-04 | Raxium, Inc. | Partial light field display architecture |
CN112005289B (en) | 2018-04-26 | 2023-07-18 | 株式会社半导体能源研究所 | Display device and electronic apparatus |
EP3579584A1 (en) | 2018-06-07 | 2019-12-11 | Nokia Technologies Oy | Controlling rendering of a spatial audio scene |
US10600246B2 (en) * | 2018-06-15 | 2020-03-24 | Microsoft Technology Licensing, Llc | Pinning virtual reality passthrough regions to real-world locations |
KR102506873B1 (en) * | 2018-07-18 | 2023-03-08 | 현대자동차주식회사 | Vehicle cluster having a three-dimensional effect, system having the same and method providing a three-dimensional scene thereof |
US11276360B2 (en) * | 2018-07-27 | 2022-03-15 | Kyocera Corporation | Display device and mobile body |
US10762394B2 (en) | 2018-07-31 | 2020-09-01 | Intel Corporation | System and method for 3D blob classification and transmission |
US11212506B2 (en) | 2018-07-31 | 2021-12-28 | Intel Corporation | Reduced rendering of six-degree of freedom video |
US11178373B2 (en) | 2018-07-31 | 2021-11-16 | Intel Corporation | Adaptive resolution of point cloud and viewpoint prediction for video streaming in computing environments |
US10887574B2 (en) | 2018-07-31 | 2021-01-05 | Intel Corporation | Selective packing of patches for immersive video |
US10893299B2 (en) | 2018-07-31 | 2021-01-12 | Intel Corporation | Surface normal vector processing mechanism |
US10757324B2 (en) | 2018-08-03 | 2020-08-25 | Semiconductor Components Industries, Llc | Transform processors for gradually switching between image transforms |
US11057631B2 (en) | 2018-10-10 | 2021-07-06 | Intel Corporation | Point cloud coding standard conformance definition in computing environments |
CN109192136B (en) * | 2018-10-25 | 2020-12-22 | 京东方科技集团股份有限公司 | Display substrate, light field display device and driving method thereof |
US11727859B2 (en) | 2018-10-25 | 2023-08-15 | Boe Technology Group Co., Ltd. | Display panel and display device |
US10880534B2 (en) * | 2018-11-09 | 2020-12-29 | Korea Electronics Technology Institute | Electronic device and method for tiled video multi-channel playback |
KR102023905B1 (en) * | 2018-11-09 | 2019-11-04 | 전자부품연구원 | Electronic device and method for multi-channel reproduction of tiled image |
US10699673B2 (en) * | 2018-11-19 | 2020-06-30 | Facebook Technologies, Llc | Apparatus, systems, and methods for local dimming in brightness-controlled environments |
CN109598254B (en) * | 2018-12-17 | 2019-11-26 | 海南大学 | The space representation combined optimization method of Group-oriented |
US10880606B2 (en) | 2018-12-21 | 2020-12-29 | Turner Broadcasting System, Inc. | Disparate live media output stream playout and broadcast distribution |
US11082734B2 (en) | 2018-12-21 | 2021-08-03 | Turner Broadcasting System, Inc. | Publishing a disparate live media output stream that complies with distribution format regulations |
US10873774B2 (en) | 2018-12-22 | 2020-12-22 | Turner Broadcasting System, Inc. | Publishing a disparate live media output stream manifest that includes one or more media segments corresponding to key events |
CN109725819B (en) * | 2018-12-25 | 2022-12-13 | 浙江玖炫智能信息技术有限公司 | Interface display method and device, double-screen double-system terminal and readable storage medium |
US10854171B2 (en) * | 2018-12-31 | 2020-12-01 | Samsung Electronics Co., Ltd. | Multi-user personal display system and applications thereof |
CN109686303B (en) * | 2019-01-28 | 2021-09-17 | 厦门天马微电子有限公司 | Organic light-emitting display panel, organic light-emitting display device and compensation method |
US10932080B2 (en) | 2019-02-14 | 2021-02-23 | Microsoft Technology Licensing, Llc | Multi-sensor object tracking for modifying audio |
CN110007475A (en) * | 2019-04-17 | 2019-07-12 | 万维云视(上海)数码科技有限公司 | Utilize the method and apparatus of virtual depth compensation eyesight |
US10504453B1 (en) | 2019-04-18 | 2019-12-10 | Apple Inc. | Displays with adjustable direct-lit backlight units |
US10964275B2 (en) | 2019-04-18 | 2021-03-30 | Apple Inc. | Displays with adjustable direct-lit backlight units and adaptive processing |
US10571744B1 (en) | 2019-04-18 | 2020-02-25 | Apple Inc. | Displays with adjustable direct-lit backlight units and power consumption compensation |
EP3938884A4 (en) * | 2019-04-29 | 2022-11-09 | Hewlett-Packard Development Company, L.P. | Wireless configuration of display attribute |
CN110262051B (en) * | 2019-07-26 | 2023-12-29 | 成都工业学院 | Retroreflective stereoscopic display device based on directional light source |
EP3779612A1 (en) * | 2019-08-16 | 2021-02-17 | The Swatch Group Research and Development Ltd | Method for broadcasting a message to the wearer of a watch |
CN112394845B (en) * | 2019-08-19 | 2024-03-01 | 北京小米移动软件有限公司 | Distance sensor module, display device, electronic equipment and distance detection method |
US11335095B1 (en) * | 2019-08-27 | 2022-05-17 | Gopro, Inc. | Systems and methods for characterizing visual content |
KR20220054850A (en) | 2019-09-03 | 2022-05-03 | 라이트 필드 랩 인코포레이티드 | Lightfield display system for gaming environments |
CN111415629B (en) * | 2020-04-28 | 2022-02-22 | Tcl华星光电技术有限公司 | Display device driving method and display device |
US11750795B2 (en) | 2020-05-12 | 2023-09-05 | Apple Inc. | Displays with viewer tracking |
US11936844B1 (en) | 2020-08-11 | 2024-03-19 | Apple Inc. | Pre-processing in a display pipeline |
CN112505942B (en) * | 2021-02-03 | 2021-04-20 | 成都工业学院 | Multi-resolution stereoscopic display device based on rear projection light source |
CN113992885B (en) * | 2021-09-22 | 2023-03-21 | 联想(北京)有限公司 | Data synchronization method and device |
NL2030325B1 (en) * | 2021-12-28 | 2023-07-03 | Dimenco Holding B V | Scaling of three-dimensional content for an autostereoscopic display device |
KR20230112485A (en) * | 2022-01-20 | 2023-07-27 | 엘지전자 주식회사 | Display device and operating method thereof |
CN114936002A (en) * | 2022-06-10 | 2022-08-23 | 斑马网络技术有限公司 | Interface display method and device and vehicle |
Citations (109)
Publication number | Priority date | Publication date | Assignee | Title |
---|---|---|---|---|
US4829365A (en) * | 1986-03-07 | 1989-05-09 | Dimension Technologies, Inc. | Autostereoscopic display with illuminating lines, light valve and mask |
US5493427A (en) * | 1993-05-25 | 1996-02-20 | Sharp Kabushiki Kaisha | Three-dimensional display unit with a variable lens |
US5615046A (en) * | 1995-01-23 | 1997-03-25 | Cyber Scientific Inc. | Stereoscopic viewing system |
US5855425A (en) * | 1996-07-19 | 1999-01-05 | Sanyo Electric Co., Ltd. | Stereoscopic display |
US5945965A (en) * | 1995-06-29 | 1999-08-31 | Canon Kabushiki Kaisha | Stereoscopic image display method |
US5959597A (en) * | 1995-09-28 | 1999-09-28 | Sony Corporation | Image/audio reproducing system |
US5969850A (en) * | 1996-09-27 | 1999-10-19 | Sharp Kabushiki Kaisha | Spatial light modulator, directional display and directional light source |
US5990975A (en) * | 1996-11-22 | 1999-11-23 | Acer Peripherals, Inc. | Dual screen displaying device |
US6023277A (en) * | 1996-07-03 | 2000-02-08 | Canon Kabushiki Kaisha | Display control apparatus and method |
US6049424A (en) * | 1995-11-15 | 2000-04-11 | Sanyo Electric Co., Ltd. | Three dimensional display device |
US6094216A (en) * | 1995-05-22 | 2000-07-25 | Canon Kabushiki Kaisha | Stereoscopic image display method, and stereoscopic image display apparatus using the method |
US6144375A (en) * | 1998-08-14 | 2000-11-07 | Praja Inc. | Multi-perspective viewer for content-based interactivity |
US6188442B1 (en) * | 1997-08-01 | 2001-02-13 | International Business Machines Corporation | Multiviewer display system for television monitors |
US6285368B1 (en) * | 1997-02-10 | 2001-09-04 | Canon Kabushiki Kaisha | Image display system and image display apparatus and information processing apparatus in the system |
US20020010798A1 (en) * | 2000-04-20 | 2002-01-24 | Israel Ben-Shaul | Differentiated content and application delivery via internet |
US20020037037A1 (en) * | 2000-09-22 | 2002-03-28 | Philips Electronics North America Corporation | Preferred transmission/streaming order of fine-granular scalability |
US20020167862A1 (en) * | 2001-04-03 | 2002-11-14 | Carlo Tomasi | Method and apparatus for approximating a source position of a sound-causing event for determining an input used in operating an electronic device |
US20020171666A1 (en) * | 1999-02-19 | 2002-11-21 | Takaaki Endo | Image processing apparatus for interpolating and generating images from an arbitrary view point |
US20030012425A1 (en) * | 1998-11-12 | 2003-01-16 | Canon Kabushiki Kaisha | Viewpoint position detection apparatus and method, and stereoscopic image display system |
US20030103165A1 (en) * | 2000-05-19 | 2003-06-05 | Werner Bullinger | System for operating a consumer electronics appaliance |
US20030137506A1 (en) * | 2001-11-30 | 2003-07-24 | Daniel Efran | Image-based rendering for 3D viewing |
US20030154261A1 (en) * | 1994-10-17 | 2003-08-14 | The Regents Of The University Of California, A Corporation Of The State Of California | Distributed hypermedia method and system for automatically invoking external application providing interaction and display of embedded objects within a hypermedia document |
US20030223499A1 (en) * | 2002-04-09 | 2003-12-04 | Nicholas Routhier | Process and system for encoding and playback of stereoscopic video sequences |
US20040027452A1 (en) * | 2002-08-07 | 2004-02-12 | Yun Kug Jin | Method and apparatus for multiplexing multi-view three-dimensional moving picture |
US6697687B1 (en) * | 1998-11-09 | 2004-02-24 | Hitachi, Ltd. | Image display apparatus having audio output control means in accordance with image signal type |
US20040036763A1 (en) * | 1994-11-14 | 2004-02-26 | Swift David C. | Intelligent method and system for producing and displaying stereoscopically-multiplexed images of three-dimensional objects for use in realistic stereoscopic viewing thereof in interactive virtual reality display environments |
US20040041747A1 (en) * | 2002-08-27 | 2004-03-04 | Nec Corporation | 3D image/2D image switching display apparatus and portable terminal device |
US6710920B1 (en) * | 1998-03-27 | 2004-03-23 | Sanyo Electric Co., Ltd | Stereoscopic display |
US20040109093A1 (en) * | 2002-12-05 | 2004-06-10 | Small-Stryker Aaron Tug | Method and apparatus for simultaneous television video presentation and separate viewing of different broadcasts |
US20040141237A1 (en) * | 1995-06-07 | 2004-07-22 | Wohlstadter Jacob N. | Three dimensional imaging system |
US20040164292A1 (en) * | 2003-02-21 | 2004-08-26 | Yeh-Jiun Tung | Transflective display having an OLED backlight |
US20040239231A1 (en) * | 2002-10-30 | 2004-12-02 | Keisuke Miyagawa | Display device and electronic equipment |
US20040252187A1 (en) * | 2001-09-10 | 2004-12-16 | Alden Ray M. | Processes and apparatuses for efficient multiple program and 3D display |
US20050073472A1 (en) * | 2003-07-26 | 2005-04-07 | Samsung Electronics Co., Ltd. | Method of removing Moire pattern in 3D image display apparatus using complete parallax |
US20050128353A1 (en) * | 2003-12-16 | 2005-06-16 | Young Bruce A. | System and method for using second remote control device for sub-picture control in television receiver |
US20050237487A1 (en) * | 2004-04-23 | 2005-10-27 | Chang Nelson L A | Color wheel assembly for stereoscopic imaging |
US20050248561A1 (en) * | 2002-04-25 | 2005-11-10 | Norio Ito | Multimedia information generation method and multimedia information reproduction device |
US20050259147A1 (en) * | 2002-07-16 | 2005-11-24 | Nam Jeho | Apparatus and method for adapting 2d and 3d stereoscopic video signal |
US20060026090A1 (en) * | 2002-12-09 | 2006-02-02 | Sam Balabon | System and method for facilitating trading of financial instruments |
US20060050785A1 (en) * | 2004-09-09 | 2006-03-09 | Nucore Technology Inc. | Inserting a high resolution still image into a lower resolution video stream |
US7030903B2 (en) * | 1997-02-20 | 2006-04-18 | Canon Kabushiki Kaisha | Image display system, information processing apparatus, and method of controlling the same |
US20060087556A1 (en) * | 2004-10-21 | 2006-04-27 | Kazunari Era | Stereoscopic image display device |
US7038698B1 (en) * | 1996-02-08 | 2006-05-02 | Palm Charles S | 3D stereo browser for the internet |
US20060109242A1 (en) * | 2004-11-19 | 2006-05-25 | Simpkins Daniel S | User interface for impaired users |
US20060139490A1 (en) * | 2004-12-15 | 2006-06-29 | Fekkes Wilhelmus F | Synchronizing audio with delayed video |
US20060139448A1 (en) * | 2004-12-29 | 2006-06-29 | Samsung Electronics Co., Ltd. | 3D displays with flexible switching capability of 2D/3D viewing modes |
US7091471B2 (en) * | 2004-03-15 | 2006-08-15 | Agilent Technologies, Inc. | Using eye detection for providing control and power management of electronic devices |
US7123213B2 (en) * | 1995-10-05 | 2006-10-17 | Semiconductor Energy Laboratory Co., Ltd. | Three dimensional display unit and display method |
US20060244918A1 (en) * | 2005-04-27 | 2006-11-02 | Actuality Systems, Inc. | Minimized-thickness angular scanner of electromagnetic radiation |
US20060256302A1 (en) * | 2005-05-13 | 2006-11-16 | Microsoft Corporation | Three-dimensional (3D) image projection |
US20060256136A1 (en) * | 2001-10-01 | 2006-11-16 | Adobe Systems Incorporated, A Delaware Corporation | Compositing two-dimensional and three-dimensional image layers |
US20060262376A1 (en) * | 2005-05-19 | 2006-11-23 | Jonathan Mather | Display |
US20060271791A1 (en) * | 2005-05-27 | 2006-11-30 | Sbc Knowledge Ventures, L.P. | Method and system for biometric based access control of media content presentation devices |
US20070002041A1 (en) * | 2005-07-02 | 2007-01-04 | Samsung Electronics Co., Ltd. | Method and apparatus for encoding/decoding video data to implement local three-dimensional video |
US20070008406A1 (en) * | 2005-07-08 | 2007-01-11 | Samsung Electronics Co., Ltd. | High resolution 2D-3D switchable autostereoscopic display apparatus |
US20070008620A1 (en) * | 2005-07-11 | 2007-01-11 | Samsung Electronics Co., Ltd. | Switchable autostereoscopic display |
US20070052807A1 (en) * | 2005-09-07 | 2007-03-08 | Fuji Xerox Co., Ltd. | System and method for user monitoring interface of 3-D video streams from multiple cameras |
US7190518B1 (en) * | 1996-01-22 | 2007-03-13 | 3Ality, Inc. | Systems for and methods of three dimensional viewing |
US20070072674A1 (en) * | 2005-09-12 | 2007-03-29 | Nintendo Co., Ltd. | Information processing program |
US20070085814A1 (en) * | 2003-09-20 | 2007-04-19 | Koninklijke Philips Electronics N.V. | Image display device |
US20070096125A1 (en) * | 2005-06-24 | 2007-05-03 | Uwe Vogel | Illumination device |
US20070097103A1 (en) * | 2003-09-11 | 2007-05-03 | Shoji Yoshioka | Portable display device |
US20070097208A1 (en) * | 2003-05-28 | 2007-05-03 | Satoshi Takemoto | Stereoscopic image display apparatus, text data processing apparatus, program, and storing medium |
US20070139371A1 (en) * | 2005-04-04 | 2007-06-21 | Harsham Bret A | Control system and method for differentiating multiple users utilizing multi-view display devices |
US20070147827A1 (en) * | 2005-12-28 | 2007-06-28 | Arnold Sheynman | Methods and apparatus for wireless stereo video streaming |
US20070146267A1 (en) * | 2005-12-22 | 2007-06-28 | Lg.Philips Lcd Co., Ltd. | Display device and method of driving the same |
US20070153916A1 (en) * | 2005-12-30 | 2007-07-05 | Sharp Laboratories Of America, Inc. | Wireless video transmission system |
US20070153122A1 (en) * | 2005-12-30 | 2007-07-05 | Ayite Nii A | Apparatus and method for simultaneous multiple video channel viewing |
US20070162392A1 (en) * | 2006-01-12 | 2007-07-12 | Microsoft Corporation | Management of Streaming Content |
US20070225994A1 (en) * | 2006-03-17 | 2007-09-27 | Moore Barrett H | Method for Providing Private Civil Security Services Bundled with Second Party Products |
US20070226258A1 (en) * | 2006-03-27 | 2007-09-27 | Thomas Eldred Lambdin | Article inspection apparatus |
US20070258140A1 (en) * | 2006-05-04 | 2007-11-08 | Samsung Electronics Co., Ltd. | Multiview autostereoscopic display |
US20070270218A1 (en) * | 2006-05-08 | 2007-11-22 | Nintendo Co., Ltd. | Storage medium having game program stored thereon and game apparatus |
US20070296874A1 (en) * | 2004-10-20 | 2007-12-27 | Fujitsu Ten Limited | Display Device,Method of Adjusting the Image Quality of the Display Device, Device for Adjusting the Image Quality and Device for Adjusting the Contrast |
US20080025390A1 (en) * | 2006-07-25 | 2008-01-31 | Fang Shi | Adaptive video frame interpolation |
US20080037120A1 (en) * | 2006-08-08 | 2008-02-14 | Samsung Electronics Co., Ltd | High resolution 2d/3d switchable display apparatus |
US20080043644A1 (en) * | 2006-08-18 | 2008-02-21 | Microsoft Corporation | Techniques to perform rate matching for multimedia conference calls |
US20080043096A1 (en) * | 2006-04-04 | 2008-02-21 | Anthony Vetro | Method and System for Decoding and Displaying 3D Light Fields |
US20080068329A1 (en) * | 2006-09-15 | 2008-03-20 | Samsung Electronics Co., Ltd. | Multi-view autostereoscopic display with improved resolution |
US20080086685A1 (en) * | 2006-10-05 | 2008-04-10 | James Janky | Method for delivering tailored asset information to a device |
US7359105B2 (en) * | 2006-02-07 | 2008-04-15 | Sharp Kabushiki Kaisha | Spatial light modulator and a display device |
US20080126557A1 (en) * | 2006-09-08 | 2008-05-29 | Tetsuro Motoyama | System, method, and computer program product using an SNMP implementation to obtain vendor information from remote devices |
US20080123182A1 (en) * | 2006-11-29 | 2008-05-29 | Honeywell International Inc. | Directional display |
US20080133122A1 (en) * | 2006-03-29 | 2008-06-05 | Sanyo Electric Co., Ltd. | Multiple visual display device and vehicle-mounted navigation system |
US20080150853A1 (en) * | 2006-12-22 | 2008-06-26 | Hong Kong Applied Science and Technology Research Institute Company Limited | Backlight device and liquid crystal display incorporating the backlight device |
US20080165176A1 (en) * | 2006-09-28 | 2008-07-10 | Charles Jens Archer | Method of Video Display and Multiplayer Gaming |
US20080168129A1 (en) * | 2007-01-08 | 2008-07-10 | Jeffrey Robbin | Pairing a Media Server and a Media Client |
US20080184301A1 (en) * | 1999-10-29 | 2008-07-31 | Boylan Peter C | Interactive television system with programming-related links |
US20080192112A1 (en) * | 2005-03-18 | 2008-08-14 | Ntt Data Sanyo System Corporation | Stereoscopic Image Display Apparatus, Stereoscopic Image Displaying Method And Computer Program Product |
US20080191964A1 (en) * | 2005-04-22 | 2008-08-14 | Koninklijke Philips Electronics, N.V. | Auto-Stereoscopic Display With Mixed Mode For Concurrent Display of Two- and Three-Dimensional Images |
US20080204550A1 (en) * | 2005-04-29 | 2008-08-28 | Koninklijke Philips Electronics, N.V. | Stereoscopic Display Apparatus |
US20080246757A1 (en) * | 2005-04-25 | 2008-10-09 | Masahiro Ito | 3D Image Generation and Display System |
US7440193B2 (en) * | 2004-04-30 | 2008-10-21 | Gunasekaran R Alfred | Wide-angle variable focal length lens system |
US20080259233A1 (en) * | 2005-12-20 | 2008-10-23 | Koninklijke Philips Electronics, N.V. | Autostereoscopic Display Device |
US20080273242A1 (en) * | 2003-09-30 | 2008-11-06 | Graham John Woodgate | Directional Display Apparatus |
US20080284844A1 (en) * | 2003-02-05 | 2008-11-20 | Graham John Woodgate | Switchable Lens |
US20080303832A1 (en) * | 2007-06-11 | 2008-12-11 | Samsung Electronics Co., Ltd. | Method of generating two-dimensional/three-dimensional convertible stereoscopic image bitstream and method and apparatus for displaying the same |
US20090089177A1 (en) * | 2007-09-27 | 2009-04-02 | Helio, Llc | Apparatus, methods and systems for discounted referral and recommendation of electronic content |
US20090138280A1 (en) * | 2007-11-26 | 2009-05-28 | The General Electric Company | Multi-stepped default display protocols |
US20090244266A1 (en) * | 2008-03-26 | 2009-10-01 | Thomas Carl Brigham | Enhanced Three Dimensional Television |
US20100007582A1 (en) * | 2007-04-03 | 2010-01-14 | Sony Computer Entertainment America Inc. | Display viewing system and methods for optimizing display view based on active tracking |
US20100128112A1 (en) * | 2008-11-26 | 2010-05-27 | Samsung Electronics Co., Ltd | Immersive display system for interacting with three-dimensional content |
US20100135640A1 (en) * | 2008-12-03 | 2010-06-03 | Dell Products L.P. | System and Method for Storing and Displaying 3-D Video Content |
US20100299390A1 (en) * | 2009-05-22 | 2010-11-25 | Rachid Alameh | Method and System for Controlling Data Transmission to or From a Mobile Device |
US20100309290A1 (en) * | 2009-06-08 | 2010-12-09 | Stephen Brooks Myers | System for capture and display of stereoscopic content |
US20110157322A1 (en) * | 2009-12-31 | 2011-06-30 | Broadcom Corporation | Controlling a pixel array to support an adaptable light manipulator |
US20110234754A1 (en) * | 2008-11-24 | 2011-09-29 | Koninklijke Philips Electronics N.V. | Combining 3d video and auxiliary data |
US8174564B2 (en) * | 2005-11-30 | 2012-05-08 | Samsung Mobile Display Co., Ltd. | Three-dimensional display device |
US8416247B2 (en) * | 2007-10-09 | 2013-04-09 | Sony Computer Entertaiment America Inc. | Increasing the number of advertising impressions in an interactive environment |
Family Cites Families (154)
Publication number | Priority date | Publication date | Assignee | Title |
---|---|---|---|---|
JPS56109649A (en) | 1980-02-05 | 1981-08-31 | Matsushita Electric Ind Co Ltd | Ultrasonic diagnosing device |
JPH05122733A (en) * | 1991-10-28 | 1993-05-18 | Nippon Hoso Kyokai <Nhk> | Three-dimensional picture display device |
JPH10232626A (en) * | 1997-02-20 | 1998-09-02 | Canon Inc | Stereoscopic image display device |
US6590605B1 (en) | 1998-10-14 | 2003-07-08 | Dimension Technologies, Inc. | Autostereoscopic display |
US6533420B1 (en) | 1999-01-22 | 2003-03-18 | Dimension Technologies, Inc. | Apparatus and method for generating and projecting autostereoscopic images |
US6591306B1 (en) * | 1999-04-01 | 2003-07-08 | Nec Corporation | IP network access for portable devices |
US8271336B2 (en) | 1999-11-22 | 2012-09-18 | Accenture Global Services Gmbh | Increased visibility during order management in a network-based supply chain environment |
US7389214B1 (en) | 2000-05-01 | 2008-06-17 | Accenture, Llp | Category analysis in a market management |
US6765568B2 (en) * | 2000-06-12 | 2004-07-20 | Vrex, Inc. | Electronic stereoscopic media delivery system |
US6856581B1 (en) | 2000-10-31 | 2005-02-15 | International Business Machines Corporation | Batteryless, oscillatorless, binary time cell usable as an horological device with associated programming methods and devices |
WO2002037471A2 (en) | 2000-11-03 | 2002-05-10 | Zoesis, Inc. | Interactive character system |
DE10103922A1 (en) | 2001-01-30 | 2002-08-01 | Physoptics Opto Electronic Gmb | Interactive data viewing and operating system |
US20020194604A1 (en) | 2001-06-19 | 2002-12-19 | Sanchez Elizabeth C. | Interactive television virtual shopping cart |
JP2003322824A (en) * | 2002-02-26 | 2003-11-14 | Namco Ltd | Stereoscopic video display device and electronic apparatus |
JP3738843B2 (en) | 2002-06-11 | 2006-01-25 | ソニー株式会社 | Image detection apparatus, image detection method, and image detection program |
JP2004072202A (en) | 2002-08-01 | 2004-03-04 | Ktfreetel Co Ltd | Separate billing method of communication utility charge and apparatus therefor |
US20080008202A1 (en) | 2002-10-31 | 2008-01-10 | Terrell William C | Router with routing processors and methods for virtualization |
US8270810B2 (en) | 2002-12-11 | 2012-09-18 | Broadcom Corporation | Method and system for advertisement insertion and playback for STB with PVR functionality |
US8799366B2 (en) | 2002-12-11 | 2014-08-05 | Broadcom Corporation | Migration of stored media through a media exchange network |
CA2457602A1 (en) | 2003-02-19 | 2004-08-19 | Impatica Inc. | Method of synchronizing streams of real time data |
US8438601B2 (en) | 2003-07-02 | 2013-05-07 | Rovi Solutions Corporation | Resource management for a networked personal video recording system |
US7557876B2 (en) * | 2003-07-25 | 2009-07-07 | Nitto Denko Corporation | Anisotropic fluorescent thin crystal film and backlight system and liquid crystal display incorporating the same |
GB0326005D0 (en) | 2003-11-07 | 2003-12-10 | Koninkl Philips Electronics Nv | Waveguide for autostereoscopic display |
WO2005057248A2 (en) | 2003-12-04 | 2005-06-23 | New York University | Eye tracked foveal display by controlled illumination |
US8154686B2 (en) | 2004-01-20 | 2012-04-10 | Sharp Kabushiki Kaisha | Directional backlight, a multiple view display and a multi-direction display |
WO2006043721A1 (en) * | 2004-10-20 | 2006-04-27 | Fujitsu Ten Limited | Display device |
KR100786862B1 (en) | 2004-11-30 | 2007-12-20 | 삼성에스디아이 주식회사 | Barrier device, three dimensional image display using the same and method thereof |
EP1838899A2 (en) | 2004-11-30 | 2007-10-03 | Agoura Technologies Inc. | Applications and fabrication techniques for large scale wire grid polarizers |
JP2008523689A (en) | 2004-12-10 | 2008-07-03 | コーニンクレッカ フィリップス エレクトロニクス エヌ ヴィ | Wireless video streaming and prioritized streaming using single layer coding |
CN101107644B (en) * | 2005-01-18 | 2010-11-24 | 皇家飞利浦电子股份有限公司 | Multi-view display device |
JP4600317B2 (en) | 2005-03-31 | 2010-12-15 | カシオ計算機株式会社 | Illumination device that emits at least two illumination lights having directivity and display device using the same |
KR100732961B1 (en) | 2005-04-01 | 2007-06-27 | 경희대학교 산학협력단 | Multiview scalable image encoding, decoding method and its apparatus |
RU2322771C2 (en) * | 2005-04-25 | 2008-04-20 | Святослав Иванович АРСЕНИЧ | Stereo-projection system |
KR100661241B1 (en) * | 2005-05-16 | 2006-12-22 | 엘지전자 주식회사 | Fabrication method of optical sheet |
WO2007024313A1 (en) * | 2005-05-27 | 2007-03-01 | Imax Corporation | Equipment and methods for the synchronization of stereoscopic projection displays |
KR100813961B1 (en) * | 2005-06-14 | 2008-03-14 | 삼성전자주식회사 | Method and apparatus for transmitting and receiving of video, and transport stream structure thereof |
JP5091857B2 (en) | 2005-06-30 | 2012-12-05 | コーニンクレッカ フィリップス エレクトロニクス エヌ ヴィ | System control method |
KR100647517B1 (en) | 2005-08-26 | 2006-11-23 | (주)마스터이미지 | Cell type parallax-barrier and stereoscopic image display apparatus using the same |
JP5112326B2 (en) | 2005-11-02 | 2013-01-09 | コーニンクレッカ フィリップス エレクトロニクス エヌ ヴィ | Optical system for 3D display |
US20070110035A1 (en) | 2005-11-14 | 2007-05-17 | Broadcom Corporation, A California Corporation | Network nodes cooperatively routing traffic flow amongst wired and wireless networks |
JP5121136B2 (en) | 2005-11-28 | 2013-01-16 | 株式会社ジャパンディスプレイウェスト | Image display device, electronic device, portable device, and image display method |
KR100688357B1 (en) * | 2005-11-30 | 2007-03-02 | 삼성에스디아이 주식회사 | Three-dimensional display device |
EP3599764A3 (en) * | 2005-12-20 | 2020-07-08 | Koninklijke Philips N.V. | Autostereoscopic display device |
WO2007095476A2 (en) | 2006-02-10 | 2007-08-23 | Colorlink, Inc. | Multi-functional active matrix liquid crystal displays |
CN100518191C (en) * | 2006-03-21 | 2009-07-22 | 华为技术有限公司 | Method and system for securing service quality in communication network |
US8466954B2 (en) | 2006-04-03 | 2013-06-18 | Sony Computer Entertainment Inc. | Screen sharing method and apparatus |
KR100893616B1 (en) * | 2006-04-17 | 2009-04-20 | 삼성모바일디스플레이주식회사 | Electronic imaging device, 2d/3d image display device and the driving method thereof |
TWI378747B (en) * | 2006-08-18 | 2012-12-01 | Ind Tech Res Inst | Flexible electronic assembly |
US20110090413A1 (en) * | 2006-08-18 | 2011-04-21 | Industrial Technology Research Institute | 3-dimensional image display |
US7844547B2 (en) | 2006-08-21 | 2010-11-30 | Carl Raymond Amos | Uncle gem IV, universal automatic instant money, data and precious metal and stone transfer machine |
US8587638B2 (en) | 2006-09-25 | 2013-11-19 | Nokia Corporation | Supporting a 3D presentation |
JP4669482B2 (en) * | 2006-09-29 | 2011-04-13 | セイコーエプソン株式会社 | Display device, image processing method, and electronic apparatus |
US20080086391A1 (en) | 2006-10-05 | 2008-04-10 | Kurt Maynard | Impromptu asset tracking |
US8645176B2 (en) | 2006-10-05 | 2014-02-04 | Trimble Navigation Limited | Utilizing historical data in an asset management environment |
US7640223B2 (en) | 2006-11-16 | 2009-12-29 | University Of Tennessee Research Foundation | Method of organizing and presenting data in a table using stutter peak rule |
US20100066850A1 (en) | 2006-11-30 | 2010-03-18 | Westar Display Technologies, Inc. | Motion artifact measurement for display devices |
JP4285532B2 (en) | 2006-12-01 | 2009-06-24 | ソニー株式会社 | Backlight control device, backlight control method, and liquid crystal display device |
US8248462B2 (en) * | 2006-12-15 | 2012-08-21 | The Board Of Trustees Of The University Of Illinois | Dynamic parallax barrier autosteroscopic display system and method |
JP4686795B2 (en) * | 2006-12-27 | 2011-05-25 | 富士フイルム株式会社 | Image generating apparatus and image reproducing apparatus |
US7924456B1 (en) | 2007-01-12 | 2011-04-12 | Broadbus Technologies, Inc. | Data distribution and buffering |
CN101013559A (en) | 2007-01-30 | 2007-08-08 | 京东方科技集团股份有限公司 | LED brightness control circuit and backlight of LCD |
JP4255032B2 (en) | 2007-03-15 | 2009-04-15 | 富士通テン株式会社 | Display device and display method |
US7917853B2 (en) | 2007-03-21 | 2011-03-29 | At&T Intellectual Property I, L.P. | System and method of presenting media content |
US8600932B2 (en) | 2007-05-07 | 2013-12-03 | Trimble Navigation Limited | Telematic asset microfluidic analysis |
GB0709134D0 (en) * | 2007-05-11 | 2007-06-20 | Surman Philip | Multi-user autostereoscopic Display |
GB0709411D0 (en) | 2007-05-16 | 2007-06-27 | Barco Nv | Methods and systems for stereoscopic imaging |
TWI466093B (en) | 2007-06-26 | 2014-12-21 | Apple Inc | Management techniques for video playback |
US20090002178A1 (en) * | 2007-06-29 | 2009-01-01 | Microsoft Corporation | Dynamic mood sensing |
KR101400285B1 (en) | 2007-08-03 | 2014-05-30 | 삼성전자주식회사 | Front light unit and flat display apparatus employing the same |
JP5248062B2 (en) * | 2007-08-24 | 2013-07-31 | 株式会社東芝 | Directional backlight, display device, and stereoscopic image display device |
US7911442B2 (en) | 2007-08-27 | 2011-03-22 | Au Optronics Corporation | Dynamic color gamut of LED backlight |
KR101362647B1 (en) | 2007-09-07 | 2014-02-12 | 삼성전자주식회사 | System and method for generating and palying three dimensional image file including two dimensional image |
GB2453323A (en) * | 2007-10-01 | 2009-04-08 | Sharp Kk | Flexible backlight arrangement and display |
TWI354115B (en) * | 2007-10-05 | 2011-12-11 | Ind Tech Res Inst | Three-dimensional display apparatus |
US8031175B2 (en) | 2008-04-21 | 2011-10-04 | Panasonic Corporation | Touch sensitive remote control system that detects hand size characteristics of user and adapts mapping to screen display |
US8355019B2 (en) * | 2007-11-02 | 2013-01-15 | Dimension Technologies, Inc. | 3D optical illusions from off-axis displays |
JP4956520B2 (en) | 2007-11-13 | 2012-06-20 | ミツミ電機株式会社 | Backlight device and liquid crystal display device using the same |
US8121191B1 (en) | 2007-11-13 | 2012-02-21 | Harmonic Inc. | AVC to SVC transcoder |
KR101439845B1 (en) | 2007-11-16 | 2014-09-12 | 삼성전자주식회사 | Digital image processing apparatus |
JP2011504710A (en) | 2007-11-21 | 2011-02-10 | ジェスチャー テック,インコーポレイテッド | Media preferences |
WO2009067676A1 (en) | 2007-11-21 | 2009-05-28 | Gesturetek, Inc. | Device access control |
JP5236938B2 (en) | 2007-12-03 | 2013-07-17 | パナソニック株式会社 | Digital broadcast receiving apparatus, semiconductor integrated circuit, and digital broadcast receiving method |
TWI365302B (en) * | 2007-12-31 | 2012-06-01 | Ind Tech Res Inst | Stereo image display with switch function between horizontal display and vertical display |
US8339333B2 (en) | 2008-01-02 | 2012-12-25 | 3M Innovative Properties Company | Methods of reducing perceived image crosstalk in a multiview display |
CN101939998A (en) | 2008-02-08 | 2011-01-05 | 皇家飞利浦电子股份有限公司 | Autostereoscopic display device |
KR101451565B1 (en) | 2008-02-13 | 2014-10-16 | 삼성전자 주식회사 | Autostereoscopic display system |
JP5642347B2 (en) | 2008-03-07 | 2014-12-17 | ミツミ電機株式会社 | LCD backlight device |
KR101488199B1 (en) * | 2008-03-12 | 2015-01-30 | 삼성전자주식회사 | Method and apparatus for processing and reproducing image, and computer readable medium thereof |
US20090237564A1 (en) | 2008-03-18 | 2009-09-24 | Invism, Inc. | Interactive immersive virtual reality and simulation |
JP4925354B2 (en) | 2008-03-31 | 2012-04-25 | 富士フイルム株式会社 | Image processing apparatus, image display apparatus, imaging apparatus, and image processing method |
GB0806183D0 (en) | 2008-04-04 | 2008-05-14 | Picsel Res Ltd | Presentation of objects in 3D displays |
US20090282429A1 (en) * | 2008-05-07 | 2009-11-12 | Sony Ericsson Mobile Communications Ab | Viewer tracking for displaying three dimensional views |
DE102008001644B4 (en) | 2008-05-08 | 2010-03-04 | Seereal Technologies S.A. | Device for displaying three-dimensional images |
US20090295791A1 (en) | 2008-05-29 | 2009-12-03 | Microsoft Corporation | Three-dimensional environment created from video |
CN101291415B (en) | 2008-05-30 | 2010-07-21 | 华为终端有限公司 | Method, apparatus and system for three-dimensional video communication |
US20090319625A1 (en) | 2008-06-20 | 2009-12-24 | Alcatel Lucent | Interactivity in a digital public signage network architecture |
TWI401658B (en) | 2008-07-18 | 2013-07-11 | Hannstar Display Corp | Gate line driving circuit of lcd panel |
JP5127633B2 (en) * | 2008-08-25 | 2013-01-23 | 三菱電機株式会社 | Content playback apparatus and method |
US20100070987A1 (en) | 2008-09-12 | 2010-03-18 | At&T Intellectual Property I, L.P. | Mining viewer responses to multimedia content |
JP2010074557A (en) | 2008-09-18 | 2010-04-02 | Toshiba Corp | Television receiver |
KR101609890B1 (en) | 2008-09-18 | 2016-04-06 | 파나소닉 아이피 매니지먼트 가부시키가이샤 | Image decoding device, image encoding device, image decoding method, image encoding method, and program |
KR101497511B1 (en) | 2008-09-19 | 2015-03-02 | 삼성전자주식회사 | APPARATUS FOR MULTIPLEXING 2 DIMENSIONAL and 3 DIMENSIONAL IMAGE AND VIDEO |
KR20100033067A (en) | 2008-09-19 | 2010-03-29 | 삼성전자주식회사 | Image display apparatus and method for both 2d and 3d image |
MX2010002097A (en) | 2008-09-30 | 2010-08-02 | Panasonic Corp | Recording medium, reproduction device, system lsi, reproduction method, spectacle, and display device associated with 3d video. |
US20100107184A1 (en) | 2008-10-23 | 2010-04-29 | Peter Rae Shintani | TV with eye detection |
US8752087B2 (en) | 2008-11-07 | 2014-06-10 | At&T Intellectual Property I, L.P. | System and method for dynamically constructing personalized contextual video programs |
US8103608B2 (en) | 2008-11-26 | 2012-01-24 | Microsoft Corporation | Reference model for data-driven analytics |
US8209396B1 (en) | 2008-12-10 | 2012-06-26 | Howcast Media, Inc. | Video player |
US8913105B2 (en) | 2009-01-07 | 2014-12-16 | Thomson Licensing | Joint depth estimation |
WO2010095440A1 (en) | 2009-02-20 | 2010-08-26 | パナソニック株式会社 | Recording medium, reproduction device, and integrated circuit |
WO2010095381A1 (en) | 2009-02-20 | 2010-08-26 | パナソニック株式会社 | Recording medium, reproduction device, and integrated circuit |
US9565397B2 (en) | 2009-02-26 | 2017-02-07 | Akamai Technologies, Inc. | Deterministically skewing transmission of content streams |
US20100225576A1 (en) | 2009-03-03 | 2010-09-09 | Horizon Semiconductors Ltd. | Three-dimensional interactive system and method |
US8477175B2 (en) | 2009-03-09 | 2013-07-02 | Cisco Technology, Inc. | System and method for providing three dimensional imaging in a network environment |
US20100231511A1 (en) | 2009-03-10 | 2010-09-16 | David L. Henty | Interactive media system with multi-directional remote control and dual mode camera |
CN102356638A (en) | 2009-03-16 | 2012-02-15 | Lg电子株式会社 | A method of displaying three-dimensional image data and an apparatus of processing three-dimensional image data |
US20100247080A1 (en) * | 2009-03-27 | 2010-09-30 | Kug-Jin Yun | Method and apparatus for creating and consuming multiview image media file |
JP5695819B2 (en) | 2009-03-30 | 2015-04-08 | 日立マクセル株式会社 | TV operation method |
WO2010117315A1 (en) | 2009-04-09 | 2010-10-14 | Telefonaktiebolaget Lm Ericsson (Publ) | Media container file management |
CA2760158C (en) | 2009-04-26 | 2016-08-02 | Nike International Ltd. | Gps features and functionality in an athletic watch system |
US8532310B2 (en) | 2010-03-30 | 2013-09-10 | Bose Corporation | Frequency-dependent ANR reference sound compression |
US8315405B2 (en) | 2009-04-28 | 2012-11-20 | Bose Corporation | Coordinated ANR reference sound compression |
US20100280959A1 (en) | 2009-05-01 | 2010-11-04 | Darrel Stone | Real-time sourcing of service providers |
CN101983400B (en) | 2009-05-15 | 2013-07-17 | 株式会社东芝 | Image display device |
US8704958B2 (en) | 2009-06-01 | 2014-04-22 | Lg Electronics Inc. | Image display device and operation method thereof |
US9237296B2 (en) | 2009-06-01 | 2016-01-12 | Lg Electronics Inc. | Image display apparatus and operating method thereof |
WO2010143820A2 (en) | 2009-06-08 | 2010-12-16 | 엘지전자 주식회사 | Device and method for providing a three-dimensional pip image |
US8411746B2 (en) | 2009-06-12 | 2013-04-02 | Qualcomm Incorporated | Multiview video coding over MPEG-2 systems |
US20100321465A1 (en) | 2009-06-19 | 2010-12-23 | Dominique A Behrens Pa | Method, System and Computer Program Product for Mobile Telepresence Interactions |
KR20120088664A (en) | 2009-08-07 | 2012-08-08 | 리얼디 인크. | Stereoscopic flat panel display with updated blanking intervals |
US8976871B2 (en) | 2009-09-16 | 2015-03-10 | Qualcomm Incorporated | Media extractor tracks for file format track selection |
US8446462B2 (en) | 2009-10-15 | 2013-05-21 | At&T Intellectual Property I, L.P. | Method and system for time-multiplexed shared display |
US20110093882A1 (en) | 2009-10-21 | 2011-04-21 | Candelore Brant L | Parental control through the HDMI interface |
KR101600818B1 (en) | 2009-11-06 | 2016-03-09 | 삼성디스플레이 주식회사 | 3 three dimensional optical module and display device including the same |
US8705624B2 (en) | 2009-11-24 | 2014-04-22 | STMicroelectronics International N. V. | Parallel decoding for scalable video coding |
US8335763B2 (en) | 2009-12-04 | 2012-12-18 | Microsoft Corporation | Concurrently presented data subfeeds |
US8462197B2 (en) | 2009-12-17 | 2013-06-11 | Motorola Mobility Llc | 3D video transforming device |
US20110153362A1 (en) | 2009-12-17 | 2011-06-23 | Valin David A | Method and mechanism for identifying protecting, requesting, assisting and managing information |
US8823782B2 (en) | 2009-12-31 | 2014-09-02 | Broadcom Corporation | Remote control with integrated position, viewer identification and optical and audio test |
US8854531B2 (en) | 2009-12-31 | 2014-10-07 | Broadcom Corporation | Multiple remote controllers that each simultaneously controls a different visual presentation of a 2D/3D display |
US9247286B2 (en) | 2009-12-31 | 2016-01-26 | Broadcom Corporation | Frame formatting supporting mixed two and three dimensional video data communication |
US20110199469A1 (en) * | 2010-02-15 | 2011-08-18 | Gallagher Andrew C | Detection and display of stereo images |
US8384774B2 (en) | 2010-02-15 | 2013-02-26 | Eastman Kodak Company | Glasses for viewing stereo images |
KR101356248B1 (en) | 2010-02-19 | 2014-01-29 | 엘지디스플레이 주식회사 | Image display device |
US9285589B2 (en) | 2010-02-28 | 2016-03-15 | Microsoft Technology Licensing, Llc | AR glasses with event and sensor triggered control of AR eyepiece applications |
US8964298B2 (en) | 2010-02-28 | 2015-02-24 | Microsoft Corporation | Video display modification based on sensor input for a see-through near-to-eye display |
US9129295B2 (en) | 2010-02-28 | 2015-09-08 | Microsoft Technology Licensing, Llc | See-through near-eye display glasses with a fast response photochromic film system for quick transition from dark to clear |
KR101324412B1 (en) | 2010-05-06 | 2013-11-01 | 엘지디스플레이 주식회사 | Stereoscopic image display and driving method thereof |
WO2011142141A1 (en) | 2010-05-13 | 2011-11-17 | パナソニック株式会社 | Display device and image viewing system |
KR101255711B1 (en) | 2010-07-02 | 2013-04-17 | 엘지디스플레이 주식회사 | 3d image display device and driving method thereof |
US8605136B2 (en) | 2010-08-10 | 2013-12-10 | Sony Corporation | 2D to 3D user interface content data conversion |
US8363928B1 (en) | 2010-12-24 | 2013-01-29 | Trimble Navigation Ltd. | General orientation positioning system |
WO2012132797A1 (en) | 2011-03-31 | 2012-10-04 | 富士フイルム株式会社 | Image capturing device and image capturing method |
US9424667B2 (en) * | 2011-11-21 | 2016-08-23 | Schlumberger Technology Corporation | Interface for controlling and improving drilling operations |
-
2010
- 2010-05-05 US US12/774,307 patent/US8964013B2/en active Active
- 2010-05-05 US US12/774,225 patent/US20110157322A1/en not_active Abandoned
- 2010-07-28 US US12/845,461 patent/US8767050B2/en active Active
- 2010-07-28 US US12/845,440 patent/US20110157697A1/en not_active Abandoned
- 2010-07-28 US US12/845,409 patent/US20110157696A1/en not_active Abandoned
- 2010-12-22 EP EP20100015984 patent/EP2357630A1/en not_active Ceased
- 2010-12-22 EP EP20100015980 patent/EP2357508A1/en not_active Withdrawn
- 2010-12-23 EP EP20100016055 patent/EP2357631A1/en not_active Ceased
- 2010-12-30 US US12/982,140 patent/US20110161843A1/en not_active Abandoned
- 2010-12-30 US US12/982,031 patent/US9019263B2/en active Active
- 2010-12-30 TW TW99146892A patent/TWI467234B/en not_active IP Right Cessation
- 2010-12-30 US US12/982,309 patent/US9204138B2/en active Active
- 2010-12-30 US US12/982,053 patent/US20110157309A1/en not_active Abandoned
- 2010-12-30 US US12/982,248 patent/US20110157315A1/en not_active Abandoned
- 2010-12-30 US US12/982,377 patent/US20110157327A1/en not_active Abandoned
- 2010-12-30 US US12/982,199 patent/US8988506B2/en active Active
- 2010-12-30 US US12/982,273 patent/US9979954B2/en active Active
- 2010-12-30 US US12/982,047 patent/US20110157330A1/en not_active Abandoned
- 2010-12-30 US US12/982,088 patent/US9066092B2/en active Active
- 2010-12-30 US US12/982,362 patent/US9049440B2/en active Active
- 2010-12-30 US US12/982,156 patent/US9654767B2/en active Active
- 2010-12-30 US US12/982,330 patent/US20110157326A1/en not_active Abandoned
- 2010-12-30 CN CN2010106160608A patent/CN102183840A/en active Pending
- 2010-12-30 US US12/982,124 patent/US9124885B2/en active Active
- 2010-12-30 US US12/982,020 patent/US20110157257A1/en not_active Abandoned
- 2010-12-30 EP EP20100016190 patent/EP2346021B1/en active Active
- 2010-12-30 US US12/982,173 patent/US9143770B2/en active Active
- 2010-12-30 TW TW99146883A patent/TW201142356A/en unknown
- 2010-12-30 US US12/982,069 patent/US8922545B2/en active Active
- 2010-12-30 US US12/982,212 patent/US9013546B2/en active Active
- 2010-12-30 US US12/982,062 patent/US8687042B2/en active Active
- 2010-12-31 CN CN201010619646XA patent/CN102215408A/en active Pending
- 2010-12-31 CN CN201010616920.8A patent/CN102183841B/en active Active
- 2010-12-31 TW TW99147124A patent/TW201142357A/en unknown
-
2012
- 2012-03-02 HK HK12102171A patent/HK1161754A1/en not_active IP Right Cessation
-
2014
- 2014-10-01 US US14/504,095 patent/US20150015668A1/en not_active Abandoned
-
2015
- 2015-02-06 US US14/616,130 patent/US20150156473A1/en not_active Abandoned
- 2015-05-28 US US14/723,922 patent/US20150264341A1/en not_active Abandoned
Patent Citations (116)
Publication number | Priority date | Publication date | Assignee | Title |
---|---|---|---|---|
US4829365A (en) * | 1986-03-07 | 1989-05-09 | Dimension Technologies, Inc. | Autostereoscopic display with illuminating lines, light valve and mask |
US5493427A (en) * | 1993-05-25 | 1996-02-20 | Sharp Kabushiki Kaisha | Three-dimensional display unit with a variable lens |
US20030154261A1 (en) * | 1994-10-17 | 2003-08-14 | The Regents Of The University Of California, A Corporation Of The State Of California | Distributed hypermedia method and system for automatically invoking external application providing interaction and display of embedded objects within a hypermedia document |
US20040036763A1 (en) * | 1994-11-14 | 2004-02-26 | Swift David C. | Intelligent method and system for producing and displaying stereoscopically-multiplexed images of three-dimensional objects for use in realistic stereoscopic viewing thereof in interactive virtual reality display environments |
US5615046A (en) * | 1995-01-23 | 1997-03-25 | Cyber Scientific Inc. | Stereoscopic viewing system |
US6094216A (en) * | 1995-05-22 | 2000-07-25 | Canon Kabushiki Kaisha | Stereoscopic image display method, and stereoscopic image display apparatus using the method |
US6909555B2 (en) * | 1995-06-07 | 2005-06-21 | Jacob N. Wohlstadter | Three dimensional imaging system |
US20040141237A1 (en) * | 1995-06-07 | 2004-07-22 | Wohlstadter Jacob N. | Three dimensional imaging system |
US5945965A (en) * | 1995-06-29 | 1999-08-31 | Canon Kabushiki Kaisha | Stereoscopic image display method |
US5959597A (en) * | 1995-09-28 | 1999-09-28 | Sony Corporation | Image/audio reproducing system |
US7123213B2 (en) * | 1995-10-05 | 2006-10-17 | Semiconductor Energy Laboratory Co., Ltd. | Three dimensional display unit and display method |
US6049424A (en) * | 1995-11-15 | 2000-04-11 | Sanyo Electric Co., Ltd. | Three dimensional display device |
US7190518B1 (en) * | 1996-01-22 | 2007-03-13 | 3Ality, Inc. | Systems for and methods of three dimensional viewing |
US7038698B1 (en) * | 1996-02-08 | 2006-05-02 | Palm Charles S | 3D stereo browser for the internet |
US6023277A (en) * | 1996-07-03 | 2000-02-08 | Canon Kabushiki Kaisha | Display control apparatus and method |
US5855425A (en) * | 1996-07-19 | 1999-01-05 | Sanyo Electric Co., Ltd. | Stereoscopic display |
US5969850A (en) * | 1996-09-27 | 1999-10-19 | Sharp Kabushiki Kaisha | Spatial light modulator, directional display and directional light source |
US5990975A (en) * | 1996-11-22 | 1999-11-23 | Acer Peripherals, Inc. | Dual screen displaying device |
US6285368B1 (en) * | 1997-02-10 | 2001-09-04 | Canon Kabushiki Kaisha | Image display system and image display apparatus and information processing apparatus in the system |
US7030903B2 (en) * | 1997-02-20 | 2006-04-18 | Canon Kabushiki Kaisha | Image display system, information processing apparatus, and method of controlling the same |
US6188442B1 (en) * | 1997-08-01 | 2001-02-13 | International Business Machines Corporation | Multiviewer display system for television monitors |
US6710920B1 (en) * | 1998-03-27 | 2004-03-23 | Sanyo Electric Co., Ltd | Stereoscopic display |
US6144375A (en) * | 1998-08-14 | 2000-11-07 | Praja Inc. | Multi-perspective viewer for content-based interactivity |
US6697687B1 (en) * | 1998-11-09 | 2004-02-24 | Hitachi, Ltd. | Image display apparatus having audio output control means in accordance with image signal type |
US20030012425A1 (en) * | 1998-11-12 | 2003-01-16 | Canon Kabushiki Kaisha | Viewpoint position detection apparatus and method, and stereoscopic image display system |
US20020171666A1 (en) * | 1999-02-19 | 2002-11-21 | Takaaki Endo | Image processing apparatus for interpolating and generating images from an arbitrary view point |
US20080184301A1 (en) * | 1999-10-29 | 2008-07-31 | Boylan Peter C | Interactive television system with programming-related links |
US20020010798A1 (en) * | 2000-04-20 | 2002-01-24 | Israel Ben-Shaul | Differentiated content and application delivery via internet |
US20030103165A1 (en) * | 2000-05-19 | 2003-06-05 | Werner Bullinger | System for operating a consumer electronics appaliance |
US20020037037A1 (en) * | 2000-09-22 | 2002-03-28 | Philips Electronics North America Corporation | Preferred transmission/streaming order of fine-granular scalability |
US20020167862A1 (en) * | 2001-04-03 | 2002-11-14 | Carlo Tomasi | Method and apparatus for approximating a source position of a sound-causing event for determining an input used in operating an electronic device |
US20040252187A1 (en) * | 2001-09-10 | 2004-12-16 | Alden Ray M. | Processes and apparatuses for efficient multiple program and 3D display |
US20060256136A1 (en) * | 2001-10-01 | 2006-11-16 | Adobe Systems Incorporated, A Delaware Corporation | Compositing two-dimensional and three-dimensional image layers |
US20030137506A1 (en) * | 2001-11-30 | 2003-07-24 | Daniel Efran | Image-based rendering for 3D viewing |
US20030223499A1 (en) * | 2002-04-09 | 2003-12-04 | Nicholas Routhier | Process and system for encoding and playback of stereoscopic video sequences |
US20050248561A1 (en) * | 2002-04-25 | 2005-11-10 | Norio Ito | Multimedia information generation method and multimedia information reproduction device |
US20050259147A1 (en) * | 2002-07-16 | 2005-11-24 | Nam Jeho | Apparatus and method for adapting 2d and 3d stereoscopic video signal |
US20040027452A1 (en) * | 2002-08-07 | 2004-02-12 | Yun Kug Jin | Method and apparatus for multiplexing multi-view three-dimensional moving picture |
US20040041747A1 (en) * | 2002-08-27 | 2004-03-04 | Nec Corporation | 3D image/2D image switching display apparatus and portable terminal device |
US20040239231A1 (en) * | 2002-10-30 | 2004-12-02 | Keisuke Miyagawa | Display device and electronic equipment |
US20040109093A1 (en) * | 2002-12-05 | 2004-06-10 | Small-Stryker Aaron Tug | Method and apparatus for simultaneous television video presentation and separate viewing of different broadcasts |
US20060026090A1 (en) * | 2002-12-09 | 2006-02-02 | Sam Balabon | System and method for facilitating trading of financial instruments |
US7769668B2 (en) * | 2002-12-09 | 2010-08-03 | Sam Balabon | System and method for facilitating trading of financial instruments |
US20080284844A1 (en) * | 2003-02-05 | 2008-11-20 | Graham John Woodgate | Switchable Lens |
US20040164292A1 (en) * | 2003-02-21 | 2004-08-26 | Yeh-Jiun Tung | Transflective display having an OLED backlight |
US20070097208A1 (en) * | 2003-05-28 | 2007-05-03 | Satoshi Takemoto | Stereoscopic image display apparatus, text data processing apparatus, program, and storing medium |
US20050073472A1 (en) * | 2003-07-26 | 2005-04-07 | Samsung Electronics Co., Ltd. | Method of removing Moire pattern in 3D image display apparatus using complete parallax |
US20070097103A1 (en) * | 2003-09-11 | 2007-05-03 | Shoji Yoshioka | Portable display device |
US20070085814A1 (en) * | 2003-09-20 | 2007-04-19 | Koninklijke Philips Electronics N.V. | Image display device |
US20080273242A1 (en) * | 2003-09-30 | 2008-11-06 | Graham John Woodgate | Directional Display Apparatus |
US20050128353A1 (en) * | 2003-12-16 | 2005-06-16 | Young Bruce A. | System and method for using second remote control device for sub-picture control in television receiver |
US7091471B2 (en) * | 2004-03-15 | 2006-08-15 | Agilent Technologies, Inc. | Using eye detection for providing control and power management of electronic devices |
US20050237487A1 (en) * | 2004-04-23 | 2005-10-27 | Chang Nelson L A | Color wheel assembly for stereoscopic imaging |
US7440193B2 (en) * | 2004-04-30 | 2008-10-21 | Gunasekaran R Alfred | Wide-angle variable focal length lens system |
US20060050785A1 (en) * | 2004-09-09 | 2006-03-09 | Nucore Technology Inc. | Inserting a high resolution still image into a lower resolution video stream |
US20070296874A1 (en) * | 2004-10-20 | 2007-12-27 | Fujitsu Ten Limited | Display Device,Method of Adjusting the Image Quality of the Display Device, Device for Adjusting the Image Quality and Device for Adjusting the Contrast |
US20060087556A1 (en) * | 2004-10-21 | 2006-04-27 | Kazunari Era | Stereoscopic image display device |
US20060109242A1 (en) * | 2004-11-19 | 2006-05-25 | Simpkins Daniel S | User interface for impaired users |
US20060139490A1 (en) * | 2004-12-15 | 2006-06-29 | Fekkes Wilhelmus F | Synchronizing audio with delayed video |
US20060139448A1 (en) * | 2004-12-29 | 2006-06-29 | Samsung Electronics Co., Ltd. | 3D displays with flexible switching capability of 2D/3D viewing modes |
US20080192112A1 (en) * | 2005-03-18 | 2008-08-14 | Ntt Data Sanyo System Corporation | Stereoscopic Image Display Apparatus, Stereoscopic Image Displaying Method And Computer Program Product |
US20070139371A1 (en) * | 2005-04-04 | 2007-06-21 | Harsham Bret A | Control system and method for differentiating multiple users utilizing multi-view display devices |
US20080191964A1 (en) * | 2005-04-22 | 2008-08-14 | Koninklijke Philips Electronics, N.V. | Auto-Stereoscopic Display With Mixed Mode For Concurrent Display of Two- and Three-Dimensional Images |
US20080246757A1 (en) * | 2005-04-25 | 2008-10-09 | Masahiro Ito | 3D Image Generation and Display System |
US20060244918A1 (en) * | 2005-04-27 | 2006-11-02 | Actuality Systems, Inc. | Minimized-thickness angular scanner of electromagnetic radiation |
US20080204550A1 (en) * | 2005-04-29 | 2008-08-28 | Koninklijke Philips Electronics, N.V. | Stereoscopic Display Apparatus |
US20060256302A1 (en) * | 2005-05-13 | 2006-11-16 | Microsoft Corporation | Three-dimensional (3D) image projection |
US7671935B2 (en) * | 2005-05-19 | 2010-03-02 | Sharp Kabushiki Kaisha | Display |
US20060262376A1 (en) * | 2005-05-19 | 2006-11-23 | Jonathan Mather | Display |
US20060271791A1 (en) * | 2005-05-27 | 2006-11-30 | Sbc Knowledge Ventures, L.P. | Method and system for biometric based access control of media content presentation devices |
US20070096125A1 (en) * | 2005-06-24 | 2007-05-03 | Uwe Vogel | Illumination device |
US20070002041A1 (en) * | 2005-07-02 | 2007-01-04 | Samsung Electronics Co., Ltd. | Method and apparatus for encoding/decoding video data to implement local three-dimensional video |
US20070008406A1 (en) * | 2005-07-08 | 2007-01-11 | Samsung Electronics Co., Ltd. | High resolution 2D-3D switchable autostereoscopic display apparatus |
US20070008620A1 (en) * | 2005-07-11 | 2007-01-11 | Samsung Electronics Co., Ltd. | Switchable autostereoscopic display |
US20070052807A1 (en) * | 2005-09-07 | 2007-03-08 | Fuji Xerox Co., Ltd. | System and method for user monitoring interface of 3-D video streams from multiple cameras |
US20070072674A1 (en) * | 2005-09-12 | 2007-03-29 | Nintendo Co., Ltd. | Information processing program |
US8174564B2 (en) * | 2005-11-30 | 2012-05-08 | Samsung Mobile Display Co., Ltd. | Three-dimensional display device |
US20080259233A1 (en) * | 2005-12-20 | 2008-10-23 | Koninklijke Philips Electronics, N.V. | Autostereoscopic Display Device |
US20070146267A1 (en) * | 2005-12-22 | 2007-06-28 | Lg.Philips Lcd Co., Ltd. | Display device and method of driving the same |
US20070147827A1 (en) * | 2005-12-28 | 2007-06-28 | Arnold Sheynman | Methods and apparatus for wireless stereo video streaming |
US20070153916A1 (en) * | 2005-12-30 | 2007-07-05 | Sharp Laboratories Of America, Inc. | Wireless video transmission system |
US20070153122A1 (en) * | 2005-12-30 | 2007-07-05 | Ayite Nii A | Apparatus and method for simultaneous multiple video channel viewing |
US20070162392A1 (en) * | 2006-01-12 | 2007-07-12 | Microsoft Corporation | Management of Streaming Content |
US7359105B2 (en) * | 2006-02-07 | 2008-04-15 | Sharp Kabushiki Kaisha | Spatial light modulator and a display device |
US20070225994A1 (en) * | 2006-03-17 | 2007-09-27 | Moore Barrett H | Method for Providing Private Civil Security Services Bundled with Second Party Products |
US8368749B2 (en) * | 2006-03-27 | 2013-02-05 | Ge Inspection Technologies Lp | Article inspection apparatus |
US20070226258A1 (en) * | 2006-03-27 | 2007-09-27 | Thomas Eldred Lambdin | Article inspection apparatus |
US20080133122A1 (en) * | 2006-03-29 | 2008-06-05 | Sanyo Electric Co., Ltd. | Multiple visual display device and vehicle-mounted navigation system |
US20080043096A1 (en) * | 2006-04-04 | 2008-02-21 | Anthony Vetro | Method and System for Decoding and Displaying 3D Light Fields |
US20070258140A1 (en) * | 2006-05-04 | 2007-11-08 | Samsung Electronics Co., Ltd. | Multiview autostereoscopic display |
US20070270218A1 (en) * | 2006-05-08 | 2007-11-22 | Nintendo Co., Ltd. | Storage medium having game program stored thereon and game apparatus |
US20080025390A1 (en) * | 2006-07-25 | 2008-01-31 | Fang Shi | Adaptive video frame interpolation |
US20080037120A1 (en) * | 2006-08-08 | 2008-02-14 | Samsung Electronics Co., Ltd | High resolution 2d/3d switchable display apparatus |
US20080043644A1 (en) * | 2006-08-18 | 2008-02-21 | Microsoft Corporation | Techniques to perform rate matching for multimedia conference calls |
US20080126557A1 (en) * | 2006-09-08 | 2008-05-29 | Tetsuro Motoyama | System, method, and computer program product using an SNMP implementation to obtain vendor information from remote devices |
US20080068329A1 (en) * | 2006-09-15 | 2008-03-20 | Samsung Electronics Co., Ltd. | Multi-view autostereoscopic display with improved resolution |
US20080165176A1 (en) * | 2006-09-28 | 2008-07-10 | Charles Jens Archer | Method of Video Display and Multiplayer Gaming |
US20080086685A1 (en) * | 2006-10-05 | 2008-04-10 | James Janky | Method for delivering tailored asset information to a device |
US20080123182A1 (en) * | 2006-11-29 | 2008-05-29 | Honeywell International Inc. | Directional display |
US20080150853A1 (en) * | 2006-12-22 | 2008-06-26 | Hong Kong Applied Science and Technology Research Institute Company Limited | Backlight device and liquid crystal display incorporating the backlight device |
US20080168129A1 (en) * | 2007-01-08 | 2008-07-10 | Jeffrey Robbin | Pairing a Media Server and a Media Client |
US8269822B2 (en) * | 2007-04-03 | 2012-09-18 | Sony Computer Entertainment America, LLC | Display viewing system and methods for optimizing display view based on active tracking |
US20100007582A1 (en) * | 2007-04-03 | 2010-01-14 | Sony Computer Entertainment America Inc. | Display viewing system and methods for optimizing display view based on active tracking |
US20080303832A1 (en) * | 2007-06-11 | 2008-12-11 | Samsung Electronics Co., Ltd. | Method of generating two-dimensional/three-dimensional convertible stereoscopic image bitstream and method and apparatus for displaying the same |
US20090089177A1 (en) * | 2007-09-27 | 2009-04-02 | Helio, Llc | Apparatus, methods and systems for discounted referral and recommendation of electronic content |
US8416247B2 (en) * | 2007-10-09 | 2013-04-09 | Sony Computer Entertaiment America Inc. | Increasing the number of advertising impressions in an interactive environment |
US20090138280A1 (en) * | 2007-11-26 | 2009-05-28 | The General Electric Company | Multi-stepped default display protocols |
US20090244266A1 (en) * | 2008-03-26 | 2009-10-01 | Thomas Carl Brigham | Enhanced Three Dimensional Television |
US20110234754A1 (en) * | 2008-11-24 | 2011-09-29 | Koninklijke Philips Electronics N.V. | Combining 3d video and auxiliary data |
US20100128112A1 (en) * | 2008-11-26 | 2010-05-27 | Samsung Electronics Co., Ltd | Immersive display system for interacting with three-dimensional content |
US20100135640A1 (en) * | 2008-12-03 | 2010-06-03 | Dell Products L.P. | System and Method for Storing and Displaying 3-D Video Content |
US20100299390A1 (en) * | 2009-05-22 | 2010-11-25 | Rachid Alameh | Method and System for Controlling Data Transmission to or From a Mobile Device |
US8788676B2 (en) * | 2009-05-22 | 2014-07-22 | Motorola Mobility Llc | Method and system for controlling data transmission to or from a mobile device |
US20100309290A1 (en) * | 2009-06-08 | 2010-12-09 | Stephen Brooks Myers | System for capture and display of stereoscopic content |
US20110157327A1 (en) * | 2009-12-31 | 2011-06-30 | Broadcom Corporation | 3d audio delivery accompanying 3d display supported by viewer/listener position and orientation tracking |
US20110157322A1 (en) * | 2009-12-31 | 2011-06-30 | Broadcom Corporation | Controlling a pixel array to support an adaptable light manipulator |
Cited By (32)
Publication number | Priority date | Publication date | Assignee | Title |
---|---|---|---|---|
US9247286B2 (en) | 2009-12-31 | 2016-01-26 | Broadcom Corporation | Frame formatting supporting mixed two and three dimensional video data communication |
US8767050B2 (en) | 2009-12-31 | 2014-07-01 | Broadcom Corporation | Display supporting multiple simultaneous 3D views |
US9204138B2 (en) | 2009-12-31 | 2015-12-01 | Broadcom Corporation | User controlled regional display of mixed two and three dimensional content |
US9143770B2 (en) | 2009-12-31 | 2015-09-22 | Broadcom Corporation | Application programming interface supporting mixed two and three dimensional displays |
US8964013B2 (en) | 2009-12-31 | 2015-02-24 | Broadcom Corporation | Display with elastic light manipulator |
US8687042B2 (en) | 2009-12-31 | 2014-04-01 | Broadcom Corporation | Set-top box circuitry supporting 2D and 3D content reductions to accommodate viewing environment constraints |
US9013546B2 (en) | 2009-12-31 | 2015-04-21 | Broadcom Corporation | Adaptable media stream servicing two and three dimensional content |
US8823782B2 (en) | 2009-12-31 | 2014-09-02 | Broadcom Corporation | Remote control with integrated position, viewer identification and optical and audio test |
US20110164188A1 (en) * | 2009-12-31 | 2011-07-07 | Broadcom Corporation | Remote control with integrated position, viewer identification and optical and audio test |
US8854531B2 (en) | 2009-12-31 | 2014-10-07 | Broadcom Corporation | Multiple remote controllers that each simultaneously controls a different visual presentation of a 2D/3D display |
US8988506B2 (en) | 2009-12-31 | 2015-03-24 | Broadcom Corporation | Transcoder supporting selective delivery of 2D, stereoscopic 3D, and multi-view 3D content from source video |
US9124885B2 (en) | 2009-12-31 | 2015-09-01 | Broadcom Corporation | Operating system supporting mixed 2D, stereoscopic 3D and multi-view 3D displays |
US8922545B2 (en) | 2009-12-31 | 2014-12-30 | Broadcom Corporation | Three-dimensional display system with adaptation based on viewing reference of viewer(s) |
US9066092B2 (en) | 2009-12-31 | 2015-06-23 | Broadcom Corporation | Communication infrastructure including simultaneous video pathways for multi-viewer support |
US9979954B2 (en) | 2009-12-31 | 2018-05-22 | Avago Technologies General Ip (Singapore) Pte. Ltd. | Eyewear with time shared viewing supporting delivery of differing content to multiple viewers |
US9654767B2 (en) | 2009-12-31 | 2017-05-16 | Avago Technologies General Ip (Singapore) Pte. Ltd. | Programming architecture supporting mixed two and three dimensional displays |
US20110164115A1 (en) * | 2009-12-31 | 2011-07-07 | Broadcom Corporation | Transcoder supporting selective delivery of 2d, stereoscopic 3d, and multi-view 3d content from source video |
US9019263B2 (en) | 2009-12-31 | 2015-04-28 | Broadcom Corporation | Coordinated driving of adaptable light manipulator, backlighting and pixel array in support of adaptable 2D and 3D displays |
US9049440B2 (en) | 2009-12-31 | 2015-06-02 | Broadcom Corporation | Independent viewer tailoring of same media source content via a common 2D-3D display |
US20120249872A1 (en) * | 2011-03-28 | 2012-10-04 | Sony Corporation | Video signal processing apparatus and video signal processing method |
US8912986B2 (en) * | 2011-07-06 | 2014-12-16 | Sony Corporation | Display control device, display control method, and computer program |
US20130009921A1 (en) * | 2011-07-06 | 2013-01-10 | Sony Corporation | Display control device, display control method, and computer program |
US20150042557A1 (en) * | 2012-03-07 | 2015-02-12 | Sony Corporation | Information processing apparatus, information processing method, and program |
US8842169B2 (en) * | 2012-08-03 | 2014-09-23 | Samsung Electronics Co., Ltd. | Display apparatus which displays a plurality of content views, glasses apparatus which synchronizes with one of the content views, and methods thereof |
US20140362196A1 (en) * | 2012-08-03 | 2014-12-11 | Samsung Electronics Co., Ltd. | Display apparatus which displays a plurality of content views, glasses apparatus which synchronizes with one of the content views, and methods thereof |
US20140036044A1 (en) * | 2012-08-03 | 2014-02-06 | Samsung Electronics Co., Ltd. | Display apparatus which displays a plurality of content views, glasses apparatus which synchronizes with one of the content views, and methods thereof |
TWI510813B (en) * | 2013-06-18 | 2015-12-01 | Zhangjiagang Kangde Xin Optronics Material Co Ltd | A liquid crystal parallax barrier device that displays three-dimensional images in both directions |
US20160237030A1 (en) * | 2013-10-12 | 2016-08-18 | Zhejiang Hisun Pharmaceutical Co., Ltd. | Synthetic intermediate of maxacalcitol, preparation method therefor and use thereof |
US20170148488A1 (en) * | 2015-11-20 | 2017-05-25 | Mediatek Inc. | Video data processing system and associated method for analyzing and summarizing recorded video data |
US10802324B2 (en) | 2017-03-14 | 2020-10-13 | Boe Technology Group Co., Ltd. | Double vision display method and device |
CN113383540A (en) * | 2019-01-23 | 2021-09-10 | 奥崔迪合作公司 | Interoperable 3D image content processing |
CN113453939A (en) * | 2019-02-12 | 2021-09-28 | 株式会社日本显示器 | Display device |
Also Published As
Similar Documents
Publication | Publication Date | Title |
---|---|---|
US20110157326A1 (en) | Multi-path and multi-source 3d content storage, retrieval, and delivery | |
US8854531B2 (en) | Multiple remote controllers that each simultaneously controls a different visual presentation of a 2D/3D display | |
US9247286B2 (en) | Frame formatting supporting mixed two and three dimensional video data communication | |
CN102256146B (en) | 3-D image display device and driving method thereof | |
US6252707B1 (en) | Systems for three-dimensional viewing and projection | |
US11095872B2 (en) | Autostereoscopic 3-dimensional display | |
US9035943B1 (en) | Multi-view image display apparatus and multi-view image display method thereof | |
TW201404118A (en) | Auto-stereoscopic display device and drive method | |
CN105430369A (en) | Autostereoscopic 3d display device | |
US20130127816A1 (en) | Display apparatus and driving method thereof | |
KR102208308B1 (en) | Dispaly apparatus and controlling method thereof | |
US10715792B2 (en) | Display device and method of controlling the same | |
KR102143463B1 (en) | Multi view image display apparatus and contorl method thereof | |
CN107580211B (en) | Automatic stereo 3 ties up display | |
US20120081513A1 (en) | Multiple Parallax Image Receiver Apparatus | |
KR102232462B1 (en) | Autostereoscopic 3d display device |
Legal Events
Date | Code | Title | Description |
---|---|---|---|
AS | Assignment |
Owner name: BANK OF AMERICA, N.A., AS COLLATERAL AGENT, NORTH CAROLINA Free format text: PATENT SECURITY AGREEMENT;ASSIGNOR:BROADCOM CORPORATION;REEL/FRAME:037806/0001 Effective date: 20160201 Owner name: BANK OF AMERICA, N.A., AS COLLATERAL AGENT, NORTH Free format text: PATENT SECURITY AGREEMENT;ASSIGNOR:BROADCOM CORPORATION;REEL/FRAME:037806/0001 Effective date: 20160201 |
|
AS | Assignment |
Owner name: AVAGO TECHNOLOGIES GENERAL IP (SINGAPORE) PTE. LTD., SINGAPORE Free format text: ASSIGNMENT OF ASSIGNORS INTEREST;ASSIGNOR:BROADCOM CORPORATION;REEL/FRAME:041706/0001 Effective date: 20170120 Owner name: AVAGO TECHNOLOGIES GENERAL IP (SINGAPORE) PTE. LTD Free format text: ASSIGNMENT OF ASSIGNORS INTEREST;ASSIGNOR:BROADCOM CORPORATION;REEL/FRAME:041706/0001 Effective date: 20170120 |
|
AS | Assignment |
Owner name: BROADCOM CORPORATION, CALIFORNIA Free format text: TERMINATION AND RELEASE OF SECURITY INTEREST IN PATENTS;ASSIGNOR:BANK OF AMERICA, N.A., AS COLLATERAL AGENT;REEL/FRAME:041712/0001 Effective date: 20170119 |
|
STCB | Information on status: application discontinuation |
Free format text: ABANDONED -- FAILURE TO RESPOND TO AN OFFICE ACTION |